Home

WALKnet Version 7.7 User`s Manual

1. E3_0 ATM NIU View _joTx ATM NIU Port Location B Cell Name NewCell2 ATM NIU ID E30 Shelf ID GUY Slot Number fi 6 Browse Settings Card Type _ RL Serial Number i7421 Perei INE nuE HW Revision fs Clock Provider Status Actual Primary Master Vendor ID 4523 Configured Primary Master Status Redundancy Oper Status JUp Redundancy Status Disabled Admin Status Enable Stand By Status Jin Service Fault Status No Faults Redundant NIU Slot None No Interface Type Speed Oper Status Admin Status 1 E3 35840 Kbps Up Enable 2 E3 35840 Kbps Up Enable Close Refresh Help Response OK Q WALKnet User s Manual 5 25 Chapter 5 Shelf Management E3 NIU Configuration Parameters E3 NIU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected E3 NIU Card Location area Cell Name Shelf ID ATM NIU ID Browse Button Slot Number Settings area Serial Number HW Revision Vendor ID Status area Oper Status Fault status Admin Status The name of the cell for which this E3 NIU has been defined The name of the shelf for which this E3 NIU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID The system name if defined for the ATM NIU or when no system name is defined the slot number is used as the ATM NIU ID The system name is defined in the ATM NIU Properties Edit dialog box
2. i m ___ _ ____ B Cell Neme NewCen B Cell Name NewCell Sector Name Sector Name News ector3 Spann Shel BS BU ID 10 035 104 BS BU ID eu B Curent Software Aa a N ia i Current Software A Version o Versi EN a ere Description Jw3k_BUSA_20 11 Cescription Jw3k_BSBU_3 0 12 Status fok Status ok Standby Software Apa __HhHhHk_4HHkH Slandbw Softaare eon o Version E Cescription W3K_BSBU_3 0 11 pene wak BUSA 3011 Status a a Status oK Card Ino Card Info _ j oO Hardware Revision jaz Hardware Revision AD Yendo ID a277 Vendor ID 4277 Cine Refresh Resa Switchower Help Close Refresh Reset Switchover Response CK Response OK The read only parameters displayed in the BS BU Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which the BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which the BS BU has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The name of the Shelf for which the BS BU has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the carrier index of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Current Software area Version The current version 10 34 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and
3. 2 2 WALKnet User s Manual Starting WALKnet WALKnet tracks your Logins and keeps the results in log files Log files are named Access_WALKNet txt and placed in the directory defined by the NMS_LOG environment variable sub directory Audit_Log Notes For information about how to define the NMS_LOG Environment Variable see Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files on page 1 16 Access to the WALKair system from WALKnet requires authentication An administrator user configures the user name and password The default user name is admin and the default password is ad Refer to Chapter 9 Security Management for details 2 Enter your User Name and Password and click OK The WALKnet Main window is displayed Figure 2 2 WALKnet Main Window Knet Map sabe sala Sa aT Sz The WALKnet Main window is described in the following section WALKnet User s Manual 2 3 Chapter 2 Getting Started WALKnet Main Window The WALKnet Main window includes the following areas a Title Bar on page 2 4 below a Menu Bar on page 2 4 below a Toolbar on page 2 10 a Status Bar on page 2 11 a Network Navigation Tree on page 2 12 a Workspace on page 2 13 Title Bar The WALKnet Title Bar indicates the name of the open map file in the WALKnet Workspace When multiple WALKnet maps are open the name of the active in focus map is
4. 10 0 6 126 BS BU View BEE BS BU Port Services Location a Settings _ _ B Cell Name NewCelt Serial Number 3096 Vendor ID fo Sector NewSector Frequency Band fro BS BU ID 10 0 6 126 Channel Bandwidth fia MHz B Modulation Change Disable TOWSE Actual IP Mode Bridging Status Configured IP Mode Bridging Oper Status Down f Card T ype MMM Admin Status J Disable BS Type BS 3000 Type B Fault Status No Faults Detected Type BS BU Interface Type Speed Oper Status Admin Status a 102400 La ee Down Disable a 2048Kbps o Down Disable jer o Kbps Down Disable f E1 2048 Kbps Down Disable ET 2048 Kbps Down Disable Not Installed l 0 Kbps l Down I Disable Not Installed l 0 Kbps l Down l Disable Not Installed 0 Kbps l Down Disable Not Installed O Kbps Down Disable Close Refresh Help Response OK Q BS BU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected W3000 Stand Alone BS BU The parameters are read only To modify the configuration parameters see WALKair 3000 Stand Alone Base Station Basic Unit Management on page 4 49 The following parameters are displayed in BS BU View Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this W3000 Stand Alone BS BU has been defined Sector The name of the sector for which this W3000 Stand Alone BS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU or when no system name is defin
5. cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 30 WALKair 1000 Base Station Basic Unit Management 4 30 WALKair 3000 Shelf Base Station Basic Unit Management 4 38 WALKair 3000 Stand Alone Base Station Basic Unit Management 4 49 Terminal Station Basic Unit Management ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 58 WALKair 1000 Terminal Station Basic Unit Management 4 58 WALKair 3000 Terminal Station Basic Unit Management 4 66 Frequency Planning sscasnicivinssiasaisuntixancanngiean catrndutuisensaenannicamaacmainnnine 4 77 WALKair 1000 Frequency Planning c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeeees 4 77 WALKair 3000 Frequency Planning ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeennteeeeeeeeeees 4 79 Configuring the RFU and Antenna ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneees 4 82 WALKair 1000 RFU and Antenna Configuration from Sector View 4 82 WALKair 3000 RFU and Antenna Configuration from Sector View 4 87 Configuring RFU and Antenna Parameters from BS BU View WALKair 1000 only 4 91 Configuring TS BU RFU amp and Antenna Parameters WALKair 1000 only 4 93 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Hot Swap Controller Management sccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 5 2 Creating Hot Swap Controller Cards cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 Displaying HSC View ssiccnisecsactiaiontcoctcs casinedouchrenradaatieeanncccanantaraatannide 5 2 Deleting PS sissid a
6. az Location lt o i oo u _ _ Cell Name fintegrationCell Sector Name IntegSector BS BU ID VAELsky Base Station i a i i i Port Port 3 yi Port Type x21 First E1 Channel Terminal Station Customerld 10 x Port Port 3 Fort Type Ei First E1 Channel 5 xv Leased Line Service Bandwidth x 64KBPS 31 Admin Status Disable x ok Cancel Help Note A The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names zi of the cell and sector for which the BS BU is defined The BS BU ID field is also read only and displays the system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box 2 In the Base Station area Select the BS BU port 1 3 for the new service from the dropdown list in the Port field The configured port type of the selected port is automatically displayed in the Port Type field WALKnet User s Manual 7 7 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration When the port type is E1 select the first E1 channel in the First E1 Channel field Note f The E1 channels defined for the signaling for the port are unavailable for selection For example when the Signaling Type for the port is CCS channel 16 i
7. echo LD_LIBRARY_PATH Zontvareezecon fopt odbc lib opt ov lib opt Breezecom usr dt lib usr dt lib echo OV_LIB echo LD_LIBRARY_PATH fopt odbc 1ib opt ov 1ib opt Breezecom usr dt lib it H setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH OV_LIB i source opt ov bin ov envvars csh 6 In the temporary directory where the WALKnet installation files are stored run the installation script by typing unix_install At the prompt enter the full path for installation for example opt Walknet7_5 7 When the GeNMS Wizard opens click on the Next button Choose the Network Platform by clicking the relevant check box Stand Alone or HPOV You can also choose both platforms by checking both check boxes Stand Alone and HPOV Click on the Next button to proceed WALKnet User s Manual 1 9 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet 10 11 12 When the window appears displaying a summary of your settings check that the information is correct Click on the Create button to proceed with the installation Approve any messages that appear during the installation process Approve the Notice message by clicking OK Approve the Wizard Finished Successfully message When the Select the Oracle8i version line appears on the terminal if you are using Oracle select the correct version OR If you are not using Oracle select 6 default When the Do you want to perform WALKair HPOV integration m
8. In the Terminal Station BU View select Detailed Air Performance from the Performance menu In the Main window select Air then Detailed Air Performance from the Performance menu Browse to the required TS BU in the Browse TS dialog box and click OK The Detailed Air Performance dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 2 Detailed Air Performance Dialog Box Mie E3 Coi Nave eR Canane 15 Mts Sector Name NewS ectar C Lah 24 House mm E Selected 15 Min Intervate asau 0 CLARRIE i i Fon re fann 110 x ee tubal Tote TASO 300 xi nas pe 6S vS m B6 nS 35 nme tS 16 1a Ss Dya Rewt FER Counters Help 8 6 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring 2 Select the time period for which you want to view detailed air performance by selecting one of the following Current 15 Minutes Displays the reported performance parameters for the current 15 minute interval Last 24 Hours Displays the reported performance parameters for the last 24 hour period including the current 15 minute interval Selected 15 Min Intervals Displays the reported performance parameters for up to 96 15 minute intervals 3 If you select Selected 15 Minute Intervals select the time interval by selecting start and finish times from the dropdown lists in the From Time and To Time fields Notes The From Time and To Time fields are only displayed when Sele
9. Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files on page 1 16 SNMP MIBs Supported by WALKnet on page 1 19 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet Overview WALKnet is a management application that provides a graphical representation of the WALKair 1000 version 3 10 and higher and or WALKair 3000 systems and enables their configuration and maintenance WALKnet is a user friendly application that runs on Microsoft Windows NT 2000 XP and UNIX platforms The WALKnet application uses the same concepts and terms as defined in the WALKair 1000 System Description and WALKair 3000 System Description This manual assumes prior familiarity with these documents WALKair 1000 System Management of the WALKair 1000 system s Network Elements Base Station Basic Units and Terminal Station Basic Units is as follows a WALKnet is connected to the Ethernet port of a Base Station Basic Unit BS BU and communicates with the BS BU using the SNMP protocol over UDP IP The SNMP agent resides in each BS BU and provides management capabilities for the BS BU and all connected Terminal Station Basic Units TS BUs The BS BU is the SNMP proxy for all the TS BUs a A BS BU communicates with the TS BUs via an Alvarion proprietary protocol over an air link The TS BU does not have an SNMP agent Instead it has a small management kernel that interfaces the BS BU SNMP agent using the air link Embedded Operation Channel EOC WALKnet sends
10. The following air performance parameters appear in the Detailed Air Performance dialog box DL UL ES Downlink Uplink Errored Seconds The ES ratio measured at the TS or BS BU as a percentage DL UL SES Downlink Uplink Severely Errored Seconds The SES ratio measured at the TS or BS BU as a percentage DL UL UAS Downlink Uplink Unavailable Seconds The UAS ratio measured at the TS or BS BU as a percentage DL UP DM Downlink Uplink DMs The DM ratio measured at the TS or BS BU as a percentage DL UL SNR MIN Downlink Uplink Minimal Signal to Noise Ratio The estimated minimum SNR measured by the TS s modem or the BS BU s modem in dB DL UL SNR MAX _ Downlink Uplink Maximal Signal to Noise Ratio The estimated maximum SNR measured by the TS s modem or the BS BU s modem in dB DL UL SNR AVG Downlink Uplink Average Signal to Noise Ratio The estimated average SNR measured by the TS s modem or the BS BU s modem in dB WALKnet User s Manual 8 17 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring DL UL SIG MIN DL UL SIG MAX DL UL SIG AVG UL TX SIGMIN UL TX SIG MAX UL TX SIGAVG DL UL FER Downlink Uplink Minimal Received Signal Level The minimum signal level received at the antenna port of the TS s RF Unit or the BS BU s RF Unit in dBm Downlink Uplink Maximal Received Signal Level The maximum signal level received at the antenna port of the TS s RF Unit or the BS BU s RF Unit in dBm Downlink Uplin
11. 5 Select the BS BUs in the sector to which you want to broadcast the RFU and antenna parameters and click OK The RFU and antenna parameters are broadcast to the selected BS BUs Note The BS BUs that were marked as being offline during a background polling are grayed in the list You cannot select them for broadcast 6 To view the status of the broadcast BS BUs click Show Status The Sector Parameters Broadcast dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 85 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 48 Sector Parameters Broadcast Dialog Box Sector Parameters Broadcast ioj x zs Sector Name integSector Status BS BU _ 10 3 162 Note The BS BUs that were marked as being offline during a background polling are grayed in the list You cannot select them for broadcast The color of the status LED indicates the status of the communication with a BS BU as follows Green Communication OK Red No communication If the RFU and antenna parameters have been successfully set in the BS BU the name IP address of the BS BU is colored green If the parameters were not successfully set the name IP address of the BS BU is colored red 4 86 WALKnet User s Manual Configuring the RFU and Antenna WALKair 3000 RFU and Antenna Configuration from Sector View gt To configure RFU and antenna parameters WALKair 3000 1 In Sector View select RFU and Antenna from the
12. If a session is in progress the Software Download dialog box displays the parameters defined for the last software download session If the fields in the dialog box are inactive grayed you must start a new session see step 2 below 2 From the File menu select New Session This button is only enabled if there is no session in progress A new session is activated and the fields in the dialog box become enabled 3 In the Session Description field enter a description for the session 4 In the TFTP Server IP Address field enter the IP address of the TFTP server 5 You can download either a WALKair software version or a National Protocol File WALKair software version download 10 10 WALKnet User s Manual Software Download In the Version File area select WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 for a WALKair 3000 Shelf or WALKair SA for a WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU from the dropdown list and enter the full path of the version file or browse to the required version file The version file contains the names of the files to be downloaded to the different components as well as relevant compatibility rules National Protocol download WALKair 1000 BS BU only The National Protocol filename appears in the WALKair component tree The file is taken from the previously defined environmental variable see National Protocol System Variable Definition on page 10 8 6 In the Component Selection tree on the left
13. Response OK Q The following parameters are displayed in the W3000 BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this W3000BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this W3000 BS BU has been defined Shelf ID Shelf The name of the Shelf for which this W3000 BS BU has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID Stand Alone BS BU The name for which this W3000 BS BU has been defined BS BU ID Shelf The system name if defined for the W3000 BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the W3000 BS BU Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined for the W3000 BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address WALKnet User s Manual 6 19 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Settings area MAC Address Auto Negotiation Handshake Ethernet Speed Output VLAN Data Status area Oper Status Port Admin Status The MAC address of the Ethernet card This field is read only Two values Enable or Disable When Enable is selected the system automatically senses whether the communication is Full or Half Duplex Handshake and whether the Ethernet speed is 10 or 100 Mbps When Disable is selected the user can select the Handshake and Ethernet Speed manually see Hand shake and Ethernet Speed below The handshake value Half Duplex Ful
14. WALKnet User s Manual B 21 Appendix B Service SLA Client Traps Trap Number 70 71 78 79 80 81 B 22 Trap Name in MIB SlaStatusOn SlaStatusOff ServiceStatusOn ServiceStatusOff ClientStatusOn ClientStatusOff Send Criterion An SLA is operationally down An SLA is operationally up An Service is operationally down An Service is Admin disabled An Service is operationally up An Service is Admin enabled An Client is Admin disabled An Client is Admin enabled WALKnet User s Manual Clock Control Traps Clock Control Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 72 ClockChangeOn Send Criterion The BU is operating on internal clock Clock control detected that the Master Clock Card has failed Clock control detected that the Master Clock Link has failed Clock control detected that the Redundant Clock Card has failed Clock control detected that the Redundant Clock Link has failed Clock control detected that the clock on bus A has failed Clock control detected that the clock on bus B has failed Clock control detected that both clocks on bus A and bus B failed Clock control detected that the system is operating on free running clock WALKnet User s Manual B 23 Appendix B Trap Number 73 B 24 Trap Name in MIB ClockChangeOff Send Criterion The BU is operating on clock from the shelf Clock control detected that the Master Clock Card has
15. gt To delete a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU 1 In Sector View select W3000 BS BU SA from the Element menu and then select Delete from the sub menu The Delete Card confirmation message is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 55 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 32 Delete BS BU Confirmation Message Delete BS BU This will permanently remove this BS BU and all its contents from this sector Are you sure 2 Click Yes to delete the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU from the sector Modifying W3000 Stand Alone BS BU Properties You can modify W3000 Stand Alone BS BU properties from Sector View or BS BU View gt To modify W3000 Stand Alone BS BU properties 1 Open the W3000 BS BU Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In Sector View select W3000 BS BU SA from the Element menu and select Edit In BS BU View select Edit BS BU from the BS BU menu The BS BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed 4 56 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 33 BS BU Properties Edit Dialog Box 10 0 6 126 BS BU Properties Edit Location _ RRp ApAR pjpN a p SNMP Configuration i zs Cell Name NewCen SNMP Poll Interval sec fao Sector NewSector SNMP Poll Timeout sec Jeo BS BU Address fi 0 0 6 126 Minimum Alarm Severity info a Sehng i System Name J Name System Location J IP Address System
16. 4 From the dropdown list in the Beam width field select the angle of the sector 5 In the IF MUX Type field select the type of the IF MUX at the Base Station 6 Click OK The new sector is created and is displayed in the List of sectors in Cell View WALKnet User s Manual 4 9 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Displaying Sector View 4 10 Sector View displays configuration information for a sector and enables you to configure a sector by defining BS BUs within it Sector View depends upon the selected IF MUX type For example if the IF MUX type is W1000 8 Ports or W1000 16 Ports you will see Sector View that contains WALKair 1000 BS BUs only if it s IF MUX type is W3000 6 Ports you will see a Sector View that contains both WALKair 1000 BS BUs and a WALKair 3000 Shelf In addition if the IF MUX type is W3000 2 Ports or W3000 None you will see a Sector View that contains both WALKair 1000 BS BUs and WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BUs To access Sector View Sector View is accessed in one of the following ways E In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a sector node a In Cell View by double clicking a sector in the List of sectors a In Cell View by selecting a sector in the List of sectors and selecting View from the Sector menu M Inthe Main window by selecting Sector from the Configuration menu or clicking View Sector in the toolbar Then browsing to the required sector in the Browse Sector dialo
17. Bronze CIR is always zero all traffic is UBR and is mapped to a non compliant traffic queue This traffic is forwarded to the air only if BW is available This traffic cannot exceed the MIR defined in the SLA Silver The SLA has a CIR greater then zero IP traffic that is compliant with the CIR is forwarded to a low priority guaranteed queue All traffic exceeding the CIR and up to the MIR is mapped to a non compliant traffic queue as in the Bronze class Gold The SLA has a CIR greater then zero and IP traffic that is compliant with the CIR is forwarded to a second priority guaranteed queue mapped according to the ToS bits of the packet All traffic exceeding the CIR and up to the MIR is mapped to a non compliant traffic queue as in the Bronze class Platinum The SLA has a CIR greater then zero and IP traffic that is compliant with the CIR is forwarded to a maximum priority guaranteed queue mapped according to the ToS bits of the packet All traffic exceeding the CIR and up to the MIR is mapped to a non compliant traffic queue as in the Bronze class Eth port This is a number of the Ethernet port one of the four Ethernet ports on the TS which the SLA serves VLAN A unique VLAN Id is defined for each SLA The VLAN ID has the following structure Bits 11 and 10 are constantly binary 10 Bits 9 4 are the TS number 0 63 Bits 3 0 are the SLA number 16 31 WALKnet User s Manual 7 59 Chapter 7 System Servic
18. J w3000Stand AloneBS B B WALKair1000 eo Find farting A BH australian E lewceit E sher B m7 E w1281 1 J Bureas E su 1 56 J BuRred10 56 su stt 14 su stot 15 WAL Kair3000Shelf NewSector4 10 0 35 126 gt 199 203 141 251 10 01 82 10 01 84 gt 10 0 15 199 gt 10 0 25 205 The cell icon positioned on a GIF background image of an area indicates the geographical location of a WALKair cell The color of the cell icon alerts the user to the general status of the devices within the cell The color of the base of the cell icon dfs reflects the status of the indoor equipment and the color of the antenna waves Se reflects the status of the air link WALKnet User s Manual 2 13 Chapter 2 Getting Started The cell color indications are as follows Green OK no alarms Yellow Minor alarm Red Major alarm Gray All elements are disconnected White No defined elements in the cell Right click Menu Right clicking inside the Workspace displays the following menu New Map Open Map Save Map Save Map As Background New Cell The options are as follows 2 14 New Map Enables you to create a new map Open Map Enables you to open an existing map Save Map Saves the current map in a file Save Map As Enables you to save the open map file with a new name Background Enables you to change the image file used as the backgro
19. Location area Cell Name Shelf ID ATM NIU ID Browse Button Slot Number Settings area Serial Number HW Revision Vendor ID Status area Oper Status Fault status Admin Status The name of the cell for which this ATM NIU has been defined Read only The name of the shelf for which this ATM NIU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID The system name if defined for the ATM NIU or when no system name is defined the slot number is used as the ATM NIU ID The system name is defined in the ATM NIU Properties Edit dialog box Enables you to display configuration information for another ATM NIU in any shelf within same map Number of the slot in the shelf where this ATM NIU is installed Read only The serial number of the ATM NIU The hardware version of the card The card vendor ID Current card status Up Down Test The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable Detected Card Type Area WALKnet User s Manual 5 19 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Detected Card Type The auto detected card type It also indicates whether the slot has a card inserted in it or not Clock Provider Status area Configured This parameter represents the configured status of the ATM NIU
20. TS AHAN N Customer ID fo o o w V5 Interface Index 2 lt lt lt gt V5 EF L3 Address C E1 Channel 5 User Type iSDNoverVS x o Cancel Help 3 Enter a subscriber identification number in the User Id field 4 Select the BS BU V5 interface over which you want to define the subscriber from the dropdown list in the V5 Interface Index field 7 22 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration 5 Enter a BS BU L3 address for the subscriber in the V5 EF L3 Address field 6 Select the TS BU over which you want to define the subscriber from the dropdown list in the Customer ID field 7 Select the TS BU V5 interface over which you want to define the subscriber from the dropdown list in the V5 Interface Index field 8 Enter a TS BU L3 address for the subscriber in the V5 EF L3 Address field 9 Select the E1 channel on the TS BU for the subscriber from the dropdown list in the E1 Channel field 10 Select PSTN over V5 ISDN over V5 or ISDN as the user type from the dropdown list in the User Type field 11 Click OK The new subscriber is displayed in the V5 Subscribers dialog box Deleting V5 Subscribers To delete a subscriber from the V5 service the subscriber must have a Disable administrative status gt To delete V5 Subscribers 1 In the V5 Subscribers dialog box select an existing subscriber from the list of V5 subscribers 2 From the V5 Subscribers menu select Delete The Delet
21. ATM NIU for TDM ATM port VPI VCI The number of the ATM NIU card to define TDM service connection path This field is read only The ATM NIU port interface number is required to define the service connection path This field is read only The VPI VCI fields define the ATM virtual channel If the ATM NIU card number field indicates Ethernet connection these fields are read only 7 74 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management 12xE1 NIU area Shelf 12xE1 NIU card only NIU Slot Number The number of the ATM NIU E1 card to define TDM service connection path This field is read only E1 port The E1 NIU port interface number is required to define the service connection path This number ranges from 1 to 12 Line Type The E1 interface framing format This framing format must be identical to the format in the E1 area for the TS described earlier in this table This field is read only First Channel The time slot 1 31 BS BU SA E1 Area Stand Alone BS BU only E1 port The E1 port interface number is required to define the service connection path This number ranges from 2 9 and depends on the type interface on the Stand Alone BS BU BS 3000 Type B 2 5 BS 3000 Type C 2 9 Line type The E1 interface framing format T his framing format must be identical to the format in the E1 area for the TS described earlier in this table This field is read only First Channel The time slo
22. Enables you to display configuration information for another E3 NIU in any shelf within same map Number of the slot in the shelf where this E3 NIU is installed The serial number of the E3 NIU The hardware version of the E3 NIU The card vendor ID Current card status Up Down Test The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable Detected Card Type Area Detected Card Type The auto detected card type It also indicates whether the slot has a card inserted in it or not Clock Provider Status area WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management Configured This parameter represents the configured status of the E3 NIU card as a clock provider Actual This parameter represents the actual status of the E3 NIU card as a clock provider Redundancy area Redundancy Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this Status card Enabled Disabled Stand By Indicates whether the board is a standby device Status Read only Redundant Indicates the slot number of the standby card NIU Slot None indicates that a redundant card is not Interface list at bottom of dialog defined Onboard E1 Ports Configuration parameters Read only Interface Can be E3 only Type Speed The data transfer rate in Kbps Port Oper The operational status of
23. G Broadcast parameters to All BS BUs in the Sector i No Cancel For broadcast of parameters to all BS BUs in the sector click the Yes button and proceed to step 6 OR For broadcast of parameters to only selected BS BUs click the No button and proceed to the next step The Select BS BUs To Send dialog box is displayed Figure 4 52 Select BS BUs To Send Dialog Box SelectBSBUsToSend xl 725 Sector Name NewSector3 Select BS BU Iv ProbT Vv Silly M Layman 2 Select the WALKair 1000 BS BUs in the sector to which you want to broadcast the RFU and antenna parameters and click OK The RFU and antenna parameters are broadcast to the selected WALKair 1000 BS BUs Note The BS BUs that were marked as being offline during a background polling are grayed in the list You cannot select them for broadcast 4 90 WALKnet User s Manual Configuring the RFU and Antenna 3 To view the status of the broadcast WALKair 1000 BS BUs click Show Status The Sector Parameters Broadcast dialog box is displayed as in the pure W1K sector RFU and antenna parameters see Figure 4 48 on page 4 86 Configuring RFU and Antenna Parameters from BS BU View WALKair 1000 only You can view the RFU and antenna parameters set on a particular W1000 BS BU and configure the current and default modem working point and variable operation point parameters which are specific for a BS BU Note F
24. The Alarm Browser windows include the following buttons Button Title Function Refresh Alarms History Refreshes updates the WALKair Refresh window only Alarms List in the WALKnet Alarm Browser to include the most recent alarm s Trap File Alarms History Enables you to open a Trap file Trap File window only with the extension trap that includes a list of alarms Save File Alarms History Enables you to save selected Save File window only alarms into a Trap file with the extension trap Close Closes the window Close Help Opens the Help file Help WALKnet User s Manual 12 7 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Alarm Browser Menu The WALKair Alarms History window includes an Actions menu Acknowledge Unacknowledge Delete Get Active Alarms Actions Menu Item Acknowledge Unacknowledge Delete Get Active Alarms Meaning Marks a selected group of alarms or all the alarms in the WALKair Alarms History window by checking the Ack column check boxes as alarms that have been dealt with or cleared Alarms in the History windows are unacknowledged by default i e the Ack column check boxes are unchecked see above You can unacknowledge previously acknowledged alarms by unchecking the Ack column check boxes for the alarms Deletes a selected group of alarms or all the alarms in the WALKair Alarms History window Gets
25. Dest IP Addr Behind LR BS BU VLAN ID TS VLAN ID Subnet Mask Behind LR The number of the SLA for the IP Data service The IP SLA description This field is read only Committed Information Rate CIR for the IP traffic defined for this client in this particular IP service The value of this parameter is N when the actual CIR equals to N 256 Kbps This parameter defines the maximum rate this pipe can achieve not guaranteed Only if free BW is available is it allocated for this pipe This field is read only This parameter defines the Class of Service Platinum Gold Silver or Bronze This field is read only The administrative status of the IP Service Enable or Disable The operational status of the IP Service Active or Inactive This field is read only This is a number of the Ethernet port on the TS by which the SLA is served read only Indicates whether the user s LAN is working with VLAN This parameter defines whether the VLAN tag is sent in IP packets read only The Local LAN Router IP Address In case the client is connected to the TS via a router the router s IP address must be defined read only The Destination IP Address behind the Local Router read only Active for Layer 2 Bridging Mode Grayed for Layer 3 Basic Mode Active for Layer 2 Bridging Mode Grayed for Layer 3 Basic Mode The Subnet Mask behind the Local Router 7 84 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 30
26. Location area read only Cell Name Shelf ID Sector The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf Stand Alone BS BU only The system name if defined of the unit or when no system name is defined the IP address of the unit Client area read only Client Name Location BS BU ID TS ID Status area Admin Status Oper status TDM Service area TDM SLA ID TDM SLA Name First Channel Bandwidth The administratively assigned name for this Client The physical location of this Client e g Client s address Shelf The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS The administrative status of the TDM Service Enable or Disable The operational status of the TDM Service Active or Inactive This field is read only The number of the SLA for the TDM service This is the SLA description set by an Operator This field is read only The first air time slot allocated for the specified TDM service The Leased Line bandwidth size expressed in the numb
27. Port Number Settings area Line Type Loss Alarm Mode Signaling Mode Loopback mode Note The name of the cell for which this BS has been defined The name of the Shelf for which this TS has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID The system name if defined for the W3000 12xE1 NIU or when no system name is defined the cus tomer ID of the 12xE1 NIU The number of the 12xE1 NIU onboard port The E1 interface framing formats Unframed Framed No CRC Framed CRC4 Framed CRC4 Ext The E1 loss alarm mode ITUT or ETSI The stan dard used for loss alarm criteria The El signaling mode Transparent or None The type of the loopback applied to the E1 telecom interface None Remote Local Payload or Other with the E1 x 12 NIU d Line Type and Signaling mode must have the same format on a TS that communicates Status area Oper Status Port Admin Status The operational status of the E1 interface Up or Down Read only The administrative status of the E1 interface Enabled or Disabled WALKnet User s Manual 6 29 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration From the 12xE1 NIU E1 Port Configuration dialog box you can do the following a Configure the parameters of an onboard E1 port a Set the E1 port administrative status 6 30 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters W30
28. PsaD a IP SLA SLA ID SLA Name S MIR CoS Eth Port BS VLAN TS VLAN m Cose Find Show Clients Refresh Help Notes For a Stand Alone BS BU the Sector name appears instead of the Shelf E ID and the BS BU ID drop down list is grayed gt To display IP SLA 1 After opening the IP SLA List dialog box select the BS BU from the dropdown list in the BS BU ID field 2 Select the TS from the dropdown list in the TS ID field 3 To display all IP SLAs currently defined on the selected BS BU and TS select All from the dropdown list in the IP SLA ID field 4 To display one IP SLA defined on the selected BS BU and TS select IP SLA ID from the dropdown list in the IP SLA ID field 7 56 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management 5 Click the Find button Notes x The IP SLA ID field is disabled when there are no IP SLAs on the selected BS BU and TS The IP SLA List dialog box displays a list of IP SLA currently defined on the selected BS BU and TS This list includes the following read only fields Location area Cell Name Shelf ID Sector The name of the cell for which this shelf has been defined W3000 Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf W3000 Stand Alone BS BU only The name of the sector in which the unit is defined SLA ID Selection area BS BU ID TS ID IP SLA ID
29. SLA Location az BS BU ID Bus Cell Name NewCelt TSID Ts2 IP SLA ID fi Shelf ID Shelf Client List p Admin Client Name Location Info Status CLI Enable ee a a ee es AE a es E es es ee E a ee ey es es ee ee Close Service Refresh Help 1 In the TDM SLA List dialog box select an existing TDM SLA from the list of TDM SLA and click the Show Clients button The Show Clients dialog box on the TDM SLA is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 95 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 53 Show Clients Dialog Box for TDM SLA Shelf Show Clients Clients SLA az BS BU ID TS 1D TDM SLA ID F olx Location BUB Cell Name NewCell rs2 Shelf ID Shelf Client List 7 Admin lt Client Name Location Info Status CLI Enable The Show Clients dialog box displays a list of clients that use the SLA was selected in the previous dialog box This list includes the following read only fields SLA area BS BU ID TS ID IP SLA ID Or TDM SLA ID Location area Cell Name Shelf ID The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS The number of the SLA The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined Shelf only Th
30. IP address of the Authorized Manager The Authorized Managers defined in your system are displayed in the Authorized Managers dialog box gt To access the Authorized Managers dialog box Access the Authorized Managers dialog box in one of the following ways E For WALKair 1000 in Base Station BU View from the BS BU menu select Authorized Managers For WALKair 3000 in Shelf View select Authorized Managers E In the Main window select Authorized Managers from the Configuration menu Browse to the required BS BU or Shelf in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The Authorized Managers dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 1 Authorized Managers Dialog Box 10 10 3 69 Authorized Managers ioj Xx Manager Location Cell Name JintegrationCell Sector Name JinteaSector BS BU ID fi0 10 3 69 IP Address Trap Transmission Set Operation Community 10 10 3 239 disable hi 10 10 10 3 disable fenabe j 10 10 10 69 enable enable public foionian enable enable 10 10 15 200 enable enable PUBLIC 150 50 50 2 enable enable Close Refresh Help 10 2 WALKnet User s Manual Authorized Managers The read only parameters displayed in the Authorized Managers dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined BS BU ID
31. NewCel3 Sector Name Sigis ect BS BU ID ProbT TS BU ID REG Port Port 1 Settings Line Type Multi Frame CREA yi Loss Alarm Mode jets o Signaling Mode Transparent x Loopback Mode None 8880t lt CS wt v Admin Status Disse w o Cancel Anal Refresh Heb elp o Response OK The Port Configuration dialog box for an E1 75 1200 configured port type has an additional field Connector Type and is shown below Figure 6 3 E1 75 120Q Port Configuration Dialog Box Layman E1 Port Configuration Location N zs Cell Name Newt Sector Name NewSectol BS BU ID Layman Port Poi ts Settings _ARARApApRApApAAAR JTpaAaS aaa Line Type Muti Frame CREA yi Loss Alarm Mode jets i t S yi Signaling Mode ecs206 15 00 x Connector Type RJ45 1200hm yi Loopback Mode Noe w Admin Status Disse o Cancel Apply Refresh Help elp Response OK 6 6 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters The following are configuration parameters for an E1 E1 FR or E1 75 1209 configured port type Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defin
32. implements a UNI to the CPE FRAD In the case of the UNI only the network side is supported The WALKair Frame Relay interface runs on the dedicated telecom card over the V35 X21 E1 or Ethernet physical interface Ethernet Overview WALKair s Ethernet port implementation leverages WALKair s Frame Relay functionality towards the CPE WALKair s Ethernet port encapsulates the outgoing packets and decapsulates the incoming packets with the Frame Relay RFC1490 Route encapsulation Multiple DLCIs are assigned to the Ethernet port up to 250 DLCIs at the Base Station and up to 30 at the Terminal Station Packets coming from the Ethernet interface are sent over the air through the different PVCs using the following mapping mechanisms VLAN based DLCI mapping and source destination IP subnet DLCI mapping Frames that arrive from the air are transmitted by the Ethernet interface to the connected device containing VLAN tags or not according to the source DLCI Configuring Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration and maintenance of the WALKair Frame Relay application involves the management of the following RFC 1604 MIB objects a Frame Relay Logical Port Table 7 26 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration a Frame Relay Management VC Signaling Table a Frame Relay PVC End Point Table a Frame Relay PVC Connection Table Frame Relay parameters can be configured for BS BUs and all registered TS
33. on page 8 29 Collection Process Area The Collection Process area includes parameters that define the collection process such as the frequency of the process as well as information about the current or last collection cycle as shown below Figure 8 10 Collection Process Area Collection Process n Cycle Progress Operational Mode CLIENT Cycle Status IDLE 4 0 Collect Previous Cycle Start fia 8 01 12 54 30 BSBUs Next Cycle Start fia 8 01 13 54 30 Cycle Interval min feo BsBus Appl DB Connection Status Connected Max Concurrency fi Aoo x 8 26 WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection The Collection Process area includes the following read only fields Operational Mode Cycle Status Previous Cycle Start Next Cycle Start DB Connection Status Cycle Progress Notes The operational mode of the WALKnet session Client or Server The status of the collection cycle Busy WALKnet is currently collecting data from BS BUs Server mode or receiving information from the database Client mode Idle WALKnet is between collection cycles The start time of the previous collection cycle When the Cycle Status is Busy this field is called Current Cycle Start and displays the start time of the current collection cycle The start time of the next collection cycle The connection status WALKnet must be connected to the database Connected to perform data collection If
34. select New from the Terminal menu The New Terminal dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 40 New Terminal Dialog Box xT arget BU Slot 5 New Terminal Properties iof x Location P SqK A a BS Cell Name New tC S Sector Name NewSecto2 Shelf ID Tag BS BU ID Bu st 5 t C sS Modem Modulation Recommended Qam x Terminal aaa Terminal Station Index Booo Customer ID E l Configured Type yi System Name System Location CS System Contact Estimated BS TS Distance km Rix Operating Point VOP Admin Status Disse St lt isi i S Admin Status Enbe gt Response OK ie The following parameters are displayed in the New Terminal Properties dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this TS has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this TS has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The name of the shelf for which this TS has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Shelf Name Stand Alone only Name of the Stand Alone BS BU BS BU ID Shelf only The BS BU system name if defined or when no system name is defined the IP Address of the BS BU is used as the BS BU ID WALKnet User s Manual 4 69 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Modem Modulation Area Recom
35. x Port 1 in slot 1 of the shelf If Clock Redundancy is applied the system default for Clock Secondary Master that will replace the Primary in the event of failure is an NIU card on Port 1 in slot 2 of the shelf 10 In the Clock Source Selection field choose the clock selection mode Manual or Automatic from the dropdown list When the clock selection mode is Automatic the clock source is selected automatically by the MPU and the system clock settings in the dialog are grayed When you select Manual as the clock selection mode select a clock source from the Clock Source field dropdown list as follows External external clock source via NIU card external clock input according to G 703 2 MHz clock synchronization NIU from an NIU card Internal via BS BU cards internal clock Select Enabled in the Clock Output field drop down list to utilize the shelf output clock signal to synchronize other external equipment If you selected External or NIU as the clock source type from the Clock Redundancy drop down list select Enable or Disable clock redundancy to permit or prevent moving to a Secondary Clock Master when the Primary Clock Master fails Note z For an Internal clock source redundancy is not available 11 4 24 If you selected Manual as the selection mode and NIU as the clock source In the Clock Primary Master section of the dialog select a shelf slot number from the NIU drop down
36. 0 15 90 W3000 Device Status is Enabled Up OFF BU Down BS on slot 5 BS name BU B 01 26 2004 15 31 39 10 0 15 90 W3000 Device Status is Enabled Up OFF BU Down BS on slot 2 BS name BU Red B 01 26 2004 15 31 59 10 0 15 90 3000 Device Status is Enabled Up OFF BU Down BS on slot 15 BS name BU A 01 26 2004 15 32 21 fioo7s 30 Ww3000 E1 Interface is Changed ON E1 LOSS SIG Port no 5 TS BS slot 15 BS name BU A TS 01 26 2004 15 32 23 10 0 15 90 w3000 E1 Interface is Changed ON E1 LOSS SIG Port no 6 TS BS slot 15 BS name BU A TS 01 26 2004 15 31 35 10 0 15 90 w3000 TS Radio Link LOSS ON TS CID 10BS on slot 5 BS name BU B 01 26 2004 15 32 00 10 0 15 90 w3000 TS Radio Link LOSS ON TS CID 2BS on slot 15 BS name BUA 01 26 2004 15 32 14 10 0 15 90 w3000 TS Radio Link LOSS OFF TS CID 2 BS on slot 15 BS name BU A 01 26 2004 15 37 26 10 0 15 90 w3000 TS Radio Link LOSS ON TS CID 12345678 BS on slot 15 BS name BU A or 26 2004 15 32 18 10 0 15 90 w3000 E1 Interface is Changed ON E1 AIS Port no 3 TS BS slot 15 BS name BU A TS CID 2 Normal or 262004 15 32 19 10 0 15 90 W3000 E1 Interface is Changed ON E1 AIS Port no 4 TS BS slot 15 BS name BU A TS CID 2 Normal or 26 2004 15 32 20 10 0 15 90 w3000 E1 Interface is Changed OFF E1 AIS Port no 3 TS BS slot 15 BS name BU A TS CID 2 Normal or 262004 15 32 24 10 0 15 90 W3000 E1 Interface is Changed OFF E1 AIS Port no 4 TS BS slot 15 BS name BU A TS CID 2 Waning o 2
37. 12 19 Figure 12 10 W1000 W 3000 Stand Alone Sector View Sector View olx Sector Element Loca New B ca W3000BS BU SA gt ee View Move Get Active Alarms Close Refresh Heb 2 In Sector View click on the WALKair 1000 BS BU you want to display alarms for 3 From the W1000 BS BU menu select W1000 BS BU Get Active Alarms In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the latest alarms for the selected device are displayed 12 22 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Requesting Alarms from a WALKair 3000 Shelf BS BU gt To request alarms from a WALKair 3000 Shelf BS BU 1 Access Sector View see Accessing Sector View on page 12 19 Figure 12 11 W3000 Shelf Sector View Sector View iof x Sector Shelf Element Edit Properties Moths Shelf Name JNMS_MPU oo HIRE IR WR Shelf IP Address hoors Authorized Managers IF MUX Number JFMUXO Configuration gt Services CRITICAL m MAJOR m MINOR m WARNING m EXT CLOCK m INTCLOCK m 2 pig a O a 3 ie g x ZOS Refresh Response OK 2 In Sector View click on the WALKair 3000 Shelf BS BU you want to display alarms for 3 From the Shelf menu select Get Active Alarms In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the latest alarms for the selected device are displayed 12 23 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 12 The WALKnet A
38. 23 End Point Traffic Statistics Dialog Box WALKNet 10 10 3 69 BS BU End Point Traffic Statistics Location zs Cell Name IntegrationCell Sector Name IntegSector BS BU ID fi 0 10 3 69 Browse Interval Duration minutes 30 Apply Polling Time Apr 24 17 05 11 Previous Next jo sd o 0 12 Pot 12 Port 1 jo b b ff 12 Post 12 Port 1 12 Port 1 Notes x The Polling Time information displays the last time that WALKnet polled the selected device 3 Specify how often WALKnet polls the selected device in the Duration minutes field and click Apply You can specify between 5 and 60 minutes Notes WALKnet stores data in a cyclic buffer in its database for up to 96 inter vals whatever length the interval 4 Click Get Data The Get Data button becomes a Stop button and WALKnet polls the selected device at the specified intervals displaying the collected data for each Frame Relay port on the BS BU and TS BU over which the selected service or services is configured Scroll to the right to see the data for the TS BU ports WALKnet User s Manual 8 47 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring In Out In DE In EX Out EX 8 48 For each Frame Relay port on the BS BU and TS BU the following statistics are displayed In Frames The number of frames received by the network ingress for this PVC end point This includes any frames discarded by the network due
39. Automatic Manual Shelf only The active RFU A B The operating status Up Down RFU A and B IF Cable areas The parameters in the RFU B IF Cable area parameters are only enabled when redundancy is enabled Type Length Measurement Units Gain Valid Tx Gain dB Rx Gain dB Note The cable type Other LMR400 CF14CU2U500hCm The length of cable in measurement units Measurement units for cable length The validity of the Tx and Rx Gain Valid Not Valid When Not Valid is selected the system default Gain is used Stand Alone BS BU Set to Valid The current Tx Gain in dB Stand Alone BS BU If a DE MUX is connected the cable gain attenuation must be measured together with the DE MUX The current Rx Gain in dB Stand Alone BS BU If a DE MUxX is connected the cable gain attenuation must be measured together with the DE MUX value to all WALKair 1000 BS BUs defined in this sector In BS BU RFU and antenna A If the cable length is measured in feet WALKnet converts it to meters and transmits this screens you can view the cable length value in meters 1 Click Apply to save any modifications made to the RFU and antenna parameters to the MPU card In the case of a WALKair 1000 BS BU configured in a WALKair 3000 Sector the Broadcast Parameters dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 89 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 51 Broadcast Parameters Dialog Box
40. Configured Type 21 FR 2M eee Eee ee E Fort Type jon x Signaling Protocol fansiT1617D x User N391 ic m User N392 bo E User N393 ao gf User T391 ho g Net N392 bo g Net N393 4 Net T392 jis a E1 Time Slots 2 When the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box has been accessed from Base Station BU View select the BS BU or one of its registered TS BUs from the dropdown list in the Device field Notes z When the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box has been accessed from Terminal Station BU View the Device field is disabled 3 Select a telecom port from the list of ports in the Select One Frame Relay Port area This list only displays those ports in the selected device that have a Configured Type of FR WALKnet User s Manual 7 31 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 4 When the selected device is a BS BU select UUNI NUNI or NNI as the port type from the dropdown list in the Port Type field 5 Select values from the dropdown lists in the remaining fields as required 6 When the Frame Relay port is defined over an E1 FR telecom card and the Line Type is Unframed enter the E1 time slot 1 to 31 allocated for the specified Frame Relay port in the E1 Time Slots field You can enter a number and or ranges separated by commas for example 1 2 3 15 30 32 7 Click OK The new Frame Relay port is displayed in the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box E
41. Dr e A E E ET B 12 IF MUX Trap A A A A A ssnasasascdasbaaes B 13 Software Traps seicvicicevscwccsscssevessnvecnivedeaentsreveessentsauvecteenesseusverssersvsesevesseys B 14 Configuration Traps scetescctenisinssatenaeuseis cchivenciapetnadeucrin eeaneanssininaedaanseaeiee B 16 Sector Traps cscvcsicessccscvesscesinsendsncvadenes edecnsduededuaitsctesevecsseeenpcussecheeendexsesess B 17 MPU Communication Traps ccecccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeeneees B 18 Shelf Traps isiocscdccenscevncenessevevnrsnuvesceentsceuscievenveestscnvesnvectsceusssnsseseesteenssetes B 19 BS BU Redundancy Traps ci ccisnsiecds ciescsanensesciiaeneinnneencanansanectaannsencenr nneone B 21 Service SLA Cent Traps viscccisccseccscsecccsssnesctsesesscssnedesensecveeensscresescensverss B 22 Clock Control rapS incccicsissseserdecdecerteesvsariesstesuveesestersseestesvisessddeeareeesees B 23 General Traps ciiivccciescitcsctsivecetsecesvevevidecestvans lecueieccesvevecsdvevsdevececveevevesderss B 25 Appendix C WALKair 1000 Error Messages WALKair 1000 Error Messages ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeneess C 2 WALKnet User s Manual 9 Contents This page left intentionally blank 10 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet In This Chapter Overview on page 1 2 System Requirements on page 1 5 Installing WALKnet on page 1 7 Connecting WALKnet to a Database on page 1 13
42. Files z Cancel 2 Select a new background image for your map and click Open The selected image is displayed as the background for the open map 3 4 WALKnet User s Manual Opening an Existing Map Opening an Existing Map WALKnet enables multiple maps to be saved and opened whenever required gt To open an existing map 1 Open an existing map in one of the following ways From the File menu select Open Map Click Open in the toolbar Right click in the Workspace and select Open Map from the options displayed The Open Map dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 3 3 Open Map Dialog Box Open Map OF Xx B Map Name SanFran ox Cancel Hep 2 Click the arrow to the right of the Map Name field and select a map from the dropdown list of existing maps 3 Click OK The selected map is displayed in the WALKnet Workspace You can now modify the configuration of this map or save it with a different name See Saving a Map with a New Name on page 3 7 WALKnet User s Manual 3 5 Chapter 3 Map Management Saving Maps To prevent the map and its cell configuration from being lost WALKnet enables you to save already defined maps with a different name New maps should be saved before closing the WALKnet application This can save time by enabling you to create a new map with the configuration of an existing map In this way you can modify the configuration
43. H in the Bandwidth field Modify the administrative status of the service by selecting Enable Disable from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field WALKnet User s Manual 7 93 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 7 Click OK or Apply Notes The First Channel and Bandwidth fields are read only when the Line Type of the E1 Port is Unframed Deleting a TDM Service TDM services can be deleted from the system gt To delete a TDM service 1 n the Services List dialog box select an existing TDM service from the list of TDM services 2 From the TDM Service menu select Delete The Delete TDM Service confirmation message is displayed as shown below Figure 7 51 Delete TDM Service Confirmation Message 3 Click Yes to delete the selected TDM Service 7 94 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Show Clients WALKair 3000 Show Clients You can view a list of clients that use services based on the IP or TDM SLA configure a client s details and invoke the service list of the client via the Show Clients dialog box gt To access the Show Clients dialog box 1 The Show Clients list dialog box is accessed as follows In the IP SLA List dialog box select an existing IP SLA from the list of IP SLA and click the Show Clients button The Show Clients dialog box on the IP SLA is displayed as shown below Figure 7 52 Show Clients Dialog Box on the IP SLA Shelf Show Clients olx Clients
44. Help Response OK For a Stand Alone BS BU the Sector name appears instead of the Shelf ID gt To display clients 1 To display all clients currently defined on the current shelf leave the Client Name field empty or enter the wildcard symbol 2 To display one or several clients enter the Client Name or several letters of the Client Name in the Client Name field of the Client area You can enter the wildcard symbol at the end of the string It is assumed to be there by default even if you do not enter it explicitly 3 Click the Find button Notes In the Client Name field you can only enter English letters spaces and wildcard symbols The data in the Client Name field is converted automatically to uppercase English letters when the user clicks the Find button 7 48 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Client Management The Client List dialog box displays a list of clients It includes the fol lowing read only fields Location area Cell Name Shelf ID Sector Client List Small square Client Name Location Info BS BU ID TS ID IP TDM Admin The name of the cell for which this shelf has been defined The system name if defined of the shelf or Stand Alone BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf The system name if defined of the Stand Alone BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address Indicates the client s service
45. IP SLA Performance by selecting one of the following Current 15 Minutes Displays the reported performance parameters for the current 15 minute interval Last 24 Hours Displays the reported performance parameters for the last 24 hour period including the current 15 minute interval Selected 15 Min Intervals Displays the reported performance parameters for up to 96 15 minute intervals WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Performance Monitoring 5 If you select Selected 15 Minute Intervals select the time interval by selecting start and finish times from the dropdown lists in the From Time and To Time fields Notes f The From Time and To Time fields are only displayed when Selected 15 Min Intervals option is selected The following traffic types are monitored High Priority IP traffic compliant with CIR forwarded to the highest priority guaranteed queue mapped according to ToS bits of packets in platinum SLAs only Medium Priority IP traffic compliant with the CIR is forwarded to the medium priority guaranteed queue mapped according to ToS bits of packets in platinum or gold SLAs Low Priority IP traffic compliant with the CIR is forwarded to the low priority guaranteed queue in platinum gold or silver SLAs Best Effort IP traffic is mapped to the non compliant queue This traffic is forwarded only if bandwidth is available This traffic results from the bronze SLA regardless
46. List of IP SLA SLA ID SLA Name The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the Carrier Index of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS The number of the SLA for the IP Data service The number of the SLA for the IP Data service Up to 16 SLA for IP Data services can be defined on a particular TS The SLA ID is unique for this TS The SLA description set by an Operator WALKnet User s Manual 7 57 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration CIR The summarized SLA Committed Information Rate This rate is calculated as the sum of all CIR s assigned for all clients that share this SLA for IP services The value of this parameter is N when the actual CIR equals to N 256 Kbps This defines the committed information rate for all the IP traffic The system guarantees this rate to be transferred in the air MIR This parameter defines the maximum rate for this pipe provided that free BW is available for allocation to it The pipe rate cannot exceed this number The value of this parameter is N when the actual MIR equals to N 256 Kbps 7 58 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management CoS This parameter defines the Class of Service of this SLA Four classes of service are defined for an IP SLA Each class of service is mapped to the number of an IP traffic priority supported by this SLA
47. M anual K RFU A H W Rev a Active RFU RFUA RFU B H W Rev J Oper Status Down gt RFU A IF Caj REL B IF Cabla Type Oner Type a FJ Length booo Length E Measurement Units Moo o w Measurement Units M Gain Valid vaa w Ganvaid M y Tx Gain dB 20000 Tk Gain BJ Rix Gain dB 1 00000 5 Rz Gain dB H ox Cancel Ect Appl Rettesh Show Status Heb Response OK 2 Click Edit to modify the parameters as required Location area read only Cell Name The name of the cell for which the selected BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which the selected BS BU has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The name or IP address of the master WSK shelf that served this sector IF MUX number Shelf only The number of the W3K 6 ports Mux defined in this sector Antenna area Type The only antenna type is vertical Altitude m The elevation above sea level in meters Sector Type area Redundancy Shelf only Whether redundancy is enabled or not Disabled Enabled Stand Alone BS BU Disable only RFU area Type The RFU head type 4 88 WALKnet User s Manual Configuring the RFU and Antenna RFU A H W Rev RFU B H W Rev Selection Mode Active RFU Oper Status The RFU A head type hardware revision Stand Alone BS BU Set to A The RFU B head type hardware revision This field is only enabled when redundancy is enabled The selection mode
48. Management dialog box click Switchover WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically resets the TS BU Notes A You can reset the TS BU at any time by clicking Reset However do NOT click the Reset button until you are certain that a software switchover has been completed MPU Software Versions Shelf only WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located in the MPUs You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time gt To view software versions on an MPU Access the Versions and Reset and Management dialog box in one of the following ways E In MPU View select Versions from the MPU menu Or WALKnet User s Manual 10 37 Chapter 10 Utilities a In the WALKnet Main Window select Versions from the Utility menu Then select W3000 Components MPU The MPU Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 22 MPU Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box Shelf Versions and Reset Management Iof x Location Cell Name NewCell Shelf ID Shelf MPU ID Mpu i Current Software Version 3 62 Description Version 3 62 Standby Software A i i i i Version 3 0 Description Version 3 0 Card Info Hardware Rerevision Rev 01 Vendor ID 1 cese Refresh Reset Switchover Help Q Response OK 10 38 WALKnet User s Manual Versions
49. National Protocol File was downloaded to a BS BU that communicates with one or more POTS interfaces on its connected TS BUs you can verify that the protocol is active by accessing the V5 Global Parameters Dialog Box for the BS BU gt To access the V5 Global Parameters for a BS BU The V5 Globals dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways In Base Station BU View BS BU menu select Services then V5 Configuration and then V5 Globals In the Main window from the Configuration menu select Services then V5 Configuration BS BU and then V5 Globals Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The V5 Globals dialog box for a BS BU is displayed as shown below Figure 7 16 V5 Globals Dialog Box 5E Sil v5 Globals E o Cancel Help Response OK Cell Name Newel s S S Sector Name NewSectol BS BU ID w National Protocol 22507 Delay Reset TC 9 Disable The National Protocol for the BS BU is displayed in the National Protocol field WALKnet User s Manual 7 25 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration This section describes Frame Relay and Ethernet configuration Frame Relay Overview The WALKair system provides a full Frame Relay access network where the BS BU implements a Network to Network Interface NNI and a User to Network Interface UNI to the Frame Relay network and the TS BU
50. NetVBR VPIAYCI es Class of Service Platinum UBR VPIAVCI E o Cancel Appl Refresh Help Response OK 3 Select the Class of Service from the dropdown list in the Class of Service field 4 Select the Maximum Information Rate for the existing SLA using the arrows in the MIR field if required 5 If the system is functioning in Layer 2 bridging mode the BS BU VLAN ID and TS BU VLAN fields are active in the Add IP SLA Dialog Box If necessary edit the BS BU VLAN ID and TS VLAN ID Or 6 If the system is functioning in Layer 3 basic mode skip this step 7 Modify the IP SLA Name field in the IP SLA area if required 8 Shelf only Modify the VPI s VCI s fields in the ATM area if required in case the ATM NIU for TDM field indicates ATM NIU connection WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 9 Click OK or Apply Notes are all read only If the selected Class of Service is Platinum all the VPI s VCI s fields are enabled for editing If the selected Class of Service is Gold the only read only and blank field is the CBR VPI VCI field If the selected Class of Service is Silver the CBR VPI VCI field and rtVBR VPI VCI fields are read only and blank If the selected Class of Service is Bronze the CBR VPI VCI field rtVBR VPI VCI and nrtVBR VPI VCI fields are read only and blank x If the ATM NIU for IP field indicates an Ethernet connection
51. Number HW Revision Hardware version of a card Default Bus number for the MPU Bridge slots PCI to PCI Gateway ID bridge device Status area Oper Status Current card status Up Down Test Fault status The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Admin Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Status Disable Detected Card Type area Detected The auto detected card type It also indicates Card Type whether the slot has a card inserted in it or not WALKnet User s Manual 5 9 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Redundancy area Redundancy Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this Status card Enabled Disabled Read write Stand By Indicates whether the board is a standby device Status Read only Redundant Indicates the slot number of the standby card MPU Slot None indicates that a redundant card is not Number defined Read write if Redundancy is enabled From MPU View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another MPU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 E Edit MPU properties see Modifying HSC Properties on page 5 5 a Manage software versions resets see Shelf Management on page 4 19 Deleting MPUs Deleting MPU from a shelf permanently removes the MPU from the shelf gt To delete an MPU For
52. Number 9 Settings _ __ __ ___ _ _ System Name HSC card Redundancy _ ________________ Redundancy Status Disabled xj Stand By Status In Service Redundant HSC Slot Number None x Status ADA Oper Status up Admin Status Enable xj Fault Status No Faults OK Apply Cancel Refresh Help Response OK 7 The following parameters are displayed in HSC Properties Edit dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this HSC has been defined Read only Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this HSC has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only Slot Number Number of the slot in the shelf where this HSC is installed Read only Settings area System System name of the HSC Read write Name Redundancy area Redundancy Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this Status card Read write Stand By Indicates whether the board is a standby device Status Read only Redundant Indicates the slot number of the standby card HSC Slot None indicates that a redundant card is not Number defined Read write if Redundancy is enabled 5 6 WALKnet User s Manual Hot Swap Controller Management Status area Oper Status Fault status Admin Status Note Current card status Up Down Test Read only The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the
53. Priority r 1921 Kbs S 1920 Kbs S Medium Priority 1921 Kbs 5 1920 Kbs S Lo y 1921 Kbs 5 1920 Kbs S OKbs S OKbs S 5763 Kbs S 5760 Kbs S 4 pila gt Value 240 Kbs S 816 Kbs S 8 54 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 9 Security Management In This Chapter E Modifying the System Password on page 9 2 E Specifying User Types on page 9 3 Chapter 9 Security Management Modifying the System Password To gain access to the WALKnet system a user must enter a user name and a password for security and authentication purposes The default user name is admin and the default password is ad An administrator user can modify a user s password and define new users gt To change the system password 1 In the Main window select Change Password from the Security menu The Edit User dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 9 1 Edit User Dialog Box Edit User User Name admin CurPassword NewPassword Confirm Password ox Cancel Help The current user s name is displayed in the User Name field 2 Enter the current password for the user in the CurrPassword field 3 Enter the new password for the user in the NewPassword field 4 Re enter the new password in the Confirm Password field 5 Click OK Note f All users can change their own password Only Administrator users can change all users passwords 9 2 WALKnet User s Manual Specifying
54. RF Unit in dBm Downlink Minimal Automatic Frequency Control The minimum carrier frequency offsets The sum of the synthesizer s frequency offsets Transmit Path Base Station Receive Path Terminal Station Units Hz Downlink Maximal Automatic Frequency Control The maximum carrier frequency offsets The sum of the synthesizer s frequency offsets Transmit Path Base Station Receive Path Terminal Station Units Hz Downlink Uplink Frame Errors Rate The FER at the TS BU or BS BU This is measured by the number of received errored air frames divided by the total number of received air frames during a given time period WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Set Parameter Range gt 8 10 WALKnet enables the display of several graphs simultaneously in the Detailed Air Performance dialog box The counters have different ranges and you can specify the minimum and maximum values for each counter in the Set Parameter Range dialog box WALKnet then uses the minimum and maximum values to scale the graphical display for the counter To set parameter range 1 Double click the value column the column to the right of the Graph column of a selected parameter The Set Parameter Range dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 3 Set Parameter Range Dialog Box t Parameter Range Parameter DL SNR MIN Current Yalue Minimum Maximum ok Cancel Help 2 Specify a minim
55. ReadOnly Br Pes 13 2001 09 54 07 Parent Base Unit ReadOnly gt TERM1 med ru Messages Values for these attributes are not verified If you want to save a modified value press OK otherwise press Cancel Changes take effect when you OK the Object Properties Cancel Help The following is a list of attributes displayed in the dialog box Attribute Name Trap Specific Trap Name Alarm Type Alarm Severity Alarm State Alarm Source The trap specific number that came within the trap data The alarm s name according to the MIB definition Each alarm trap has a specific name that corre sponds to the trap specific number that came within the trap data The value of the varbind 1 buAlarmType that came within the trap data The value of the varbind 2 buAlarmSeverity that came within the trap data The value of the varbind 3 buAlarmState that came within the trap data This value determines whether the alarm is ON or OFF type The value of the varbind 4 buAlarmSource that came within the trap data According to the MIB description this value currently has no special meaning and is reserved for the future use WALKnet User s Manual 11 7 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization Alarm Data The value of the varbind 5 buAlarmData that came within the trap data According to the WAL Kair MIB definition it is a string containing the number of the port that is the source of th
56. Sector Name NewSector1 ss sts S S BS BU ID fiy St i 73O TS BU ID fso Port Pot sts S A Line Interface Settings mai iii mam Select A Line Interface Poo yi Loopback Mode Payload SS x Payload Loopback Pair Boo Line Start Type JlopStat m Line AC Impedance feooohm O Operational Status Dom gt Port Settings Ring Voltage Vrms js Admin Status JDisble i itti s yi Operational Status Dom Refresh Heb ok Cancel Apel Response OK The following configuration parameters are for a QPOTS configured port type Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Sector Name BS BU ID TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box Port The number of the port in the BS BU TS BU A Line Interface Settings area parameters set per line inter face WALKnet User s Manual 6 15 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Select A Line interface Loopback Mode XPayload Loopback Pair Line Start Type Line AC Impedance Operat
57. Slot 2 02703 2004 10 29 50 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 T 02 03 2004 10 29 50 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 ON Software Download failed BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 T Warning 02703 2004 10 30 01 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Software Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS Cl T Waning 02703 2004 10 30 17 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON LCI Access is Detected LCI Access MPU T Waning 02703 2004 10 30 21 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS Cl IT 02 03 2004 10 30 21 10 0 15 241 w3000 ON Software Download failed TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID T Warming 02703 2004 10 32 32 10 0 15 241 w3000 ON Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 T Warming 0270372004 10 33 29 10 0 15 241 w3000 OFF Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 T Warming 0270372004 10 34 41 10 0 15 241 3000 ON Software Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS Cl 4 Chose Refresh Trap File Save Fie Heb The WALKair Alarms Monitor Window displays in real time the most recent twenty SNMP traps alarms sent by WALKair 1000 WALKair 3000 devices and received by the WALKnet application The WALKair Alarms History window can display all the alarms from the devices Its display is refreshed manually by the operator Opening the WALKair Alarms Monitor and Alarms History Windows gt To open the
58. The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Authorized Managers List IP Address The IP address of the authorized management station Trap Transmis Whether or not the BS BU transmits Traps to the sion management station Enable or Disable Set Operation Whether the management station is permitted to perform Set operations on the BS BU meaning change the parameters stored in the BS BU Enable or Disable Community The community string up to 16 letters included in Traps sent by the BS BU From the Authorized Managers dialog box you can add edit and delete authorized management stations Notes Each BS BU can support up to ten IP addresses each Address is a Man ager Each BS BU can support up to ten Authorized Managers Only Authorized Managers are permitted to add edit or delete other Autho rized Managers The first Authorized Manager must therefore be speci fied using the LCI Refer to the Base Station Management Guide for details WALKnet User s Manual 10 3 Chapter 10 Utilities Adding Authorized Managers gt 10 4 Only Authorized Managers are permitted to add edit or delete other Authorized Managers The first Authorized Manager must therefore be specified using the LCI Refer to the Base Station Management Guide for details To add Authorized Managers
59. This Trap is sent when the IF synthesizer fails to lock on the frequency set on the synthesizer the IFU Lock condition terminated This Trap is sent when an RFU power loss is detected terminated This Trap is sent when the acknowledgment for ser vice configuration was not received from the TS BU was received from the TS BU This Trap is sent when the software download process is started completed WALKnet User s Manual A 3 Appendix A Trap Type Software Down load Abort Switch Version Failed ON OFF Isdi Loss of ClockON OFF Telecom If Board Loop backON OFF Telecom If Matrix Remote Loop back ON OFF Telecom If Type Does Not Match ON OFF Telecom IfDown UP Cpe Event V52 Link Id Fail ure V5 Restart Inter face Fail IF Mux Con nected Discon nected RFU Redun dancy Cable Con nected Disconne cted RFU A Failed RFU B Failed ODU Switching Failed Description This Trap is sent when the software download process is aborted This Trap is sent when the switch between the current and standby software versions fails succeeds This Trap is sent when a V 35 X 21 interface clock loss is detected interface recovered from loss This Trap is sent when the telecom interface Board loopback is activated removed This Trap is sent when the telecom interface Matrix loopback is activated removed This Trap is sent when the actual telecom interface type does not match the con
60. User Types Specifying User Types The following four types of users can be defined in the WALKnet system a Administrator An Administrator has access to all parameters and functions in WALKnet a Operator An operator can monitor the WALKair system and modify parameters but cannot specify WALKnet user types or change system passwords a Tester A tester has similar rights to the operator and can access testing functionality E Monitor A monitor can monitor the WALKair system but cannot modify parameters An Administrator user allocates user types from the Authorization dialog box gt To access the Authorization dialog box In the Main window select Authorization from the Security menu The Authorization dialog box is displayed Figure 9 2 Authorization Dialog Box Authorization iof x Authorization B List of users Name Type admin e operator D Operator test Test monitor Monitor WALKnet User s Manual 9 3 Chapter 9 Security Management The Authorization dialog box displays a list of users defined in the WALKnet system and indicates their user type From the Authorization dialog box an Administrator user can add new users to the system and edit and delete existing users Adding New Users An Administrator user can add new users to the WALKnet system specifying a name password and user type for each user gt To add a new user 1 In the Authorization dia
61. V5 interface specified during the add procedure To modify the properties see Editing V5 Interfaces on page 7 17 Editing V5 Interfaces The properties of an existing V5 interface can be modified when the administrative status is Disable gt To edit V5 interfaces 1 In the V5 Interfaces dialog box select an existing interface with a Dis able administrative status from the list of V5 interfaces 2 From the V5 Interface menu select Edit Interface The Edit V5 Interface dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 17 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 10 Edit V5 Interface Dialog Box 10 0 1 84 Edit V5 Interface Location Cell Name wi K_Cell BS BU ID 10 0 1 84 Sector Name News ector Device fis Modified V5 Interface V5 Interface Idx f2 Protocol V5 1 V5 Interface Id Jcv_o3 Admin Status Disable Variant ID J 121 Max Num of Calls 20 Available Links E1 E1 Ch 16 Ch16 Ch15 Ch15 Ch 31 Ch31 Port Port Type Select Link Id Link Type Log C Path Log C Path Log C Path PSTN nel Sel 22 Por2 B 75720 M Primary Pona E 7520 F ox Refresh Cancel Help AT le le ul N E W OOC Jl Response OK 3 Modify the V5 Interface Id Variant ID and the fields in the Available Links area as required Notes status in the Change V5 Interface Admin Status dialog box Refer to page 7 18 for details x By default the administrative s
62. alarms from a selected WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 device and displays the alarms in the WALKair Alarms Monitor window You can initiate Get Active Alarms from either the WALKair Alarms History window or from Sector View for any device 12 8 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Manipulating Alarms Sorting Alarms You can sort alarms in both the WALKair Alarms Monitor and Alarms History windows In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window you can sort the Severity Date Time Source IP Address Device W3000 or W1000 or Status by clicking the column header for the item to sort Note When you sort according to Date Time in the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the most 4 recent alarm is displayed at the bottom of the list For example to display the alarms in groups according to their severity levels click on the Severity column header shown below Figure 12 3 Alarms sorted according to Severity in the Alarms List WaALKair Alarms Monitor WALKair Alarms Monitor List Severity Date Time Source Device Message 01 26 2004 15 31 35 10 0 15 90 w3000 All TSs Radio Link LOSS ON BS on slot 5 BS name BU B 01 26 2004 15 32 01 10 0 15 90 w3000 All TSs Radio Link LOSS ON BS on slot 15 BS name BU A 01 26 2004 15 32 15 10 0 15 90 w3000 All TSs Radio Link LOSS OFF BS on slot 15 BS name BU A 01 26 2004 15 37 27 10 0 15 90 w3000 Most TSs Radio Link LOSS ON BS on slot 15 BS name BU A 01 26 2004 15 31 35 10
63. all SNMP queries to the WALKair 1000 BS BU The BS BU encodes the requests and collects the information from the appropriate TS BU WALKnet User s Manual Overview WALKair 3000 Shelf Based System Management of the WALKair 3000 system s Network Elements Shelf BS BUs and TS BUs is as follows WALKnet is connected to the Ethernet port of a Shelfs Main Processing Unit MPU and communicates with it via the SNMP protocol over UDP IP The SNMP agent resides in the MPU and provides management capabilities for the Shelf other cards in the shelf and all connected TS BUs The MPU is the proxy for the entire WALKair 3000 system The WALKnet management station can optionally be connected to the shelf MPU via an ATM card The BS BU does not have an SNMP agent Instead it has a small management kernel that interfaces the MPU SNMP agent via the internal Shelf bus A BS BU communicates with the TS Bus via an Alvarion proprietary protocol over an air link The TS BU also does not have an SNMP agent Instead it has a small management kernel that interfaces the BS BU management kernel using the air link Embedded Operation Channel EOC WALKair 3000 supports In Band Management WALKnet sends all SNMP queries to the WALKair 3000 MPU The MPU encodes the requests and collects the information from the appropriate card in the shelf or TS BU In this way viewing or defining system resources and or providing fault identification are achieve
64. aoia 5 5 Modifying HSC Properties sicccsisicascvcradeneasviceestectadeeuaiencentnrapnccaaasentoree 5 5 Moving HSC Slot Positions icercsscpotsccestdaadvens ccactieiclacatieaneaitanelanndiets 5 7 Main Processing Unit MPU Management eceeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeees 5 8 Displaying MPU VIEW srecccctcscacsrvsticbeticinedincneonatatindussubedutlnedineareiancnened 5 8 WALKnet User s Manual 3 Contents Deleting MPUS sesesstactance tor nteactie tan Bactl cadens enccatetsatecsssiadeencbacaceageeagst 5 10 Modifying MPU Properties sc creices2sciaectestiiecideeraconitiatieae 5 10 Saving an MPU Configuration 2 0 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 13 Uploading and Downloading an MPU Configuration 000 5 14 Accessing Software Reset Management cceeeeeeeeeeertteees 5 16 Moving MPU Slot Positions siscssscncccsecccaninsesttecoteeiantenusnceeteceatananass 5 16 Network Interface Unit Management cccccessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 5 17 Creating Network Interface Units o ae 5 17 Displaying ATM NIU VIEW sscccccscccccccccisereiieccochenietsmteadanecssenecaumiayyeeey 5 17 Displaying 12xE1 NIU View 0 0 0 2 cece ceeeeeeeencee ee eeeneeseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 5 21 Displaying E3 NIU VIEW sccresacsvaccorreitanierssnucksckensareberantierstaaaeasanecen 5 25 Deleting NIUS scissicaidsecasexcoercvcnsasicabncceadekeas wushontacedducendetuantneetextaniamace 5 28 Modifying NIU Properties cnticuschectrstadasa
65. arrive from the WALKair 1000 and WALKair 3000 configured devices to WALKnet without having to install any additional software Note We recommend to use HP OpenView for large installations For more information about HP OpenView integration with WALKnet see HPOV Customization on page 11 1 of this user s manual Note The WALKnet Alarms Browser is only available if a HP OpenView is installed on the terminal but is not currently open Or E HP OpenView is not installed on the terminal WALKnet s Alarm Browser provides a convenient central location for monitoring critical events on your network The WALKnet Alarm Browser enables you to perform the following operations a Displaying useful information about why an alarm was initiated a Sorting alarms in an alarms list according to various parameters for example according to the date and time when the alarms were sent or according to the alarm severity M Acknowledging that the problem causing an alarm is being addressed by marking the alarm in an alarms list a Deleting alarms from an alarms list after the issues are resolved a Opening and displaying previously archived alarms lists WALKnet User s Manual Overview The WALKnet Alarm Browser saves a text file that includes all the alarms traps that were sent during the current day This occurs automatically at 12 00 AM The file with extension trap has the for mat mm dd yyyy trap The file can be
66. cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 a Edit BS BU properties see Modifying BS BU Properties on page 4 35 a Display the Terminal Stations registered to this BS BU see Displaying Terminal Station BU View on page 4 61 a Define leased line services between telecom ports see Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKnet User s Manual 4 33 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration a Configure RFU and antenna parameters see WALKair 1000 RFU and Antenna Configuration from Sector View on page 4 82 a Define Trap destinations and authorized managers see Chapter 10 Utilities E Perform software downloads to the BS BU see Chapter 10 Utilities a Download and upload the configuration parameters of the BS BU see Chapter 10 Utilities a View resident software versions on the BS BU see Chapter 10 Utilities a Configure and manage V5 interfaces subscribers and quality of service see Chapter 7 System Services Configuration E Configure Frame Relay services see Chapter 7 System Services Configuration E Edit the configuration of a port and change the configured type of port see Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration The next step in configuring a cell is to define the Terminal Stations registered to the BS BUs See Modifying TS BU Properties on page 4 65 for details Deleting and Editing BS BUs BS BUs can be dele
67. fig ure OR If this dialog box is accessed from selecting Edit IF MUX Properties the OK button applies the IF MUX properties left window in figure Note IP address The Cell Name Sector Name W3K Shelf Name and Shelf IP Address fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell the defined Shelf sector and the Shelf 2 In the Setting Area Select an IF MUX number from the IF MUX UD Number list 4 18 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management 3 In the Tx M amp C Attenuator Default Gain dB field modify the IF MUX TX VVA default value Default for 26 GHz system 6 00000 Default for 28 GHz system 1 00000 4 In the Tx Power field modify the target Tx power 5 In the Rx Operating Point field modify the target default Rx power per carrier in dBm at the antenna 6 In the Reference Oscillator field define active TCXO A or B in the IF MUX 7 Click OK to save any modifications Cancel to exit without changes or Help to open the Help window Shelf Management Displaying Shelf View Shelf View displays IF MUXs chassis slot cards IFUs Power Supply Units and so on and enables you to configure a shelf by defining and configuring BS BU MPU NIU HSC cards and IF MUXs within it gt To access Shelf View Shelf View is accessed in one of the following ways a In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a shelf node a In Sector View by selecting View
68. files if this option is used See Saving an Alarms File on page 12 14 gt To define an environmental variable for the WALKnet Log Files 1 On your PC Select Settings then Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click on the System icon 3 In the System Properties Window select the Advanced tab Click the Environmental Variables button Note Alternately right click on the My Computer icon select Properties Advanced Tab and then click on Environmental Variables The Environmental Variables Dialog Box is displayed 1 16 WALKnet User s Manual Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files Figure 1 6 Environmental Variables Dialog Box Environment ariables E 2 x rUser variables for ricks Variable Value NMS_NATIONAL nptest temp temp TMP C Documents and Settings ricks Local 5 New Edit Delete System variables Variable Value ComSpec C WINNT system32 cmd exe NUMBER_OF_PR 1 os Windows_NT Os2LibPath C WINNTisystem32 os2 dll Path C Program Files eDrawings2003 C W New Edit Delete cme In the User variables area top area of dialog box click New In the New User Variable dialog box displayed as below type the following variable name in the Variable Name area NMS_LOG Figure 1 7 New User Variable Dialog Box Edit User Yariable 4 2 x Variable Name NMS_LOG Variable Value chiW
69. full description of the interface Speed The data transfer rate in Kbps Oper Status The operational status of the telecom interfaces up or down Admin Status The administrative status of the telecom interfaces up or down Name The name of the TS BU Location The location of the TS BU From Terminal Station BU View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another TS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 a Edit TS BU properties see Modifying TS BU Properties on page 4 65 WALKnet User s Manual 4 63 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Configure RFU and antenna parameters see Configuring the RFU and Antenna on page 4 82 View resident software versions on the TS BU see See Chapter 10 Utilities Configure and manage V5 interfaces subscribers and quality of service see Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Display air performance statistics see Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Edit the configuration of a port and change the configured type of port see Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Editing and Deleting TS BUs TS BUs can be deleted from the Registered Terminals dialog box so that they are no longer registered to a BS BU Deleting TS BUs Deleting a Terminal Station permanently removes the TS BU and all its components from the BS BU gt To delete a TS BU 2 4 64 In
70. functioning in Layer 2 bridging mode the BS BU VLAN ID and TS BU VLAN fields are active in the Add IP Service Dialog Box If so enter the BS BU VLAN ID and TS VLAN ID Or If the system is functioning in Layer 3 basic mode skip this step 4 In the Status area Select the administrative status for the new service from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field Location area read only Cell Name Shelf ID Sector The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf Stand Alone BS BU only The system name if defined of the unit or when no system name is defined the IP address of the unit Client area read only Client Name Location BS BU ID TS ID The administratively assigned name for this Client The physical location of this Client e g Client s address The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS WALKnet User s Manual 7 83 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration IP Service area IP SLA ID SLA Name CIR MIR Class of Service Status area Admin Status Oper status Ethernet area Eth port VLAN tagging mode Local Router IP Addr
71. in the same map WALKnet User s Manual 8 13 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Downlink Uplink areas UAT AT ES SES DM NDM Unavailable Time The percentage of time that the air link path was unavailable The air link path is considered unavailable from the onset of 10 contiguous SESs or from the onset of the condition leading to a link failure Available Time The percentage of time that the air link path was available Errored Seconds The percentage of ESs that were counted during AT ES is a one second time interval with one or more CRC errors over the air link path Severely Errored Seconds The percentage of SESs that occurred during AT SES is a one second time interval containing over 30 errored air frames or at least one defect a second with 60 or more errored air frames SES is a subset of ES Degraded Minutes The percentage of degraded minutes that were counted in the specified time interval 15 min or 24 hrs DM is a one minute time interval in which the estimated frame error rate exceeds 1E 6 but does not exceed 1E 3 see G 821 1 DMs are determined by the following Collecting all available seconds Removing any SESs Grouping the results in 60 sec long groups Counting a 60 sec long group minute as degraded if the cumulative errors during the seconds present in the group exceed 1E 6 Non Degraded Minutes The percentage of NDMs that were counted in the spec
72. includes all the alarms currently displayed in the WALKair Alarms History window Note f To save an alarms file you must log in to WALKnet as either an Administrator or an Operator Tester and Monitor users are not authorized to delete alarms WALKnet tracks your WALKnet Alarm Browser file saves and keeps the results in log files Log files are named date trap and placed in the directory defined by the NMS_LOG environment variable sub directory Trap Notes For information about how to define the NMS_LOG Environment Variable see Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files on page 1 16 gt To save an alarms file 1 In the WALKair Alarms History window click on the S efie button to display the Save File for Alarms Data window 12 14 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Figure 12 4 Saving an Alarms File Save in E Tap c 3 01_24_2004 trap E 01_25_2004 trap File name fest Save as type Trap Fiesta Cancel 2 Type a name for the file and click on the Save button WALKnet User s Manual 12 15 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Opening an Alarms File You can open any previously saved trap file according to date and load it into the WALKair Alarms History window gt To open an alarms file 1 In the WALKair Alarms History window click on the Trpfile button to open the Select File for Alarms Data window Figure 12 5 Opening an
73. interval other than 10 minutes is defined counter values are adjusted correspondingly gt To set thresholds for a signaling counter 1 In the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box right click anywhere in the column of a counter and select Set Thresholds The Set Threshold dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 20 Set Threshold Dialog Box WALKNet Set Threshold Out ass Minor 0 Major 0 o Cancel 2 In the Minor field set a minor value for the counter 3 In the Major field set a major value for the counter WALKnet User s Manual 8 43 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring 7 4 Click OK When the counter value exceeds the minor threshold it is highlighted in yellow and when it exceeds the major threshold it is highlighted in red The threshold functionality is not applied to the first interval Notes When the Minor and Major fields are 0 no thresholds are applied to the counter Displaying Signaling Graphs gt 8 44 You can display a signaling graph for a selected counter that shows the statistics for a selected port or ports WALKnet polls the device every 10 seconds and displays the statistics relating to a selected counter in the signaling graph To display a signaling graph 1 In the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box select one or more ports as required 2 Right click anywhere in the column of a counter and select Graph A signaling graph f
74. is displayed in the Selected devices field Notes The List Of Terminals displays the TS BUs registered to the current x BS BU A National Protocol File can only be downloaded to a BS BU When an air link is established between a BS BU after download and its associated TS BUs the National Protocol is copied to the TS BUs 6 Click Apply The selected file is downloaded to the selected BS BU or TS BU The status of the download process is displayed in the Download Status field 10 18 WALKnet User s Manual Configuration Upload and Download Configuration Upload and Download WALKair 1000 Configuration Upload and Download A WALKair 1000 BS BU stores the configuration for itself and all its registered TS BUs in non volatile memory The configuration can be uploaded from the BS BU and saved in the WALKnet database and downloaded from the WALKnet database to any BS BU This enables backup of your WALKair 1000 system configuration and can also speed up the configuration process or be used for BS BU replacement Uploading and downloading BS BU configurations are performed from the Configuration Load dialog box gt To access the Configuration Load dialog box Access the Configuration Load dialog box in one of the following ways E In Base Station BU View select Configuration Load from the BS BU menu a In the Main window select Configuration Load from the Utilities menu Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS B
75. line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen a Select a line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen and then select Edit Port from the Port menu Note f If you select Edit Port without selecting a line in the port configuration table the following warning is displayed Figure 6 17 No Port Selected Warning Zi x x No port has been selected Note The line you select must correspond to an Ethernet port The Port Configuration dialog box varies according to port type The TS E1 Port Configuration dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 6 41 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Figure 6 18 TS E1 Port Configuration Dialog Box 10 0 35 126 TS1 E1 Port Configuration loj x Location a a a i aaa zs Cell Name Newt ss Sector Name fw3000StandAloneBS BU Shelf ID Stand lones BS BU ID fio a35126 o TS ID Port Number gt Settings _ A i i Line Type JFramed NoCRC yi Loss Alarm Mode hmr t i S yi Signaling Mode Transparent x Loopback Mode Nons x Status a AA A a Oper Status Down Admin Status Enae xj emeena om oo fo O a a a a a a a elp Response OK The following parameters are displayed in the TS E1 Port Configuration dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this TS has been defined Sector Name The nam
76. line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen and then select Edit Port from the Port menu The W3000 BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box is displayed as shown below for a Shelf BS BU Ethernet Port and for a Stand Alone BS BU Ethernet Port Figure 6 9 W3000 Shelf BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration xTarget BU Slot 5 Ethernet Port Config Location a _____ 225 Cell Name cat CSt W Sector Name NewSecto2 Shelf ID vstat BS BU ID JeUSit 5 t Settings 2 ___ _ _ _____ MAC Address 0385C 468023 Auto Negotiation Enade tts y Handshake Fui Dupes Ethernet Speed fethemet 100 QutputVLAN Data Magea SCS Status Admin Status Disable x Oper Status Down elp Response OK 6 18 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Figure 6 10 W3000 Stand Alone BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration 10 0 6 126 Ethernet Port Configuration OF Xx Location nn B Cell Name NewCell Sector Name News ectorl Shelf ID Stand Alone Bs Buip Down 10 0 6 126 Port Number fi Settings _ ______________ MAC Address foo 00 00 00 00 00 Auto Negotiation Enable vj Handshake F ull Duplex Ethernet Speed JEthemet 100 Output WYLAN Data Tagged Status Oper Status Down Admin Status Enable xvj OK Apply Cancel Refresh Help
77. name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box 6 10 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box Port The number of the port in the BS BU TS BU Settings area MAC The MAC address of the Ethernet Card This field is Address read only and is valid only if an Ethernet card is installed i e the detected port type is Ethernet Working The handshake value and speed Mode The four options are Half Duplex 10 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex 10 and Full Duplex 100 The working Mode is valid only if an Ethernet card is installed Handshake The handshake value Half Duplex or Full Duplex This field is read only and is valid only if an Ether net card is actually installed meaning the detected port type is Ethernet If an Ethernet card is not installed the value is None Speed The speed of the interface 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps This field is read only and is valid only if an Ether net card is actually installed meaning the detected port type is Ethernet If an Ethernet card is not installed the value is None Max The maximum amount of bandwidth for this port Bandwidth 4 Mbps or 2 Mbps This parameter is only present when configuring an
78. not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only Fan Number Power Input Board s number Read only Settings area HW Revision Fan hardware revision Read write Oper Status Indicates the operational state Up Down Read only From Fan Edit Properties you can do the following a Examine the fan s configuration parameters a Edit the fan s configuration parameters 5 40 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration In This Chapter WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters on page 6 2 E WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters on page 6 17 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Each BS BU and TS BU in the WALKair system can have up to three telecom ports WALKnet enables you to define the telecom port type and to configure its parameters for BS BUs and registered TS BUs You can configure the telecom ports for a TS BU before it is physically located in the WALKair system Then when the air link is established the TS BU receives all its configuration parameters from the BS BU In the case of a mismatch between the configured and detected port types WALKair transmits a Trap Below the list of ports in Base Station BU View and Terminal Station BU View is a graphical representation of the front panel of the BS BU TS BU according to the configured port type When there is a mismatch between th
79. of rate and ToS and from non compliant gt CIR traffic of platinum gold or silver SLAs Total Total summed traffic for the above 4 types CIR The summarized IP SLA Committed Information Rate The rate displayed is the sum of all CIRs assigned for all clients that share this SLA for IP services MIR The Maximum Information Rate for the pipe provided that free bandwidth is available for allocation to it The pipe rate cannot exceed this value Select the required traffic types to display in the uplink and downlink graphs by clicking the relevant check box WALKnet User s Manual 8 53 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8 26 Selecting Traffic Types to display Traffic priority Select UL Rate 13 34 High Priority 1921 Kbs S Medium Priority 1921 Kbs S Low Priority 1921 Kbs S Best E ffort OKbs S Total 5763 Kbs S When a check box is checked the display color for the traffic type appears 6 Click the Get Data button to display the required data An example is shown below Figure 8 27 IP SLA Performance Monitoring Data GUY IP SLA Performance BEES File Location Uplink Traffic j Cell Israel Shelf IP Address 10 0 15 73 Shelf Name GUY roe SLA ID Selection Time Period BS BUID BU Slot 4 cy C Last 24 Hours J TS ID T51 CID3 153300 xl Selected 15 Min Intervals M d Fem Tine 012803 131625 el Geer Select UL Rate 13 34 DL Rate 13 34 High
80. of an onboard E3 port a Set the E3 port administrative status 6 36 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters W3000 TS BU Interfaces Configuration There are two available interfaces on a WALKair 3000 Terminal Station Ethernet and E1 They are configured separately TS Ethernet Port Configuration gt To configure a TS Ethernet port In TS View open the TS Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box in one of the following ways a Double click a line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen a Select a line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen and then select Edit Port from the Port menu WALKnet User s Manual 6 37 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Note af following warning is displayed If you select Edit Port without selecting a line in the port configuration table the Figure 6 15 No Port Selected Warning Zi xi Q No port has been selected Note z box varies according to port type The line you select must correspond to an Ethernet port The Port Configuration dialog The TS Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box is displayed Figure 6 16 TS Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog Box 10 0 35 126 TS1 Ethernet Port Configuration je Ed Location B Cell Name Nesce Sector Name fw3000Stand AloneBS BU Shelf ID JStandAlone CS BS BU ID fioossi260 C C TS ID
81. opened in text editors and you can change the filename if necessary a Saving an edited alarms list in a text file in the format trap Later on the archived alarms list can be opened for reference or analysis E Requesting to send traps alarms from a WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 device and displaying the device s alarms in an alarms list WALKnet User s Manual 12 3 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Alarm Browser Windows WALKnet s Alarm Browser includes two alarm display windows as follows a WALKair Alarms Monitor window a WALKair Alarms History window The WALKair Alarms Monitor and WALKair Alarms History windows are shown below Figure 12 1 WALKair Alarms Monitor Window WALKair Alarms Monitor WALKair Alarms Monitor List Severity Date Time Source Device Status Message 02 03 2004 10 26 52 10 0 15 241 w3000 OFF All TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 26 52 10 0 15 241 w3000 ON Most TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 26 55 10 0 15 241 W3000 Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 BS na 02 03 2004 10 26 56 10 0 15 241 W3000 E1 Interface is Changed E1 LOSS SIG Port no 5 TS BS slot 2 BS name BL 02 03 2004 10 27 12 10 0 15 241 w3000 OFF TS Radio Link LOSS TS CID 1003 BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 27 12 10 0 15 241 w3000 OFF Most TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02
82. operating mode of the telecom card DTE or DCE The timing mode for the V 35 X 21 or FR port Internal or External The Timing Mode is forced to Internal when the Operating Mode is DCE and External when the Operating Mode is DTE The polarity of the clock Standard or Inverse The polarity of the receive clock Standard or Inverse Enables loopback testing for the following None Remote Local or Payload Administrative status of the V 35 X 21 or FR port Enable Disable WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Ethernet Port Configuration Parameters The Port Configuration dialog box for an Ethernet configured port type is shown below Figure 6 5 Ethernet Port Configuration Dialog Box ReserveProbT Ethernet Port Configuration Location _ m mmm az Cell Name NewCell Sector Name News ectorl BS BU ID ReserveProbT Port Port 3 Settings MAC Address l Working Mode Ful Duper 100 Handshake A Speed eS Max bandwidth Mbps Admin Status Disable 2 2 tS x o Cancel Apply Refresh Hep elp Response OK ie The following are configuration parameters for an Ethernet configured port type Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system
83. present at this PIB Read only From the Power Input Board Properties dialog box you can a Examine the PIB s configuration parameters 5 38 WALKnet User s Manual Fan Management Fan Management Displaying Fan Edit properties The FAN Properties dialog box enables you to examine and configure fan parameters gt To access Fan Properties The FAN Properties dialog box is accessed in one of following ways a Select Fan from the Chassis Element menu in Shelf View and then select FAN 1 Properties FAN 2 Properties or FAN 3 Properties E Select Fan from the Element menu in Sector View and then select FAN 1 Properties FAN 2 Properties or FAN 3 Properties The FAN Properties dialog box for the selected Fan is displayed Figure 5 14 FAN Properties Dialog Box W3K Shelf FAN Properties ioi x Location Cell Name SERVER o Shelf ID W3K Shelf FAN Number fi Settings AM i m i HW Revision Oper Status up o Appl Cancel Refresh Heb Response OK Q The FAN Properties dialog box displays the configuration parameters of the selected fan unit WALKnet User s Manual 5 39 Chapter 5 Shelf Management The following parameters are displayed in the FAN Properties dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this Fan has been defined Read only Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this Fan has been defined If the Shelf name is
84. r Settings _ _a_ _ um um B Cell Name WK Cca Slot Number pooo Shelf ID vsTarget Serial Number 5029422 C MPU ID MPU Hw Revision 04J Browse Default Gateway ID 199 203 141 225 Status S i i r Redundancy Oper Status uP st i C C COC Redundancy Status Disbled Admin Status Enbe o Stand By Status JInSevice Fault Status No Faut o Redundant MPU Slot Number Meu Chose Refresh Hep Response OK 5 8 WALKnet User s Manual Main Processing Unit MPU Management MPU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected MPU Card The parameters are read only To modify the configuration parameters see Modifying MPU Properties on page 5 10 The following parameters are displayed in MPU View Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this MPU has been defined Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this MPU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID MPU ID The system name if defined for the MPU or when no system name is defined slot number is used as MPU ID The system name is defined in the MPU Properties Edit dialog box Browse Enables you to display configuration information for Button another MPU in any shelf within same map Settings area Slot Number Number of the slot in the shelf where this MPU is installed Serial The serial number of the MPU
85. select Delete The Delete Confirmation message is displayed as shown below Figure 10 14 Delete Configuration File Message Delete Configuration File IN This will delete the configuration file Are you sure m 3 Click OK The Configuration file is deleted Loading Configuration You can upload BS BU configurations either to empty configuration files in the WALKnet database or to full configuration files in which case the existing data is overwritten with the new data You can only download full configuration files to BS BUs gt To upload configuration files 1 In the Configuration Load dialog box select a configuration file and click Upload When the selected file is empty the upload process begins immediately When the selected configuration file already contains data the Configuration Upload Warning is displayed as shown below Figure 10 15 Configuration Upload Warning Configuration Upload IN This will overwrite the configuration file Are you sure pa WALKnet User s Manual 10 23 Chapter 10 Utilities gt 2 Click OK to upload the configuration of the current BS BU to the selected file While the upload process is in progress the Load Status field dis plays In Progress When the upload process is completed the Load Status field displays Successful and the selected file receives a date stamp in the Date field To download configuration files In the Configuration Load dia
86. side of the Software Download dialog box select the components to which you want to download software Notes f If the selected version file contains a software download file for a component the name of x the file is displayed in parentheses after the component for example QBRI QBRI_104 s19 If the selected version file does not include a file for a component only the component name is displayed 7 In the Device Selection tree on the right side of the Software Download dialog box select the specific devices to which you want to download software All the devices for example Shelves BS BUs and TS BUs configured in the current map are displayed in the Device Selection tree Notes hierarchy For example when you select the cell all the devices in the cell are selected x Selecting an element in the hierarchy automatically selects all the elements below it in the automatically You can then deselect as required If you select a device and you have not selected the software component for the device in the Component Selection tree a warning is displayed When you select a BS BU in the Device Selection tree you cannot deselect all the associated TS BUs To download software to a BS BU only leave the TS BUs selected in the Device Selection tree but do not select the TS BU component in the Component Selection tree You can only download a National Protocol File to a WALKair 1000 BS BU 8 Below the Component Selectio
87. the First Channel Bandwidth and Administrative status gt To add a TDM service 1 Access the Client list dialog box in one of the following ways Shelf BS BU In Shelf View select Clients and Services from the Services menu E Shelf BS BU In Sector View select Clients and Services from the Services submenu of the Shelf menu E Stand Alone BS BU only In BS BU View select Clients and Services from the Services menu a In the Main window select Clients and Services from the W3000 Services submenu of the Configuration menu Browse to the required BS BU and click OK 2 In the Services List dialog box select Add from the TDM Service menu The Add TDM Service Properties Edit dialog is displayed as shown below Figure 7 51 for a W3000 Shelf and Figure 7 52 for a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU Figure 7 47 Add TDM Service Properties Edit W3000 Shelf liat Add TDM Service E ioj x Location ________ _ TDM Service en CellName W3KCel TDM SLAID l mE is al SS Shelf ID fiat TDM SLA Name Line Type Framed No CRC Cl ea ClientName MAX Bandwidth PT Be Ghent fi x Location 12sE1 NIU ATA NIL serene BSBUID BU Siot 6 Slot Number sitnu me TS ID is 4 E1 port lt ATM Port fi Sct a Line Type J Admin Status Disable x Ert Channel My VPLAVCI fi fio Oper Status J ok Cancel Refresh Heb Response OK 7 88 WALKnet User s M
88. the BS BU is defined The BS BU ID field is also read only and displays the system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box You can display the Terminal Stations registered to another BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map by clicking Browse and selecting another BS BU from the displayed Browse BS BU dialog box For further information see Horizontal Navi gation on page 2 19 2 Select an empty slot and select New from the Terminals menu The Terminal Properties Edit dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 59 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 4 60 3 Figure 4 35 Terminal Properties Edit Dialog Box Terminal Properties Edit OF x Location Cell Name Newel t S Sector Name pis BS BU ID Een BS BUY A a _ AaA aAA A a a_aAaA aANNA Terminal Station Index lea Customer ID Number i 0lti lt lt CS Estimated BS TS Distance km _ a Admin Status disable gt ok Cancel Help Note The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector for which the BS BU is defined The BS BU ID field is also read only and displays the system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog bo
89. the Registered Terminals dialog box select a TS BU slot and select Delete from the Terminals menu The Delete Terminal confirmation message is displayed Figure 4 37 Delete Terminal Confirmation Message Delete Terminal N This will permanently remove this Terminal and all its contents from this BS BU Are you sure Click Yes to delete the TS BU WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Modifying TS BU Properties You can modify the properties of a TS BU from the Registered Terminals dialog box and from Terminal Station BU View gt To modify TS BU properties 1 Open the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In the Registered Terminals dialog box select a TS BU slot and select Edit from the Terminals menu In Terminal Station BU View select Edit Terminal from the Terminal menu The Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 38 Terminal Station BU Properties Edit Dialog Box Location B Cell Name Naca cases ancien ange Sector Name NewSectoS1 BS BU ID aes Customer ID Epona System Name Kiient System Location YOZ System Contact Elena Klebanoy Admin Status Enable x Estimated BS TS Distance km jo o Cancel Appl Refresh Heb elp Response OK 9 Note f The Cell Name Sector Name and Customer ID fields are read only fields that x display the names of the c
90. the STM1 interface PSLM is terminated on the STM1 interface WALKnet User s Manual B 7 Appendix B Devices Traps Trap Number 15 16 19 20 21 22 B 8 Trap Name in MIB DeviceStatusOn DeviceStatusOff tsUIModChangeQAM toQPSK tsUIModChangeQPS KtoQAM tsDIModChangeQAM toQPSK tsDIModChangeQPS KtoQAM Send Criterion BS admin status became disable TS admin status became disable NIU admin status became disable IF MUX admin status became disable BS operational status became down TS operational status became down NIU operational status became down IF MUX operational status became down BS admin status became enable TS admin status became enable NIU admin status became enable IF MUX admin status became enable BS operational status became up TS operational status became up NIU operational status became up IF MUX operational status became up Modulation used by the TS in uplink has changed from QAM to QPSK Modulation used by the TS in uplink has changed from QPSK to QAM Modulation used by the TS in downlink has changed from QAM to QPSK Modulation used by the TS in downlink has changed from QPSK to QAM WALKnet User s Manual Hardware Traps Hardware Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Send Criterion Number 23 diagnosticsFaultOn HW fault is detected RAM test fault is detected FLASH test fault is detected FPGA test fault is detected SWITI test fault is detect
91. the VPI s VCI s fields Deleting IP SLAs To delete an IP SLA from the system all services defined for this IP SLA are first deleted gt To delete an IP SLA 1 In the IP SLA List dialog box select an existing IP SLA from the list of IP SLAs 2 From the JP SLA menu select Delete The Delete IP SLA confirmation message is displayed as shown below Figure 7 37 Delete IP SLA Confirmation Message Warning N You are about to delete the SLA Are you sure no 3 Click Yes to delete the selected IP SLA 4 The Delete IP SLA Error message box appears if the selected IP SLA has services 7 66 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management Figure 7 38 Delete IP SLA Error Message AN All services should be deleted before SLA removal 5 Click OK and delete services before SLA removal Notes To delete an IP SLA from the system all services defined for this IP SLA are first deleted WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management 7 68 The Service Level Agreement SLA defines the template of parameter values that are selected during the definition of TDM service to a client WALKair 3000 entire system supports up to 1024 TDM SLA The user can define up to 16 TDM SLA on a single TS Each TDM SLA belongs to a specific TS You can configure the TDM SLA details via the TDM SLA List dialog box To access the TDM SLA List
92. the load action last performed Upload or Download Load Status The status of the load action currently being performed None In Progress Successful Aborted S W Version err File CRC err File Format err File Corrupted NOT IN USE or General error Configurations area Name The name of the configuration file Description An optional description of the configuration file Date The date the configuration file was saved When no date is displayed the configuration file is empty Creating Configuration Files To upload the configuration from a BS BU to the WALKnet database you must either have an existing configuration file in the WALKnet database or you must create a new configuration file When you create a new configuration file it is an empty file meaning it is a shell with aname anda description into which data can be uploaded You can also upload data to existing full configuration files meaning files that already include data In this case the data is overwritten You can add any number of empty configuration files to the WALKnet database and delete or modify configuration files Adding Configuration Files gt When creating a new configuration file you add an empty file to the WALKnet database Data can then be saved to this file during the upload process To add configuration files 1 In the Configuration Load dialog box select New from the File menu The Add Configuration File dialog box is displayed a
93. there is no connection WALKnet will try to connect every minute Displays the progress of the collection process when WALKnet is collecting data f The Cycle Interval min and Max Concurrency fields can be modified and are described in Configuring Performance Data Collection on page 8 35 APM Tab The APM tab displays information about the air performance monitoring data collected during the current or last collection cycle as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 8 27 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8 11 APM Tab Last Interval Collected ALL BSBUs Status a Link Up Link Down Link NewCell NewSectorl ProbT TS 10 11 18 01 12 36 NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT TS 123 11 18 01 12 36 11 18 01 12 36 NewCell NewSectorl ProbT TS 17 11 18 01 12 36 11 18 01 12 36 NewCelll NewSectorl Silly TS 10 11 18 01 12 31 The APM tab includes the following read only fields Status The status of the BS BU A LED is displayed for every BS BU indicating the following a When the Cycle Status is Idle the LED indi cates the BS BU completion status of the last collection cycle Green OK Red Problem error or timeout Gray BS BU disabled for collection purposes E When the Cycle Status is Busy the LED indi cates the BS BU status during the current col lection cycle No LED Collection not yet started Green Collection completed successfully Red Collection failed Yellow Collection in p
94. trap The user is able to turn off this automated correlation policy so that the correct behavior of the Get Active Alarms operation for a specific element is not prevented The color of the symbol that represents a specific BU element on the NNM network topology map reflects a maximal severity of the events that came from that element to the OV Event Subsystem The user can open Base Station Element View from the contextual menu of a specific BU object on an NNM topology map For more details see Access to WALKair Base Station Element View on page 11 12 WALKnet User s Manual Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring Since the WALKair element is an IP device it is represented on the NNM topology map by a specific type of icon The netmon service which is one of the standard OV services is responsible for the discovery and correct recognition of the BU element Once a WALKair icon is created on the NNM map an icon representing a collection of parent WALKair element alarms appears on the WALKair child submap automatically The watopomap service which is a component of the Integration Pack creates an alarm collection icon for each of the WALKair elements that are present on the map during the OV GUI startup These icons are displayed below Figure 11 1 Alarm Collection and Alarm Object Icons 5193 124 27 Segmenti Map Edit View Performance Configuration F
95. two 2 Port MUXes and WALKair 1000 units the Default Gain 4 automatically 4 50 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management 10 11 12 13 14 15 The Modulation Change enables descent from QAM16 to QPSK modulation in case of bad link performance and ascent from QPSK to QAM16 modulation in case of improvement in link performance Set to Enable or Disable as required In the Settings area enter the W3000 BS BU System Name Location and Contact Type in also the Tx Power modem working point for Tx in dB up to 21 In the Default Gateway area type the name of the default gateway IP Address Location and Contact In the SNMP Configuration area in the SNMP Poll Interval sec field enter how often the NMS polls the Stand Alone BS BU in seconds In the SNMP Poll Timeout sec field enter the timeout period in seconds If there is no response from the Stand Alone BS BU for this period its status is considered disconnected In the System Clock area in the Clock Source Selection field choose the clock selection mode to be Manual from the dropdown list Select a clock source from the Clock Source field dropdown list as follows Telecom E1 port Internal via Stand Alone BS BU internal clock Clock Redundancy available for Telecom clock option If Clock Redundancy is not required proceed to step 15 OR If you selected Telecom as the clock source type F
96. was available Errored Seconds The percentage of ESs that were counted during AT ES is a one second time interval with one or more CRC errors over the air link path Severely Errored Seconds The percentage of SESs that occurred during AT SES is a one second time interval containing over 30 errored air frames or at least one defect a second with 60 or more errored air frames SES is a subset of ES Degraded Minutes The percentage of degraded minutes that were counted in the specified time interval 15 min or 24 hrs DM is a one minute time interval in which the estimated frame errorrate exceeds 1E 6 but does not exceed 1E 3 see G 821 1 DMs are determined by the following Collecting all available Seconds Removing any SESs Grouping the results in 60 sec long groups Counting a 60 sec long group minute as degraded if the cumulative errors during the seconds present in the group exceed 1E 6 Non Degraded Minutes The percentage of NDMs that were counted in the specified time interval 15 min or 24 hrs WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Detailed Air Performance gt The detailed air performance parameters include both DL parameters that refer to measurements at the TS BU and UL parameters that refer to measurements at the BS BU To view the detailed air performance parameters 1 Access the Air Performance Summary dialog box in one of the following ways
97. with the Maps folder open as shown below Figure 3 1 Open Dialog Box Look in a Maps zl cl BY default gif BY default_small gif Bf florida gif f new_jersey gif washington gif an_francisco gif By texas gif File name san_francisco gif Files of type All Files tii Cancel Select a background image for your map and click Open The selected image is displayed in the Workspace You can now save your map see Saving Maps on page 3 6 or define cells in your map described in Chapter 4 Cell Configuration WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 3 Map Management Note Workspace scroll bars enable you to view the entire map To reduce the size of the background image adjust the background image file GIF itself Ea The size of the background image is fixed When it is larger than the WALKnet Changing a Map Background The background image of a map can be changed at any time while the map is open gt To change the background image 1 Change the background image in one of the following ways From the File menu select Background Right click in the Workspace and select Background from the options displayed The Open dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 3 2 Open Dialog Box Look in E Maps 7 amp c BY default gif BY default_small gif Bf florida gif S washington gif File name san_francisco gif Files of type fan
98. x 2 Select the slot to which you want to move the selected W3000 BS BU from the dropdown list in the Destination Slot field and click OK The selected W3000 BS BU is moved to the new slot position Note z You can only move those cards whose Admin Status is Disabled and Fault Status is No Faults 4 48 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management WAL Kair 3000 Stand Alone Base Station Basic Unit Management Creating a Basic Unit Once a W3000 BS BU has been defined its configuration parameters and its registered Terminal Station TSs are accessible gt To create a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU 1 For an IF MUX type W3000 None Stand Alone BS BU In Sector View select W3000 BS BU SA from the Element menu and then select New from the submenu OR For an IF MUX type W3000 2 Ports Stand Alone BS BU In Sector View select a free slot and then select New from the Ele ment menu The new W3000 Stand Alone BS BU is created and displayed in the selected slot 2 Start configuring W3000 BS BU by selecting W3000 BS BU SA from the Element menu in Sector View and then select Edit The BS BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 49 Chapter 4 Cell Configurat ion Figure 4 30 Stand Alone BS BU Parameters 10 0 6 126 BS BU Properties Edit Fale ES Location Cell Name Sector SNMP Configuration q zs JNewCen SNMP Poll Interval sec fao N
99. you to open an existing map Saves the current map in a file Enables you to refresh SNMP parameters manually Enables you to open Cell View for a selected cell Enables you to open WALKair 3000 Shelf View for a selected shelf Enables you to open WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 Sector View for a selected sector according the sector type Enables you to open WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 BS BU View for a selected BS BU according the BS BU type Enables you to open WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 TS BU View for a selected TS BU according the TS BU type Enables you to open WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 Terminal Stations registered to a selected BS BU according the BS BU type Enables you to assign frequencies to WALKair 1000 and or WALKair 3000 BS BUs in the selected sector according to the sector type Enables you to configure RFU and antenna parameters for WALKair 1000 BS BUs Enables you to perform software downloads to devices WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Main Window g Versions Enables you to view resident software versions on o devices About Displays version information for the WALKnet a application z Help Provides access to online help Status Bar The WALKnet Status Bar indicates the current state of WALKnet while communicating with devices It also displays the time and date WALKnet User s Manual 2 11 Chapter 2 Getting Started Network Navigation Tree The WALKnet Network Navig
100. 0 Utilities Configuring SNMP Parameters WALKnet enables you to view and modify parameters relating to WALKnet s communication at the SNMP level For example you can specify the frequency at which WALKnet updates statuses gt To view modify SNMP parameters 1 In the Main window select SNMP Parameters from the Utilities menu The SNMP Parameters dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 27 SNMP Parameters Dialog Box SNMP General Poll Interval sec 3000 C S SNMP Windows Poll Interval sec hsa SNMP Map Status Poll Interval sec fs SNMP Poll Timeout sec fo Led Blink Rate sec joz o Cancel 2 Modify the following parameters as required SNMP General Poll Interval sec The frequency at which WALKnet polls the BS BUs to update parameters and statuses SNMP Windows Poll Interval sec The frequency at which WALKnet refreshes open windows SNMP Map Status Poll Interval sec The frequency at which WALKnet polls the WALKair devices to update the cell icon on an open map SNMP Poll Timeout sec The period for which WALKnet waits for a response from the BS BU before considering the BS BU s status disconnected Led Blink Rate sec The rate at which the LEDs blink 3 Click OK 10 48 WALKnet User s Manual 280 11 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization In This Chapter Integration Overview on page 11 2 Alarms Correlation and Object Sta
101. 00 BS BU E3 NIU Ports Configuration on a Shelf E3 port parameters can be only accessed on the ATM NIU E3 card The E3 port is configured using the E3 Port Properties dialog box gt To configure an E3 port In ATM NIU View open the E3 Port Properties dialog box in one of the following ways a In the Interface Table double click the E3 port you want to configure a In the Interface Table select the E3 port you want to configure and then select Edit Port from the Port menu The E3 Port Properties dialog box is displayed Figure 6 14 Shelf BS BU NIU E3 Port Properties Dialog Box E3_0 E3 Port Properties ioj x Location zs Cell Name NewCel2 Shelf ID GUY ATM NIU ID E30 Port Number fi ATM Settings a ES Port Setting A Max number of VPCs fo Medium Type E3Framed Max number of YCCs 2048 IREE HDB3 Number of YPCs currently in use fo SER NE EN hoo Number of CCs currently in use 2 Loopback State Line Loop x Max Number of YPI bits fe Atm Mapping Direct Current Max VPI bits J 8 Line Length Long Max Number of VCI bits h Scrambling On Current Max VCI bits J 16 Interface Loopback Location Code fo Framing a832 Interface Subesriber Address z Port Status ATM UNI Interface Type Atmo niPycOnly Oper Status up Interface ILMI VPI fo Interface ILMI VCI fe Aann aias iaia a OK Apply Cancel Refresh Help Response OK WALKnet User s Manual 6 31 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configu
102. 00 Service Management Default Router IP Addr Subnet Mask VLAN Tag VLAN Tag The backbone Default Router IP address Each SLA can use a different router on the backbone The Subnet Mask used in the TS on the client side Unique VLAN ID defined for the SLA read only Unique VLAN ID defined for the SLA read only ATM area read only For Shelf with ATM only ATM NIU for IP ATM port CBR VPI VCI RtVBR VPI VCI NrtVBR VPI VCI UBR VPI VCI The number of the ATM NIU card to define the IP service connection path 1 to 16 Indicates the ATM NIU card slot number Blank Indicates Ethernet connection The ATM NIU card port interface number required to define the service connection path The VCI VPI defined for level 1 The VCI VPI defined for level 2 The VCI VPI defined for level 3 The VCI VPI defined for level 4 5 Click OK The new IP Service is displayed in the Services List dialog box WALKnet User s Manual 7 85 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Editing IP Services gt The IP SLA ID CIR and administrative status of an existing IP service can be edited To edit an IP service 1 In the Services List dialog box select an existing IP service from the list of IP services From the IP Service menu select Edit Double Click on the line in the table that is identical to the Edit selected line option The IP Service Properties Edit dialog box is displayed The IP Service P
103. 000 Stand Alone only BS BU SA E1 Area read only E1 port The E1 port interface number is required to define the service connection path This number ranges from 2 to 9 and depends on the BS BU interface BS 3000 Type B 2 5 BS 3000 Type C 2 9 Line Type The E1 interface framing format This framing format must be identical to the format in the E1 area for the TS described earlier in this table First Channel The time slot 1 31 5 Click OK The new TDM Service is displayed in the Services List dialog box Editing TDM Services The TDM SLA ID Bandwidth and administrative status of an existing TDM service can be edited The first Channel can only be edited if you select another TDM SLA ID gt To edit a TDM service 1 In the Services List dialog box select an existing TDM service from the list of TDM services 2 From the TDM Service menu select Edit Double click on the line in the table that is identical to the Edit selected line option The TDM Service Properties Edit dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 49 on page 7 93 for a W3000 Shelf and 7 50 on page 7 93 for a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU 7 92 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Service Management Figure 7 49 TDM Service Properties Edit Dialog Box W3000 Shelf silat TDM Service Propertiesedt ao vice Properties Edit Location TDM Service Cell Name fw3KCell TDM S
104. 004 10 06 59 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Software Download started 12 E1 on slot 11 02 03 2004 10 07 38 10 0 35 104 W3000 fwsoo0 ON ei Interface is Changed BU SA 02 03 2004 10 07 38 1 104 W3000 ON Service Status is Disabled Down BU SA Normal 02 03 2004 10 07 39 10 0 35 104 w300 ON E1 Interface is Changed TS CID 1000 Close Refresh Trap File Save File Help 3 In the Actions menu select Get Active Alarms In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the latest alarms for the selected device are displayed example shown below WALKnet User s Manual 12 17 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Figure 12 7 Returned Active Alarms WALKair Alarms Monitor WALKair Alarms Monitor WALKair Alarms Monitor List Source Device Status Message 02 03 2004 10 27 18 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 BS na 02 03 2004 10 27 41 10 0 15 90 w3000 ON IFU Connection is Lost BS on slot 11 BS name 1 02 03 2004 10 28 08 10 0 15 90 w3000 OFF IFU Connection is Found BS on slot 11 BS name 1 Wearing 0270372004 10 29 16 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 Wearing 02703 2004 10 29 50 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 29 50 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 ON Software Download failed BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 Warning 02703 2004 10 30 01 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Softwa
105. 03 2004 10 27 15 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 BS na 02 03 2004 10 27 18 10 0 15 241 3000 OFF Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 BS na 02 03 2004 10 27 41 10 0 15 90 W3000 ON IFU Connection is Lost BS on slot 11 BS name 1 p28 10 0 15 90 W3000 OFF IFU Connection is Found BS on slot 11 BS name 1 o270372008 10 10 29 16 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 ON Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 an 02703 2004 10 29 50 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 OFF Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 29 50 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 ON Software Download failed BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 Warning 02703 2004 10 30 01 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 ON Software Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID 100 Waring 02703 2004 10 30 17 10 0 15 241 3000 ON LCI Access is Detected LCI Access MPU Waring 02703 2004 10 30 21 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID 100 02 03 2004 10 30 21 10 0 15 241 w3000 ON Software Download failed TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID 1003 Warming 02703 2004 10 32 32 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 Waning 0270372004 10 33 29 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 Waning 0270372004 10 34 41 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Software Download started TS BS slot 2 B
106. 3 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration This page left intentionally blank 6 44 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 7 System Services Configuration In This Chapter WALKair 1000 License Management on page 7 2 WALKair 1000 Leased Line Service Management on page 7 4 WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration on page 7 11 WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration on page 7 26 WALKair 3000 Client Management on page 7 47 WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management on page 7 55 WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management on page 7 68 WALKair 3000 Service Management on page 7 78 WALKair 3000 Show Clients on page 7 95 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKair 1000 License Management In WALKair 1000 certain device features are required to be licensed for BS BU and TS 1300 You can view the features currently supported in the system at any time If an unlicensed feature is accessed the device will return an error in WALKnet gt To apply the license key 1 Access Base Station BU View in one of the following ways In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a BS BU node In Sector View by double clicking a BS BU or by selecting a BS BU and then selecting View from the BS BU menu In the Main window by selecting BS BU from the Configuration menu or clicking View BS BU in the toolbar Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box a
107. 3 69 Edit Authorized Manager az Location Cell Name integrationCell Sector Name fintegs ector BS BU ID fi0 10 3 69 IP Address 10 10 3 60 Trap Transmission Enable x Set Operation Enable x Community public OK Cancel Refresh Help Response OK 3 Modify the values in the Trap Transmission Set Operation and Community fields as required 4 Click OK Deleting Authorized Managers Authorized Managers can be deleted from WALKnet gt To add Authorized Managers 1 In the Authorized Managers dialog box select an Authorized Manager WALKnet User s Manual 10 5 Chapter 10 Utilities 2 From the Manager menu select Delete The Delete Confirmation message is displayed as shown below Figure 10 4 Delete Confirmation Message Delete Table Row N You are about to delete the row Are you sure 3 Click Yes The Authorized Manager is deleted 10 6 WALKnet User s Manual Software Download Software Download WALKnet provides a software download feature that enables you to download software to several devices simultaneously at a predefined time Software can also be downloaded to a single device In WALKair 1000 system software can be downloaded to BS BUs and TS BUs In addition the National Protocol File used for QPOTS can also be downloaded to BS BUs in WALKair 1000 In WALKair 3000 software can be downloaded to MPUs BS BUs TS BUs NIUs and IF MUXs Befo
108. 4 NSAP 28 octets or NSAP NSAP 40 octets Other address lengths imply address types defined elsewhere Specifies the type of ATM cell layer interface defined on the physical path termination point modeled by this entry in the interface table None uni bici or bissi The default value of this field is None WALKnet User s Manual 6 25 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Interface ILMI VPI Interface ILMI VCI The VPI value of the VCC supporting the ILMI at this ATM interface If both ILMI VPI and ILMI VCI equal to zero then ILMI is not supported at this interface Default 0 The VCI value of the VCC supporting the ILMI at this ATM interface If both ILMI VPI and ILMI VCI equal to zero then ILMI is not supported at this interface Default 16 STM1 Port Settings area Medium Type Line Type Line Coding Section Status Loopback State Scrambling Whether a SONET or a SDH signal is used across this interface sonet or sdh The line type for this interface The line types are Short and Long Range Single Mode fiber or Multi Mode fiber interfaces and Coax and UTP for electrical interfaces The value Other is used when the Line Type is not one of the listed values Read only This variable describes the line coding for this interface B3ZS CMI NRZ RZ or Other The B3ZS and CMI are used for electrical SONET SDH signals STS 1 and STS 3 The Non Return to Zero NRZ and the Return to Zero are us
109. 5 tabs reflects the status of the BS BU as follows Green Collection completed successfully This indicates that data has been successfully collected from the BS BU and all the TS BUs connected to the BS BU Red Collection failed This indicates that there was a failure to collect data from the BS BU or one of the TS BUs connected to the BS BU Yellow Collection in progress This indicates that data is currently being collected from the BS BU or one of the TS BUs connected to the BS BU Gray BS BU disabled for collection purposes WALKnet User s Manual 8 37 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Once the collection process is complete the Cycle Status is Idle until the next collection cycle the start time of which is indicated in the Next Cycle Start field Notes y The first time the Collect button is clicked the collection process switches from Client x mode to Server mode Once in Server mode additional clicking of the Stop Collect button has the effect of stopping and restarting the collection but does not change the mode You are unable to switch back from Server mode to Client mode 8 38 WALKnet User s Manual Frame Relay Statistics Frame Relay Statistics When BS BUs and TS BUs are powered on data is collected on Frame Relay performance using error and traffic statistics counters defined in RFC 1604 WALKnet can poll the BS BUs and TS BUs at specified intervals and collect thi
110. 6 2004 15 31 31 10 0 15 90 w3000 Shelf is Changed ON Slot no 15 MPU Waning or 26 2004 15 31 35 10 0 15 90 w3000 Shelf is Changed OFF Slot no 5 MPU Waning or 26 2004 15 31 39 10 0 15 90 w3000 Shelf is Changed OFF Slot no 2 MPU 4 WALKnet User s Manual 12 9 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser In the WALKair Alarms History window you can sort the Severity Date Time Source IP Address and Device W3000 or W1000 or Status by clicking the column header for the item to sort Note f The columns in the WALKair Alarms History window support toggled sorting For x example if you click once on the Date Time column header the most recent alarm is displayed as the bottom of the list If you click again on the same column header the most recent alarm is displayed at the top of the list 12 10 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Acknowledging Alarms You acknowledge an alarm to indicate that the alarm was dealt with or that the problem or issue is solved gt To acknowledge a group of alarms in the alarms list You can do this in either of the following ways in the WALKair Alarms History window a Select one or more alarms by clicking the Ack column check box es in the alarm s row s for the alarm s Or a Select one or more alarms by clicking the row s for the alarm s Then from the Actions menu select Acknowledge and then Selected Alarms Note f Use the lt
111. 77 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 43 Sector Frequency Planning Dialog Box for Pure WALKair 1000 Sectors NewSector1 Sector Frequency Planning Of x Settings Location az Cell Name Cen Sector Name News ectorl BS BU Frequency Assignment eee oS es ee eee ee K re D P S ase EE E ce Se ee ed Ebene le es ae FO Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 10502 0000 10503 7500 10505 5000 10507 2500 10509 0000 10510 7500 10152 0000 10153 7500 10155 5000 10157 2500 10159 0000 10160 7500 4 gt The Location area displays the name of the sector for which the fre quency assignment is performed and the name of the cell to which the sector belongs The BS BU Frequency Assignment area provides a list of the BS BUs in the sector and the frequency channels assigned to them The Selected field displays the frequency currently operating on the BS BU The Frequency Scale area displays the specific Uplink and Downlink frequencies in MHz associated with each frequency channel 4 78 WALKnet User s Manual Frequency Planning 2 To change a frequency assignment for an operational BS BU select a checkbox below the number of the required frequency channel Note You cannot assign a frequency to a non operational BS BU The checkboxes below the numbers are disabled when the BS BU is not operational 3 Click Apply and assign frequencies to other B
112. 8 t CS S Status e Oper Status e o AdmnStatus Enable Fault Status NoFauts Interface Type Speed Oper Status Admin Status Ethernet 102400 Kbps Down Disable 102400 Kbps Down Disable 2048 Kbps Down Disable El 2048 Kbps Down Disable 2048 Kbps Down Disable 2048 Kbps Down Disable El 2048 Kbps Down Disable 2048 Kbps Down Disable 2048 Kbps Down Disable Down Disable ea Fen EA Response OK WALKnet User s Manual 4 71 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration TS View displays the configuration parameters of the selected TS and TS type In Figure 4 41 two examples are shown on the left TS view for a TS 3300 Type C includes 2 x Ethernet and 8 x El interfaces and on the right TS View for a TS 3000 type A includes two Ethernet interfaces The parameters are read only In order to modify the configuration parameters see Modifying TS BU Properties on page 4 65 The following parameters are displayed in TS View Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this TS has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this TS has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The name of the shelf for which this TS has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Shelf Name Stand Alone only Name of the Stand Alone unit BS BU ID The BS BU system name if defined or when no sys tem name is defined for a she
113. ALKNet cme In the Variable Value area type in the name of the directory path that will include the WALKnet Log File directories created by WALKnet for example c WALKnet Click OK WALKnet User s Manual 1 17 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet The Environmental Variables Dialog Box is updated Figure 1 8 Environmental Variables Dialog Box updated Environment ariables 21x rUser variables for ricks Variable NMS LOG ci walknet NMS_NATIONAL nptest TMP C Documents and Settings ricks Local 5 New Edt Delete System variables Variable Value ComSpec C AWINNT system32 cmd exe NUMBER_OF_PR 1 os Windows_NT Os2LibPath C WINNTisystem32 os2 dll Path C Program Files eDrawings2003 C W New Edit Delete cne 7 If you are running Windows NT close WALKnet and then restart your PC Or If you are running Windows 2000 or Windows XP close WALKnet and then restart WALKnet 1 18 WALKnet User s Manual SNMP MIBs Supported by WALKnet SNMP MIBs Supported by WALKnet WALKnet supports the following MIBs a Rfc1213 mib a ianaif mib a rfc1604 mib a walk_ro mib E walk_tc mib a walkair mib a walkvS mib a rfc2514 mib a rfe2515 mib a walkair3k mib MIBs should be compiled in the above order in HPOV WALKnet User s Manual 1 19 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet This page left intentiona
114. ALKair 1000 V5 Configuration V5 configuration involves the management of the following items a V5 Interfaces a V5 Subscribers a V5 Global Parameters The V5 interface can take two forms V5 1 and V5 2 The BS BU is connected to the Public Switch by the V5 2 interface which supports up to three E1 links and provides a protection mechanism PSTN or ISDN traffic runs over the V5 2 interface The TS BU supports the V5 1 interface and each TS BU can support up to three V5 1 or BRI interfaces The V5 1 interface can be defined over E1 single interface per E1 link with no protection The BRI interface can be defined over the BRI telecom interface on the TS BU In this case WALKair translates the ISDN protocol to ISDN over V5 2 on the BS BU side The POTS interface can be defined over the POTS telecom interface on the TS BU In this case WALKair translates the protocol over V5 2 on the BS BU side The V5 interfaces database is located on BS BU You can define V5 configuration for a TS BU before it is physically located in the WALKair system or when it is disconnected from the BS BU Then when the air link is established and the administrative status of both the TS BU and the BS BU is enabled the TS BU receives all its configuration parameters from the BS BU WALKnet User s Manual 7 11 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration V5 Interface Configuration V5 interfaces are configured from the V5 Interfaces dialog box gt To ac
115. ALKair 3000 ATM NIU 2xE1 NIU E3 NIU card refer to Shelf Management on page 4 19 Once an NIU is defined its configuration parameters are accessible Displaying ATM NIU View ATM NIU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the ATM NIU gt To access ATM NIU View ATM NIU View can be accessed in one of the following ways a In the Navigation Tree by double clicking an ATM NIU node a In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking an ATM NIU Card a By selecting an ATM NIU Card in Sector View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then selecting View a By selecting an ATM NIU Card in Shelf View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then selecting View The ATM NIU View screen for the selected ATM NIU is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 5 17 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Figure 5 7 ATM NIU View Dialog Box Niu 1 ATM NIU iew Ben n ses O ooo oran Noe Tvefoce Type Speed Onerstaus Aerin stows 161649 Kbps Enable 161649 Kbps Enable 5 18 WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management ATM NIU Configuration Parameters ATM NIU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected ATM NIU Card The parameters are read only In order to modify the configuration parameters refer to Modifying NIU Properties on page 5 28 The following parameters are displayed in ATM NIU View dialog box
116. AN Configured Type TS 3000 TypeA System Name ERT System Location po System Contact e Estimated BS TS Distance km 1 Rx Operating Point zoo VOP Admin Status Dise Admin Status Enbe tst CS S Response OK e The following parameters are displayed in the TS Properties Edit dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this TS has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this TS has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The name of the shelf for which this TS has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Shelf Name Stand Alone only Name of the Stand Alone unit BS BU ID Shelf The BS BU system name if defined or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU is used as the BS BU ID Stand Alone The Stand Alone BS BU system name when no system name is defined the IP Address of the BS BU WALKnet User s Manual 4 75 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 4 76 Terminal Station Index Customer ID Reference number automatically assigned to the TS A unique ID number per BS BU TS ID numbers are defined by the Operator Read only Modem modulation area Actual Up Actual Down Recommended Terminal Area System Name System Location System Contact Estimated BU TS distance km Admin Status Note The actual Modem Modulation for Uplink The actual Modem Modulation for Downli
117. Alarms File Look in E Tap 7 El l 53 01_24 2004 trap 01_25 2004 trap Fiene Files of type Trap Files trap x Cancel 2 Select the file you want and click on the Open button Note alarms it will take some to load In such cases the message box shown on the left is EM if the alarms file you want to open is at least 300 kb in size including approximately 3000 displayed Click on the Yes button to proceed or on the No button to cancel file open Trap File History file is large and may take some time to load Do you want to proceed The selected alarms in the trap file display in the WALKair Alarms His tory window 12 16 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Requesting Active Alarms for a Device You can send a request Get Active Alarms to a WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 device to send its active alarms to the WALKair Alarms Monitor for display You can initiate Get Active Alarms from either the WALKair Alarms History window or from Sector View for any WALKair BS BU Requesting Active Alarms from the WALKair Alarms History Window gt To request active alarms display for a device 1 Display both the WALKair Alarms Monitor and WALKair Alarms History on your monitor 2 In the WALKair Alarms History window click on a row for the device In the example below the device with IP Address 10 0 15 59 Figure 12 6 Selecting a Device WALKair Alarms History WALKai
118. Alone BS BU System eee ceeceeeeeeeeeeennteeeeeeeeeeeneee 1 3 System Requirements 0 2 ccnneeeceeeceeennnneneeeeeeeensnseeeneneeessensennnneeeaeeeees 1 5 SIS A e EEE 1 7 Installing WALKnet on WiINdoOWS eseseeseeeeiiessesserrrssssrserrrrrssssererene 1 7 Installing WALKnet on UNIX naesesssssseseeeerieeserrrerrrrssssrrrrrrnssssrrrneens 1 8 POS MACEIO Ia MEE 1 12 Connecting WALKnet to a Database ccccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 1 13 Product Support 0 0 0 0 csc eeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeaaeeaaeeaaeeaaeaaaeaaaeeaeeaaeeaaeeas 1 13 Connecting to Microsoft ACCESS secivecsisisssstucectatntasasanrgienesdectataninsecees 1 14 Connecting to Oracle8i sic deccseaissusccvctenviveaysedelnceradaxeanveatanhavelaucsiencatre 1 14 Database Size Requirements ccscccsecceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeess 1 15 WALKnet Customization for UNIX seseeeseeeeseeeeeeerrrssssrrrirrnssssreens 1 15 Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files sccceeeeeees 1 16 SNMP MIBs Supported by WALKnet cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 19 Chapter 2 Getting Started Starting WALKnet sctisisnsiedsdtncnecacnndviuwecaciceaenewtenl adwiendvienmannndctiuabiduswacnenienes 2 2 WALKnet Main Window sisi in vvcccrntis sun cecsecccisiannansocverensnnaisswiveenrentiencan 2 4 Title Bar ooo ceccececsecceecceecceeeceseceseeeeeeeeecueeeaeeeaeeueeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenneness 2 4 Contents Menu BG a cassie sda esa
119. BS BU For details see TBD needcrossref 2 Modify the current and default working point parameters as follows Current Modem Working Point dB area Nominal Tx The initial power value for Tx This enables the Power fine tuning of distance measurements between the BS BU and TS BU in order to optimize modem per formance Nominal Max Tx The max power value for Tx Power Nominal Rx The initial power value for Rx Power Default Modem Working Point dB area read only Nominal Tx The default modem working point for initial Tx in dB Power Nominal Rx The default modem working point for initial Rx power Power in dB 4 92 WALKnet User s Manual Configuring the RFU and Antenna 3 Select whether VOP Variable Operating Point is enabled or disabled in the VOP Admin Status field The current VOP status is displayed in the VOP Operational Status field 4 Click Apply to save any modifications to the BS BU Note Click Update Current to automatically insert the default modem working point values into the current modem working point values Configuring TS BU RFU amp and Antenna Parameters WALKair 1000 only The RFU and antenna parameters can be displayed for each WALKair 1000 TS BU individually Note For WALKair 3000 the TS BU RFU and Antenna parameters are accessed from Sector M View only WALKnet User s Manual 4 93 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration gt To display RFU and antenna para
120. BUs The BS BU stores the Frame Relay configuration and transfers it to the TS BUs when the air link is established When there is a configuration mismatch between the configured parameters and the installed hardware the TS BU transmits a configuration mismatch Trap The workflow for configuring Frame Relay services is as follows a Define the Configured Type as FR or Ethernet Refer to Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration a Define Frame Relay logical ports over the physical Frame Relay card Refer to Frame Relay Logical Port Configuration on page 7 27 a Define the Frame Relay Ethernet connection over the logical ports See Frame Frame Relay Ethernet Service Configuration on page 7 34 Frame Relay Logical Port Configuration WALKair supports a single Frame Relay port per Frame Relay card and enables you to define Frame Relay logical ports over the telecom interfaces configured as V 35 FR 2M and 4M X 21 FR 2M and 4M or E1 FR gt To define Frame Relay logical ports The Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways E In Base Station BU View from the BS BU menu select Services then Frame Relay Ethernet Configuration and then Frame Relay Port E In Terminal Station BU View from the Terminal menu select Services then Frame Relay Ethernet Configuration and then Frame Relay Port WALKnet User s Manual 7 27 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration a In th
121. BUs without having to close the respective View You navigate horizontally using the Browse button available in all Views The following procedure shows as an example how to navigate horizontally between cells The method is the same when you are navigating horizontally between shelves sectors MPUs NIUs HSCs BS BUs or TS BUs To navigate horizontally 1 Click the Browse button in Cell View The Browse Cell dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Navigation Model Figure 2 8 Browse Cell Dialog Box WALKNet Browse CELL ha B 44 Australias St Ten Selection ce LL NewCelll OK Cancel 2 Expand the tree and select another cell WALKnet User s Manual 2 21 Chapter 2 Getting Started Note To find a cell in the tree specify its name in the Find field and click Do Find If the specified cell is found it is selected in the tree 3 Click OK The Browse Cell dialog box is closed and the open Cell View now displays the configuration of the newly selected cell Error Information WALKnet issues specific error messages when the system receives errors from a device The message contains error codes as shown in the example below Figure 2 9 Error Message WaALKNet Error B Error received from device Error code 410 413 Ok Details Click Details to display a description of the error message Refer to Appendix C WALKair 1000 Error Me
122. CI Allocation Fault terminated TDM bus Error terminated PCI Allocation Fault detected card extraction at a PCI detected a fault in a Power Supply detected a failure in the power supply for the shelf detected a fault in a shelf Fan detected that the shelf is over heated detected a fault in the Alarm and Control Module detected card insertion at a PCI slot detected that the Power Supply Unit is operational detected that the power supply for the shelf is OK WALKnet User s Manual B 19 Appendix B Trap Trap Name in MIB Send Criterion Number MPU detected a that the Fan is operational MPU detected that self temperature is OK MPU detected that the Alarm and Control Module is operational 63 DryContactOn MPU detected that a dry contact input is On MPU detected that a dry contact output is On 64 DryContactOff MPU detected that a dry contact input is Off MPU detected that a dry contact output is Off B 20 WALKnet User s Manual BS BU Redundancy Traps BS BU Redundancy Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 65 RedundantBuOn 66 RedundantBuOff 67 buSwitchingToRedundant Send Criterion The MPU detected a fault ina redundant BU The MPU detected the redundant BU for a sector is currently occupied The MPU detected that the redundant BU is OK The MPU detected the redundant BU for a sector is free The MPU started switching to the redundant BU
123. CI field If you select an Ethernet port on both sides BS BU and TS BU WALKnet automatically assigns the first free DLCI number You can change the assigned DLCI number if required 7 Enter values in the BC BE and CIR fields for the uplink and downlink traffic Refer to page Frame Relay Ethernet Service Configuration on page 7 34 for a description of these fields WALKnet User s Manual 7 37 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 8 When the service is defined over Ethernet meaning an Ethernet port is selected for at least one side enter values in the remaining fields as follows Default Gateway IP Address Local Router IP Address VLAN Id IP Subnet Local Subnet Mask Routing Method The IP address of the gateway used to send non local IP traffic This field is mandatory The IP address of the router used on the local LAN if it exists The identification of the virtual LAN This is used in case of VLAN Tag DLCI Mapping Enter None if a VLAN ID is not used The IP address of the local LAN The IP subnet mask of the local LAN This is used in the case of DLCI IP subnet mapping When Source is selected the source IP address is used for mapping and when Destination is selected the destination IP address is used for mapping 9 Select Active or Inactive as the administrative status of the service in the Admin Status field 10 Click OK The new Frame Relay Ethernet service is disp
124. CTRL gt key on the keyboard and mouse to select alarms one by one and the lt Shift gt key and mouse to select a group of adjacent alarms For each selected alarm the Ack column check box is marked B In the WALKair Alarms History window from the Actions menu select gt To acknowledge all the alarms in the alarms list Acknowledge and then All Alarms For each alarm in the list the Ack column check box is marked gt To unacknowledge a group of alarms If you want to mark one or more previously acknowledged alarm s as unacknowledged you can do this in one of the following ways in the WALKair Alarms History window WALKnet User s Manual 12 11 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser a Unselect one or more alarms by clearing the Ack column check box es one by one in the alarm s row s for the alarm s Or a Select one or more acknowledged alarms by clicking the row s for the alarm s Then from the Actions menu select Unacknowledge and then Selected Alarms Note a Use the lt CTRL gt key on the keyboard and mouse to select alarms one by one and the lt Shift gt key and mouse to select a group of adjacent alarms For each selected alarm the Ack column check box mark is removed gt To unacknowledge all the alarms in the alarms list E In the WALKair Alarms History window from the Actions menu select Unacknowledge and then All Alarms For each alarm in the list the Ack column check b
125. Configuration Figure 4 36 Terminal Station BU View ProbT Terminal Station BU View oy x Terminal Performance Port Location amp amp i 7 Settings _ _a_ A oo_ _e B Cell Name Newt Serial Number 213605 Sector Name Sise Frequency Band esl BS BU ID A Oper Status connected TS BU ID REG Admin Status fenable ssena Browse Estimated BS TS Distance km fo Detected Type Configured Type Description Speed Oper Status Admin Status El El E1 2048 Kbps Down Disable V35x21 V35 FRI2M V 35 21 64 Kbps Down Disable Not Installed Ethemet Not Installed 10 100 Mbps Down Disable o m sa iss oe Decan Pe WALKair BU TS3 5 Ghz mi Close Refresh Help x 4 62 Note The LED display at the bottom of Terminal Station BU View provides a graphical representation of the TS BU front panel Terminal Station BU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected TS BU The parameters are read only To modify the configuration parameters see Modifying TS BU Properties on page 4 65 The following parameters are displayed in Terminal Station BU View Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this TS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU to which this TS BU is registered or when no system name is defined
126. Contact J Location Tx Power fi 5 00000 Contact Tx Default Gain dB Jo co000 j 5 r Status q Modulation Change Disable xl Oper Status Down Actual IP Mode Bridging Admin Status Disable gt Configured IP Mode Bridging Fault Status No Faults System Clock Clock Source Selection Manual Clock Source Jintemal xj Clock Redundancy Disable gt f Clock Primary Master gt j Clock Primary Actual Clock Secondary Master gt j Clock Secondary Actual ox Appl Cancel Refresh Heb Response OK Note The Cell Name and Sector fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector for which the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU is defined 2 Modify the W3000 BS BU Name and Settings as required see also the parameters description list starting on page 4 53 Note When you define a System Name for the W3000 BS BU that name appears in the BS BU ID field and the title bar of the W3000 BS BU dialog screens When no system name is entered the IP Address is used to identify the W3000 BS BU 3 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU from the dropdown list Enable or Disable 4 Click on OK or Apply to save modifications to the properties of the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU WALKnet User s Manual 4 57 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Terminal Station Basic Unit Management WALKair 1000 Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Registration is the
127. DM Services ciscacescdonuisnntbettnenshdasdnned teatehetttachuehilamttiantientens 7 92 Deleting a TDM Service scrsccccscsiacncccasercassnrssedecetieieniahemierentacestaeeaee 7 94 WALKair 3000 Show Clients ssssnsssssnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 7 95 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring cccccsssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 2 Air Performance Summary ccccccccececeeeseesceeeeneeeeeenenenseseeeeeees 8 2 Detailed Air Performance ccccccccesscceceneeeeseeeeeneneeeeeeeeeeneeneeeees 8 6 WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring ccccccesesseeeeeteeeeeeeeees 8 11 Air Performance Summary ceeeeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeneeaaaaes 8 11 Detailed Air Performance sssseseeeeeeeeeeriirrresesrrrrrnssssrrerrrrneeesrene 8 15 V5 Call Statistics wcsessssnsscacnicnsnsanunscccnnnitaasaaantdatnvennnnbisaneddenssunsanasanecntinnane 8 20 Performance Data Collection ccsssseeeeeceeeeseeseseeeeeeeeenseneeeseneeeeeees 8 24 Viewing the Collection Process cccceccessesseeeeneneeeeeneesseneeeeee 8 26 6 WALKnet User s Manual Contents Configuring Performance Data Collection ees 8 35 Frame Relay Statistics wisinieccweasevecsedvedinenah civewsurddenerannviusvacecenrantienednniess 8 39 Port Signaling Statistics scccciscs s2dcbcteccaiwelaetes dion efondutsstcebetbedseraeante 8 39 End Point Traffic Statistics sca cscs ctensctneue
128. Disabled Internal device problem WALKnet User s Manual C 5 Appendix C QBRI Port Configuration Error Type Description 151 OperStatus must be Down 151 AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable if detected port type is not QBRI 152 Admin Status cannot be changed to Disable if QBRI Interface Admin Status is Enabled and Subscriber is defined over this Interface 153 Internal device problem Arp Table Error Type Description 160 Internal device problem Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management Error Type Description 170 No connection with the card Leased Line Service Error Type Description 210 Service delete is allowed only if Service is disabled C 6 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages Add Leased Line Services Error Type Description 220 Invalid E1 Channels selected 221 Inconsistent service configuration and telecom port configuration Selected bandwidth does not match the rate on V 35 X 21 card 222 E1Channels are being used by another service 223 Inconsistent service configuration and telecom port configuration E1 channel 0 cannot be used if the E1 Mode is Transparent a Only 32 E1 channels are allowed if the E1 Mode is Unframed E E1 Channel 0 and E1 Channel 16 cannot be used if the E1 Mode is CCS 224 AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable if the Telecom Interface AdminStatus is disabled 225 AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enab
129. E1 Port Configuration dialog box Figure 6 11 W3000 Stand Alone BS BU E1 Port Configuration 10 0 6 126 E1 Port Configuration of x Location A Ss Cell Name Newel t lt Ct s S Sector Name NewSector Shelf ID Stand lone BS BU ID fo o6126 Port Number fl Ln Settings _ ___ __ _ __ Line Type Framed NoCRC Loss Alarm Mode tT ti i C x Signaling Mode Transparent gt Loopback Mode None tst CS S gt Status Oper Status Down Admin Status Enbe Assigned Channel Map so os i ff fo fo fo oo ff fo fo oi a of of of ok Apply Cancel Refresh Help Response OK g WALKnet User s Manual 6 21 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration The following parameters are displayed in the W3000 BS BU E1 Port Configuration dialog box Location area Cell Name Sector Name Shelf ID BS BU ID Port Number Settings area Line Type Loss Alarm Mode Signaling Mode Loopback mode Status area Oper Status Port Admin Status The name of the cell for which this BS has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS has been defined The name for the Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined for the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address of the W3000 BS BU Ports 1 10 are occupied by Ethernet E1 interfaces on a Stand Alone BS BU The port number for the Ethernet card appe
130. Ethernet port on a BS BU Admin Administrative status of the Ethernet port Enable Status Disable ARP LAN Table You can view the ARP LAN table for a selected Ethernet card and VLAN gt To view the ARP LAN table 1 In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View open the ArpTable dialog box in one of the following ways WALKnet User s Manual 6 11 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Select an Ethernet port and select ARP LAN Table from the Port menu Right click an Ethernet port in the graphical representation of the BS BU TS BU and select ARP LAN Table from the options displayed The ARP LANTable dialog box is displayed Figure 6 6 ARP LAN Table Dialog Box 10 10 3 60 ARP LAN Table Demon B Cell Name NorthCell Sector Name Scansector BS BU ID JEthemet TS BU ID JEthemet Port Por ARP LAN Table Previous Next VLAN Id 22 x IP Address MAC Address 122 122 5 3 145 54 65 22 199 125 56 32 156 231 25 34 199 125 23 56 145 54 58 62 55 65 47 c2 d6 f5 199 125 54 69 02 05 47 e5 a8 d6 Close DeleteRows Delete Table Refresh Heb 2 In the VLAN Id field select the required VLAN The IP addresses and MAC addresses for the selected VLAN are displayed From the ARP LAN Table you can do the following 6 12 Click Previous and Next to scroll through the VLANs and display the corresponding IP and MAC addresses Select
131. File Name es s9s9 0 O Action Downoad To StandBy xj Download To BSBU Selected devices Download Status BS BU Unknown Terminals a List Of Terminals o Clove eel Reltesh Status Hep elp 2 Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the Server IP Address field 3 Enter the name of the file to download in the File Name field or locate the file using the Browse button The file name must include the full path from where the TFTP server is defined Notes z When you are downloading software to a Frame Relay Ethernet QBRI or POTS card the file name should start with FR Eth or QBRI or POTS respectively The software is downloaded to all the cards of the same type A National Protocol File can only be downloaded to a BS BU When you are downloading a National Protocol File the file name starts with np 4 Select the action to perform on the file from the dropdown list in the Action field as follows Download To StandBy Downloads the file to selected devices Abort Download Aborts the download in process None Performs no action WALKnet User s Manual 10 17 Chapter 10 Utilities 5 Select the device to which you want to download the file in the Download To area When you select BS BU the name of the BS BU is displayed in the Selected devices field When you select Terminal s select the specific TS BU from the List Of Terminals and click W The selected TS BU
132. IF MUX The IF MUX Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 23 IF MUX Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box NMS MPU Yersions and Reset Management Mi Ea Location _ _AAY n B Cell Name Newt Sector Name NewSector1 Shelf ID NMSMPU IF MUX Number fFMuxXo 8 8 C Current Software Version 2 00 W3K_M PU_Release_2 0 Description Standby Software Version 2 00 Description W3K_M PU_Release_2 0 Card Info Hardware Rerevision foo cose Refresh Reset Switchover Help Response OK y 10 40 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management The read only parameters displayed in the IF MUX Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which the IF MUX has been defined Sector Name The name of the Sector for which the IF MUX has been defined Shelf ID The name of the Shelf for which the IF MUX has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID IF MUX Number Number of the IF MUX Current Software area Version The active software version Description The description of the active software Stand By Software area Version The current standby version Description The description of the current standby version Card Info area HW Revision The hardware version of a card gt To switc
133. In the Authorized Managers dialog box select Add from the Manager menu The Add Authorized Manager dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 2 Add Authorized Manager Dialog Box 10 10 3 69 Add Authorized Manager az Location Cell Name fintegrationCel Sector Name fintegs ector BS BU ID fi0 10 3 69 IP Address Trap Transmission Disable x Set Operation Disable x Community o Cancel Hep Specify the IP address of the authorized management station in the IP Address field Select Enable or Disable in the Trap Transmission field to specify whether the BS BU transmits Traps to the management station specified in Step 2 Select Enable or Disable in the Set Operation field to specify whether the management station specified in Step 2 is permitted to perform Set operations on the BS BU meaning change the parameters stored in the BS BU Specify the community string up to 16 letters included in Traps sent by the BS BU in the Community field WALKnet User s Manual Authorized Managers 6 Click OK Modifying Authorized Managers The parameters for an Authorized Manager can be modified gt To modify Authorized Managers 1 In the Authorized Managers dialog box select an Authorized Manager 2 From the Manager menu select Edit The Edit Authorized Manager dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 3 Edit Authorized Manager Dialog Box 10 10
134. LA ID eooo S TS E e Shelf ID fiat ore E TDM SLA Name Line Type Framed No CRC Chon Client Name Max Bandwidth 1 4 First Channel fi xi Location 12461 NIU ATM NI eee BSBUID BU Siot 6 Slot Number Sct Number fin OS TSID is 4 E1 port J ATM Port fi Graus a Te J Admin Status JEnable yi First Channel el VPIAICI fi fi 10 Oper Status Inactive OK Cancel Apply Refresh Help Response OK Figure 7 50 TDM Service Properties Edit Dialog Box W3000 Stand Alone BS BU BSBU_SOLO TDM Service Properties Edit a Dj x B Location TDM Service MlM T5 ET 1mm CellName NewCen TDM SLA ID f2 yi Bae a Sector NewSector3_1 TDM SLA Name saz Line Type Framed No CRC aj First Ch fi Client m Bandwidth fi 4 tst Channel E Client Name aaa BS BU SA E1 Status Location Lab ial fa E Admin Status Enable x BS BU ID BSBU_SOLO Line Type Framed No CRC l ict Channel Oper Status inactive TS ID ts 1 OK Cancel Apply Refresh Help Response OK Q Modify the TDM SLA ID of the service by selecting an available TDM SLA ID from the dropdown list in the TDM SLA ID field If you select another TDM SLA ID you can modify the First Channel by selecting an available channel from the dropdown list in the First Channel field If the TDM SLA ID is not changed the First Channel field is read only Modify the Bandwidth for an existing TDM Service using the arrows
135. LKair 1000 BS BUs and is described below The following procedures also include cases for mixed WALKair 1000 and WALKair 3000 sectors Accessing Sector View gt To access Sector View 1 Access Sector View in one of the following ways In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a sector node In Cell View by double clicking a sector in the List of sectors In Cell View by selecting a sector in the List of sectors and selecting View from the Sector menu In the Main window by selecting Sector from the Configuration menu or clicking View Sector in the toolbar Then browsing to the required sector in the Browse Sector dialog box and clicking OK Sector View for the selected sector is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 12 19 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Requesting Alarms from a WALKair 1000 BS BU gt To request alarms from a WALKair 1000 BS BU 1 Access Sector View see Accessing Sector View on page 12 19 Figure 12 8 W1000 Sector View Selecting W1000 BS BU olx Sector View Sector Loca Cell Sect New Delete Edit View Move Get Active Alarms A RaO RIO RAO R Rai ASO RO R RIO EA ii GA iad TO THO TO Close Refresh Heb 2 In Sector View click on the WALKair 1000 BS BU you want to display alarms for 3 From the BS BU menu select Get Active Alarms In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the latest al
136. LKair 3000 TDM SLA Management 5 Click OK and delete services before SLA removal Notes To delete a TDM SLA from the system first delete all services defined for this TDM SLA WALKnet User s Manual 7 77 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKair 3000 Service Management 7 78 The WALKair 3000 provides the following types of services a IP services provide Data and VoIP services carried over the IP traffic to the customer a TDM Services provide Telephony and Leased Line services carried over the TDM PCM traffic or Serial bit stream traffic to the customer IP services and TDM services are configured from the Service list dialog box To add a TDM SLA The Service list dialog box is accessed in the one of following ways a In the Client List dialog box select a client in the client table and click the Service button a In the Show Clients dialog box select a client in the client table and click the Service button The Service list dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Service Management Figure 7 43 Service List Dialog Box NMS MPU new Service List F SIE o x IP Services IP SLA TDM Services TDM SLA Location Client az CellName NewCell Client Name aaa BS BUID BU Slt 5 ShelfID NMS MPU new Location fa tsibo frs45 IP Services 5 Admin Oper SLAID SLA Name CIR MIR Class of Service Eth Port Status Status 1 sla 0 256 Bronz
137. NM map dictates 11 4 WALKnet User s Manual Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring The user can change the current propagation policy for the entire map by selecting the Status Propagation tab in the Map Properties dialog box as shown in Figure 11 2 The Map Properties dialog box is accessed by selecting Properties from the Map menu in the NNM main window Figure 11 2 Setting Up the Status Propagation Policy General Applications View Status Propagation Compound Status Propagate Most Critical Propagate At Threshold Values 0 100 30 Warning 20 Minor 10 Major F Critical x tae See the Managing Your Network NNM manual for more details about managing the status propagation policy Each alarm object within a BU s alarm collection has details about the alarm it represents The object s label consists of three parts separated by a colon The format of the label is as shown lt buTrapSource gt lt buAlarmData gt lt trap_name gt Where E buTrapSource is the value of the varbind 6 of the alarm According to the WALKair MIB definition it is a string containing BS for BS and TS lt customer id gt for the TS transmitting the trap E buAlarmData is the value of the varbind 5 of the alarm According to the WALKair MIB definition it is a string containing the number of the port that is the source of the alarm If the current alarm does not h
138. Port Configuration on page C 6 Arp Table on page C 6 Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management on page C 6 Leased Line Service on page C 6 Add Leased Line Services on page C 7 Edit Leased Line Services on page C 8 V5 Interfaces on page C 8 Add V5 Interfaces on page C 8 Edit V5 Interfaces on page C 9 Change V5 Interface Admin Status on page C 9 Add V5 Subscribers on page C 9 Delete V5 Subscriber on page C 9 Add Frame Relay Port on page C 10 Edit Frame Relay Port on page C 10 Frame Relay Port Configuration Delete Port on page C 11 Add Frame Relay Service on page C 11 Edit Frame Relay Service on page C 13 Frame Relay Service Delete FR Service on page C 13 Add Authorized Manager on page C 14 Edit Authorized Manager on page C 14 Software Download on page C 14 BS BU Properties Edit on page C 14 Terminal Properties Edit Add New TS on page C 15 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages Terminal Station BU Properties Edit on page C 15 Sector RFU and Antenna No Redundancy on page C 15 Sector RFU and Antenna Redundancy on page C 15 Terminal RFU and Antenna on page C 16 WALKnet User s Manual C 3 Appendix C Change Configured Port Type Error Type Description 110 Internal device problem 111 Impossible to change type when there is
139. Reset Management gt Description The description of the current version Stand By Software area Version The current standby version Description The description of the current standby version Card Info area Vendor ID The card vendor ID HW Revision The hardware version of a card To switch between current and backup software versions In the BS BU Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Switchover WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically resets the BS BU Notes You can reset the BS BU at any time by clicking Reset However do NOT click the Reset button until you are certain that a software switchover has been completed TS BU Software Versions gt WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located in the TS BUs You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time To view software versions on a TS BU In TS View select Versions from the TS menu The TS Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below for WALKnet User s Manual 10 35 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 21 TS Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box W3K Shelf Presentation Bu Presentation TS Mi Eg Location AA B Cell Name NewCelt Sector Name News ectorl Shelf ID W3K Shelf BS BU ID Presentation Bu TSID Presentation TS 3 Current Software Version fi 01b Description Final Beta 12 01 2002
140. S System Location Klaras Room System Contact MimankK SCS Admin Status Enae x Clock Source Selection automatic x Clock Source Telecom ts x Clock Output Disse titit S x o Cancel Apply Refresh Help Help Response OK Note that display the names of the cell and sector for which the BS BU is defined and the BS BU IP address x The Cell Name Sector Name and BS BU Address fields are read only fields 2 In the SNMP Poll Interval sec field modify how often the NMS is polling the BS BU 3 In the SNMP Poll Timeout sec field modify the timeout period 4 Modify the text fields identifying the name and location of the system and a contact person Note z When you define a system name for the BS BU that name appears in the BS BU ID x field and the title bar of the BS BU dialog boxes When no system name is entered the IP address of the BS BU appears in the BS BU ID field and the title bar of the BS BU dialog boxes 5 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the BS BU from the dropdown list 4 36 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management 6 In the Clock Source Selection field select the clock selection mode Manual or Automatic from the dropdown list When the clock selection mode is Automatic the clock source is selected by the Base Station 7 When you select Manual as the clock selection mode select a clock
141. S BUs When WALKnet is started or restarted all BS BUs are by default enabled and included in the collection process The specified parameters are applied during the next collection cycle the start time for the next cycle is indicated in the Next Cycle Start field 8 36 WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection To run the collection process mid cycle click Collect The Collect button is only enabled if you are an administrator and authorized to work in Server mode WALKnet begins a collection cycle and the following indications occur in the Performance Data Collection dialog box The Operational Mode is automatically switched from Client to Server and the Cycle Status is Busy The Previous Cycle Start field becomes Current Cycle Start and displays the start time of the current collection cycle The Collect button becomes Stop enabling you to stop the collection process at any time When you click the Stop button the collection process is stopped and WALKnet does not collect any more data even at the next configured cycle start time until the Collect button is activated once more The progress of the cycle is indicated in the Cycle Progress bar and in the status bar in the Performance Data Collection dialog box The status bar displays various messages including cycle start and end and collection errors such as BS BU timeouts and database errors FThe LED to the left of each BS BU in the APM and V
142. S BUs if required Note administrative status of the BS BU and then enable it again See Modifying BS BU x The selected frequency does not appear in the Selected field until you disable the Properties on page 4 35 4 Click OK when you have completed the sector frequency assignment for the sector WALKair 3000 Frequency Planning This section describes frequency planning for the sectors containing WALKair 1000 and WALKair 3000 Shelf and Stand Alone BS BUs gt To assign WALKair 1000 and WALKair 3000 BS BU frequencies 1 Open the Sector Frequency Planning dialog box as follows In Sector View select Frequencies from the Sector menu In the Main window select Frequencies from the Configuration menu or click Sector Frequency in the toolbar Browse to the required sector in the Browse Sector dialog box and click OK The Sector Frequency Planning Dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 79 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 44 Sector Frequency Planning for the W3000 6 ports IF MUX sector example NewSector2 Sector Frequency Planning Ee xi Settings Location p BS BU Frequency Assigment B Cell Name SERVER BS BU ID Band MHz Channel in use Select Channel Sector Name News ector2 i a m1m Bu 14 jeus t lt C tsSCSOI 3 f51 Shelf Name WK Shelf BU 4 14 37 53 IF MUX Number fT k 1 ika RFU Type RFU TYPE 1 Freque
143. S name BU Slot 2 TS CID 100 4 12 4 WALKnet User s Manual Alarm Browser Windows Figure 12 2 WALKair Alarms History Window WALKair Alarms History iof x Actions Trap file name D ZWALKNet Trap 02_03_2004 trap WALKair Alarms History List Ack Severity Date Time Source Device Status Message B 02 03 2004 10 26 52 10 0 15 241 w3000 OFF All TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 26 52 10 0 15 241 3000 ON Most TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 26 55 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 02 03 2004 10 26 56 10 0 15 241 3000 ON E1 Interface is Changed E1 LOSS SIG Port no 5 TS BS slot 2 BS ne 02 03 2004 10 27 12 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 OFF TS Radio Link LOSS TS CID 1003 BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 27 12 10 0 15 241 w3000 OFF Most TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 02 03 2004 10 27 15 10 0 15 241 Ww3000 ON Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 02 03 2004 10 27 18 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Telecom Interface is Changed Ethernet Port 1 is Down TS BS slot 2 02 03 2004 10 27 41 10 0 15 90 Ww3000 ON IFU Connection is Lost BS on slot 11 BS name 1 02 03 2004 10 28 08 10 0 15 90 Ww3000 OFF IFU Connection is Found BS on slot 11 BS name 1 ii 02703 2004 10 29 16 10 0 15 241 w3000 ON Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU
144. Sector Configuration Wizard guides you through the W3K Sector definition by setting all necessary parameters The wizard contains two screens The W3K Shelf Properties screen and the W3K IF MUX Properties screen To run the wizard select Sector Configuration Wizard from the Sector menu in Sector View WALKnet User s Manual 4 15 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Editing a Shelf Editing shelf properties enables you to define and modify the shelf IP address and SNMP configuration parameters gt To edit shelf 1 Open the Shelf Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In Sector View by selecting Sector Configuration Wizard from the Sector menu In Sector View by selecting Edit Shelf from the Sector menu The Shelf Properties Edit dialog box is displayed as shown in one of the two windows below depending on how it was accessed Figure 4 12 Shelf Properties Edit Dialog Box Shelf Properties Edit of x Location ll gt y zs Cell Name NewCen Sector Name News ector2 Shl Pt IP Address 10 0 15 90 10 0 15 90 Shelf x SNMP Poll Interval sec fao SNMP Poll Timeout sec eo wj Shelf Properties Edit ioj xi Location n BS Cell Name NewCell Sector Name NewSector2 Shel spt _ O IP Address 10 0 15 90 410 0 15 90 Shelf gt SNMP Poll Interval sec EJ SNMP Poll Timeout sec Jeo If this dialo
145. Sector menu The RFU amp Antenna dialog box is displayed The figure below shows the dialog box for a Shelf the second figure below shows the dialog box for a Stand Alone BS BU Figure 4 49 Sector RFU and Antenna Dialog Box for sector served by W3000 Shelf NewSector2 RFU amp Antenna BEE Location Antenna 1 B Cell Name Newt t C s S Type oner titi s S yi Sector Name NewSecto2 CS Altitude m js ti SCS poet She Sector Type A RA aA oa _aA_ a i IF MUX Number JFMUXO Redundancy Disabled x RFU Type a xj Selection Mode Manual K RFU A H W Rev D tive RFU RUA o RFU B H W Rev Oper Status Dom x RFU A IF Cable FFUB F Cbe Type Dre l e Dne Length jo CS Lent ooo Measurement Units Moo Measurement Units Moo w Gain Valid vaid m Ganvaid Faa O Tx Gain dB 200000 TaGan d 2000 y Rix Gain dB 1 00000 Gain dB 0000 SY a Cancel Refresh Show Status Hel Response OK elp WALKnet User s Manual 4 87 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 50 Sector RFU and Antenna Dialog Box for sector served by WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU BUSA RFU amp Antenna ee lol x B Location Anena eae Type Other Cell Name NewCelt T z Altitude m 25 Sector Name JBUSA OBE Redundancy Disabled lof RFU Type 26Etsi xj Selection Mode
146. Standby Software Version 1 00 Vers 1 01 Card Info _ _______________ _ Hardware Rerevision oo 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Close Refresh Reset Switchover Help Q Response OK Description The read only parameters displayed in the TS Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which the TS has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which the TS has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The name of the Shelf for which the TS has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the carrier index of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box 10 36 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management TS ID The TS system name if defined or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS The system name is defined in the TS Properties Edit dialog box Current Software area Version The current version Description The description of the current version Stand By Software area Version The current standby version Description The description of the current standby version Card Info area HW Revision The hardware version of a card gt To switch between current and backup software versions In the TS Versions and Reset
147. Station BU View from the Performance menu select Frame relay The Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 19 Frame Relay Signaling Statistics Dialog Box WALKNet 10 10 3 69 BS BU Frame Relay Signaling Statistics Location Interval az Cell Name JintegrationCell Duration minutes 5 Sector Name Jintegs ector Apply BS BU ID 10 10 23 69 Browse Polling Time Apr 24 15 15 39 Previous Next Pot URelEnors u PiotEnors Uinactive N RelEnors N PiotEnors N imactive 0 0 0 0 0 BS Port 1 0 T5 12 Port 1 D 0 0 0 0 0 ftsi2rot3_ fo fo fff E rs rs ee ae Chose Get Data Reset Counters Save Help Notes x The Polling Time information displays the last time that WALKnet polled the selected device 8 40 WALKnet User s Manual Frame Relay Statistics 2 Specify how often WALKnet polls the selected device in the Duration minutes field and click Apply You can specify between 5 and 60 minutes Notes y WALKnet stores data in a cyclic buffer in its database for up to 96 intervals whatever length the interval 3 Click Get Data The Get Data button becomes a Stop button and WALKnet polls the selected device at the specified intervals displaying the collected data for each Frame Relay port on the selected device When the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box is accessed for a BS BU statistics relating to the Fr
148. T391 The FR Port is already used by another service Internal device problem WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages Frame Relay Port Configuration Delete Port Error Type 530 531 Description There are DLCI s defined on this FR Logical Port Internal device problem Add Frame Relay Service Error Type 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 Description Internal device problem DLCI Value must be in range 16 to 991 If the Signaling protocol is LMI the range must be 16 to 1007 Wrong CIR BE or BC value must be in range 0 to Max Bandwidth Inconsistency between CIR and BC values Connection already exists No LPort is Defined on the selected port Invalid total Bandwidth on port total Bandwidth on port should not be greater than 32 64 time slots for 2 Mbps 4 Mbps card types correspondingly Check CIR setting The LPort on TS side is participating in another FR Connection No more than 30 DLCIs are allowed on TS LPort Invalid Telecom Port Configuration WALKnet User s Manual C 11 Appendix C 6110 6111 6112 6113 6114 6115 6116 AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable The Telecom Interface has to be enabled first AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable The Telecom Interface on TS side does not support 4 Mbps bandwidth AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable S CIR Exceeds either BS or TS Port Physical R
149. TN over V5 fio fi fio T510 2 fio i Unblocked PSTN over V5 w Hil ill WT IV Filter the Subscribers Display Chose Apel Refresh Heb Response OK The V5 Subscribers dialog box displays the V5 subscribers defined on the selected BS BU and TS BUs registered to the BS BU Notes displays the V5 subscribers defined on the current TS BU and the BS BU to which it is A When the V5 Subscribers dialog box is accessed from Terminal Station BU View it connected registered 7 20 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration Location area Cell Name Sector Name BS BU ID TS BU ID The V5 Subscribers dialog box includes the following read only fields The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is specified in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box This field is only present when the V5 Interfaces dialog box is accessed from Terminal Station BU View List of V5 Subscribers User ID BS V5 Interface BS V5 EF L3 Address TS Customer Id TS V5 Interface TS V5 EF L3 Address TS E1 Chann
150. U View is accessed in one of the following ways a In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking an IFU image a By selecting IF Unit from the Element menu in Sector View and then selecting Properties a By selecting an IFU in Shelf View Then selecting IF Unit from the Chassis Element menu and then selecting Properties The IFU Unit Properties dialog box for the selected IFU is displayed 5 32 WALKnet User s Manual Intermediate Frequency Unit IFU Management Figure 5 11 IFU Unit Properties Dialog Box W3K Shelf IF Unit Properties Oy x Location az Cell Name SERVER Sector Name NewSector2 Shelf ID WK Shelf IF Unit Number fi Settings Type Single BS BU ID Presentation Bu Oper Status Up IF MUX Setting IF MUX A IF MUX 0 IF MUX B None Active IF MUX IF MUX A Close Refresh Help Response OK IFU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected IF Unit These parameters are read only The following parameters are displayed in IFU View dialog box Location area Cell Name Sector Name Shelf ID IFU Number Settings area Type BU ID Oper Status The name of the cell for which this IFU has been defined The name of the sector for which this IFU has been defined The name of the shelf for which this IFU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only The IF
151. U dialog box and click OK The Configuration Load dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 10 19 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 11 Configuration Load Dialog Box 10 10 3 69 Configuration Load ol x File Edit Location r Settings AA _ AAA Cell Name IntegrationCel Software Version Jo4 80 Sector Name Jintegs ector Oper Status Connected BS BU ID 7010369 Admin Status Enabled Load Action None Browse Load Status None Configurations Name Description Date asd new 22 03 2001 11 16 03 Upload Download Reset Chose Refresh Heb The read only parameters displayed in the Configuration Load dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Settings area Software Version The software version of the BS BU Oper Status The operational status of the BS BU Connected or Disconnected 10 20 WALKnet User s Manual Configuration Upload and Download Admin Status The administrative status of the BS BU Enabled or Disabled Load Action The load action currently being performed or when no load action is in progress
152. Unit s number Type of IFU Single or Two If Mux connectivity The BU ID of the W3000 BS BU linked to current IF Unit Current card status Up Down Test Read only WALKnet User s Manual 5 33 Chapter 5 Shelf Management 5 34 Redundant BU Slot Number If area If MUX A If MUX B Active If MUX Indicates the slot number of the standby card None indicates that a redundant card is not defined Read write if Redundancy is enabled Indicates the number of the If Mux A connected to this IFU Indicates the number of the If Mux B connected to this IFU Displays the currently active If Mux number WALKnet User s Manual Power Supply Unit PSU Management Power Supply Unit PSU Management Displaying PSU Edit Properties The PSU Properties dialog box enables you to examine and configure the parameters of the PSU gt To access PSU Properties The PSU Properties dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways a In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking a PSU image a By selecting a PSU in Sector View Then selecting Power Supply Unit from the Element menu and then selecting Properties a By selecting a PSU in Shelf View Then selecting Power Supply Unit from the Chassis Element menu and then selecting Properties The PSU Properties dialog box for the selected PSU is displayed Figure 5 12 PSU Properties Dialog Box W3K Shelf PSU Properties Ioj x Locati
153. Up Down Test The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card healthiness in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical The serial number of the W3000 BS BU The card vendor Id RF channel that indicates the frequency currently used for transmission The frequency currently selected for transmission This RF channel will becomes active after the next reset At W3000 BS BU reset Active RF channel is set to Configured Indicates the NIU number for ATM backbone con nection of the W3000 BS BU used for creating IP services Indicates the NIU number for ATM E1 backbone connection of the W3000 BS BU used for creating TDM services Indicates the number of the first IF MUX connected to this W3000 BS BU Indicates the number of the second IF MUX con nected to this W3000 BS BU Displays currently active IF MUX WALKnet User s Manual 4 43 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Modulation Indicates if Modem Modulation Mode is selected Change automatically by BS BU Enable or is manually defined Disable Actual IP The actual IP Mode is either Basic Layer 3 or Bridg Mode ing Layer 2 Configured IP The configured IP Mode is either Basic Layer 3 or Mode Bridging Layer 2 Detected Card Type area Detected The auto detected card type Also indicates if a card Card Type is inserted in the slot Redundancy area Redundancy Indicates if redundancy is enabled for this
154. Uplink Minimal Signal to Noise Ratio The estimated minimum SNR measured by the TS BU s modem or the BS BU s modem in dB DL UL SNR MAX _ Downlink Uplink Maximal Signal to Noise Ratio The estimated maximum SNR measured by the TS BU s modem or the BS BU s modem in dB DL UL SNR AVG Downlink Uplink Average Signal to Noise Ratio The estimated average SNR measured by the TS BU s modem or the BS BU s modem in dB DL UL SIG MIN Downlink Uplink Minimal Received Signal Level The minimum signal level received at the antenna port of the TS BU s RF Unit or the BS BU s RF Unit in dBm DL UL SIG MAX Downlink Uplink Maximal Received Signal Level The maximum signal level received at the antenna port of the TS BU s RF Unit or the BS BU s RF Unit in dBm 8 8 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring DL UL SIG AVG UL TX SIGMIN UL TX SIG MAX UL TX SIGAVG AFC MIN AFC MAX DL UL FER Downlink Uplink Average Received Signal Level The average signal level received at the antenna port of the TS BU s RF Unit or the BS BU s RF Unit in dBm Uplink Minimal Transmit Signal Level Theminimum transmitted signal level at the antenna port of the TS BU s RF Unit in dBm Uplink Maximal Transmit Signal Level The maximum transmitted signal level at the antenna port of the TS BU s RF Unit in dBm Uplink Average Transmit Signal Level The average transmitted signal level at the antenna port of the TS BU s
155. W3000 Status BS BU normally working For a standby card this parameter is irrelevant Stand By Indicates if the board is a standby device Status Redundant Indicates the slot number of the Stand by W3000 BS BU Slot BS BU for this card None indicates that redundant Number card is not defined If the card is a standby card this parameter is irrelevant Port area Port Type The type of the port Speed The data transfer rate in Kbps Port Oper The operational status of the port up or down Status Port Admin The administrative status of the port Enabled or Status Disabled From BS BU View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another W3000 BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 a Edit W3000 BS BU properties see page 4 46 a Access the Terminal Stations registered to this W3000 BS BU see page 4 66 a Edit the configuration of an onboard Ethernet port see below 4 44 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management a Manage Software Versions and Reset see below Accessing Onboard Ethernet Port Configuration Onboard Ethernet port configuration parameters may be accessed through the BS BU Ethernet Properties dialog For details see Telecom Ports Configuration in Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Accessing Software Versions and Reset Management For a detailed description of Software Versions and Re
156. WALKair Alarms Monitor window In the WALKnet Map main window from the Fault menu select WALKair Alarms Monitor from the list gt To open the WALKair Alarms History window In the WALKnet Map main window from the Fault menu select WALKair Alarms History from the list WALKnet User s Manual 12 5 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser WALKair Alarms Lists Both the WALKair Alarms Monitor window and WALKair Alarms History window contain a WALKair alarms list that includes the following columns Column Ack Severity Date Time Source Device Status Message Meaning Acknowledge Check this check box to indicate that the alarm has been dealt with Indicates the severity of the alarm Alarm severities are listed later in this section see Alarm Severity Levels Display on page 12 6 Indicates the Date and Time when the alarm was sent The IP Address of the unit where the alarm originated The type of the device in which the alarm originated WALKair 1000 or WALKair 3000 Indicates whether the alarm is active ON or has been cleared OFF Description of the initiated alarm Alarm Severity Levels Display WALKnet s Alarms Browser displays alarm severity levels according to the following color codes Alarm Critical Major Minor Normal Warning Color Red Orange Yellow White White 12 6 WALKnet User s Manual Alarm Browser Windows Alarm Browser Buttons
157. a If the current alarm is an OFF type alarm the existing ON type alarm as well as all the alarms correlated under it is acknowledged within the OV Alarm Browser a All acknowledged alarms regardless of how they were acknowledged either automatically or manually are removed from the alarm collection If no alarm object of the same type and source is found in the alarm collection a new object is created for the ON type alarm only Each of the objects within the alarm collection represents an existing problem with the corresponding BU If a problem arises the alarm comes to the OV Event Subsystem and is visualized by means of an alarm object If subsequent alarms reporting the same problem arrive from the same source they are only correlated under the existing alarm in the Alarm Browser and no new alarm objects are created within the alarm collection If the problem is solved an OFF type alarm is sent to the OV Event Subsystem causing automatic acknowledgment of the corresponding ON type alarms Each alarm object that is in the alarm collection is colored according to the status of the alarm that came with the trap data This color is carried over to the parent object via the standard status propagation mechanism provided by the NNM Thus the status of an alarm is propagated to the alarm collection and subsequently to the parent BU object The final status and color of the BU object depends on the status propagation policy the current N
158. a row in the ArpTable and click Delete Rows to delete the selected row from the table WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Click Delete Table to delete the entire displayed ARP LAN Table QBRI Port Configuration Parameters The QBRI port can only be configured on a TS BU The Port Configuration dialog box for a QBRI configured port type is shown below Figure 6 7 QBRI Port Configuration Dialog Box Location A a N az Cell Name Newell tt i lt s S Sector Name NewSectol CS BS BU ID ReseveProbT TS BU ID Number 33 Port Poi U Interface Settings a a a i ima ia i i i i i i Select U interface fi yi Loopback Mode None x Operational Status Down Power Feeding Off x Admin Status Disable x ox Cancel Apply Refresh Help Port Settings Help Response OK The following configuration parameters are for a QBRI configured port type Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is def
159. abase 2 In the Select Intervals area select the time period for which you want to view data collected for the selected link 3 Click OK All the data saved in the database for the selected link during the selected time period is displayed The following example shows the data displayed for a TS BU selected in the V5 tab WALKnet User s Manual 8 31 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8 14 Generated Data File El Microsoft Excel 10 0 8 201_17_2 csd File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help OSHA SRY BBS O o r eAA MQ vv E MNSC NCE 11 28 01 12 28 11 28 01 12 43 11 28 01 12 58 11 28 01 13 13 11 28 01 13 28 11 28 01 13 43 11 28 01 13 58 11 28 01 14 13 11 28 01 14 28 11 28 01 14 43 11 28 01 14 58 11 28 01 15 13 11 28 01 15 28 ooo000c7 coc ce 000 0 8 ojoio oioolo ool oo o o ooo0occc0c0c 0c 000 cdo ooo0o00c0cc0c 0c 00000 ooo0009c7 9c 9c0 00000 oo0occcc0c 0c c 0 000 ooo0occ0c0c0ce0c000 0 NUM SCRL Filtering the Display of BS BUs In the Performance Data Collection dialog box you can display all BS BUs defined on the current map or filter the display to show only selected BS BUs or only the BS BUs enabled for collection described in Configuring Performance Data Collection on page 8 35 Filtering the display of BS BUs is accomplished per tab or per type of data This means that any filtering applied in the APM tab is
160. access HSC View HSC View can be accessed in one of the following ways In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking an HSC node In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking an HSC Card Select an HSC Card in Sector View Select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then select View Select an HSC Card in Shelf View Select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then select View The HSC View screen for the selected HSC is displayed WALKnet User s Manual Hot Swap Controller Management Figure 5 1 HSC View Dialog Box HSC card HSC View lolx HSC Location r Settings Cell Name W3K_Cell Serial Number 4970134 Shelf ID Shei NMS PCI Bridge Bus Number f HSC ID JHSC card HW Revision 05A Slot Number E Browse Card Type Detected Type HSC Status Bridge Connection Connected Peera Dper Status up Redundancy Status Disabled Admin Status Enable Stand By Status in Service Fault Status N o Faults Redundant HSC Slot Number None Close Refresh Help Response OK HSC View displays the configuration parameters of the selected HSC Card The parameters are read only To modify the configuration parameters refer to Modifying HSC Properties on page 5 5 The following parameters are displayed in HSC View Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this HSC has been d
161. ace has no assigned service provider address this is an octet string of zero length The Address length implies the address type no address 0 octets E 164 8 octets or NSAP 20 octets When subaddresses are used the address may represent concatenation of address and subad dress E 164_E 164 16 octets E 164 NSAP 28 octets or NSAP_NSAP 40 octets Other address lengths imply address types defined elsewhere The primary address assigned for administrative purposes for example an address associated with the service provider side of a public network UNI thus the value of this address corresponds with the value of ifPhysAddress at the host side If this interface has no assigned administrative address or when the address used for administrative purposes is the same as that used for ifPhysAddress then this is an octet string of zero length Read only WALKnet User s Manual 6 33 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration 6 34 ATM UNI Specifies the type of ATM cell layer interface Interface defined on the physical path termination point mod Type eled by this entry in the interface table None uni bici or bissi The default value of this field is None E3 Port Settings area Medium Type The variety of DS3 C bit or E3 application imple menting this interface The type of interface affects the interpretation of the usage and error statistics The rate of DS3 is 44 736 Mbps and E3 is 34 368 Mbps The dsx3ClearCha
162. aces Configuration cceeceeeeeeeereeeeeeeees 6 37 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKair 1000 License Management csssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee 7 2 WALKair 1000 Leased Line Service Management 0eeeeeeeeeees 7 4 Adding Leased Line Services cccecccreeesseececeeeeeeeeeeseeeneneeeeees 7 6 Editing Leased Line Services cs cccceceeeeesesseeeeeneeeenteeseeenneeeeees 7 9 Deleting Leased Line Services 2 ccceeeeeeeeseecneeeeeeeeeeeseees 7 10 WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration cccecceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenens 7 11 V5 Interface Configuration ccssaecetecccscavet cence scceanlegacsceccnceonnadeesnaedebes 7 12 WW SUS CRISIS custas tetcteetmeastascucrencuacitsetsescberaten Sale cecdesatiasundantnaenty 7 19 V5 Global Parameters cisencticdet checcsnec rade cect aaee aide aeeeniadeearnecds 7 25 WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration 7 26 Frame Relay Overview sssssssssrrrrrseerrrrrnnuneernrnnnanseseterenneeeseeeenss 7 26 Ethernet Overview ssssssessersrrrrntnrersrnnnnnnnunnunnanannuntttennanaeeeceeenana 7 26 Configuring Frame Relay and Ethernet cceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 26 Frame Relay Logical Port Configuration ccceseeeeeeeeeeeennneees 7 27 Frame Relay Ethernet Service Configuration ceceeeeeeees 7 34 WALKair 3000 Client Management cccccesseeee
163. ame location textual identification of the contact person together with the information on how to contact this person and so on WALKair 3000 system supports a maximum of 4000 clients The user can define up to 64 clients on a single TS Each client belongs to a specific TS You can configure the client details and change the client services via the Client List dialog box gt To access the Client List dialog box The Client list dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways Shelf BS BU or Stand Alone BS BU In the Main window select Clients and Services from the W3000 Services submenu of the Configuration menu Browse to the required shelf or Stand Alone BS BU in the Browse Shelf dialog box and click OK Shelf BS BU only In Sector View select Clients and Services from the Services submenu of the Shelf menu Shelf BS BU only In Shelf View select Clients and Services from the Services menu Stand Alone BS BU only In BS BU View select Clients and Services from the Services menu The Client List dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 47 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 28 Client List Dialog Box NMS MPU new Client List SS o x Clients Client Location B Client Name fF Cell Name NewCelt Shelf ID JNMS MPU new Browse 5 F Admin Tere CC e E AAA a a TS 45 Yes Y BU Slot 5 Yes Disable Chose Find Service Refresh
164. ame Relay ports on the BS BU itself and all its registered TS BUs are displayed When the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box is accessed for a TS BU only statistics relating to the Frame Relay ports on the TS BU itself are displayed WALKnet User s Manual 8 41 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring For each Frame Relay port the following statistics are displayed U Rel Errors User side Link Reliability Error The number of user side local in channel signaling link reliability errors meaning non receipt of Status Status Enquiry messages or invalid sequence numbers in a Link Integrity Verification Information Element U Prot Errors User side protocol Error The number of user side local in channel signaling protocol errors meaning protocol discriminator message type call reference and mandatory information element errors U Inactive Channel Inactive The number of times the user side channel was declared inactive meaning N392 errors in N393 events N Rel Errors Network Side Protocol Error The number of network side local in channel signaling links reliability errors meaning non receipt of Status Status Enquiry messages or invalid sequence numbers in a Link Integrity Verification Information Element This counter is not displayed when the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box is accessed for a TS BU N Prot Errors Network Side Protocol Error The number of network side local in channel signaling protoc
165. ameters specify details about the antenna RFU and cables for each BS BU and TS BU WALKair 1000 RFU and Antenna Configuration from Sector View gt 4 82 All BS BUs in a sector are connected to a single RFU and antenna and most of their RFU and antenna parameters must therefore be the same Thus you configure the RFU and antenna parameters for the sector save them to the WALKnet database and then broadcast them to all or selected BS BUs in the sector You can view the status of the communication with all the BS BUs ina sector in order to see whether the broadcast was successful Once you have broadcast the RFU and antenna parameters to a BS BU ina sector you can view the RFU and antenna parameters on the individual BS BU and configure the current and default modem working point parameters which are specific for each BS BU The RFU and antenna parameters are configured for each individual TS BU To configure WALKair 1000 RFU and antenna parameters 1 In Sector View select RFU and Antenna from the Sector menu The RFU amp Antenna dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual Configuring the RFU and Antenna Figure 4 45 Sector RFU and Antenna Dialog Box for WALKair 1000 sector IntegSector RFU amp Antenna olx Location Antenna B Cell Name IntegrationCell Type Ferca Sector Name JintegSectr Cts Altitude m S Sector Type Redundancy Disabled ee Type g 5GHz Type A xj Selectio
166. an Enabled Service over this port 112 If the Port type is Ethernet you cannot change its type if there are DLCIs defined on this port 113 If the Port type is changed to Ethernet you will be unable to create FR LPort over Ethernet E1 Port Configuration Error Type Description 120 Change of port AdminStatus from Enable to Disable is allowed only if Service over this port is Disabled 121 Incorrect physical configuration parameters Verify consistence of E1SignallingMode and E1LineType setting 122 Incorrect Loopback Mode Only the following modes are valid none local remote and payload 123 Internal device problem C 4 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages V35 X21 Port Configuration Error Type 130 131 132 133 134 Description Change of port AdminStatus from Enable to Disable is allowed only if Service over this port if exists is Disabled Incorrect Loopback Mode Only the following modes are valid none local remote and payload Change of port AdminStatus to Disable is allowed only if Service over this port is Disabled Incorrect configuration of port parameters Verify consistence of Interface Protocol DataRate OperatingMode TimingMode ClockMode and RxClockMode values Internal device problem Ethernet Port Configuration Error Type 140 141 Description Change of port AdminStatus to Disable is allowed only if Service over this port is
167. ance Monitoring See Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring for details a Manage software versions and reset management See Versions and Reset Management in Chapter 10 Utilities for details Deleting and Editing TSs TSs can be deleted from a BS BU or their properties can be modified Deleting TSs Deleting TSs from a sector permanently removes the TS and all its components from the BS BU gt To delete a TS In the Registered Terminals dialog box select a line in the terminals table and select Delete from the Terminal menu Modifying TS Properties You can modify the properties of the TS from the Registered Terminals dialog box or TS View gt To modify TS properties a In the Registered Terminals dialog box select a line in the terminals table and select Edit from the Terminal menu E In TS View select Edit from the Terminal menu The TS Properties Edit dialog box is displayed 4 74 WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 42 TS Properties Edit Dialog Box yxTarget BU Slot 5 ERT211 Terminal Properties Edit Location HA AO9oo __ii_ O_ i i iii B Cell Name Ce1332 Sector Name EN Shelf ID vT arget BS BU ID Jeu Slot 5 Terminal Station Index J 1 Customer ID fi 23 Modem Modulation Aa apa ap a piaia j ja ia i ia Actual Up laosk Actual Down Jak Recommended apsk ti i S S gt Terminal ANN
168. and Reset Management The read only parameters displayed in the MPU Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name Sector Name MPU ID The name of the cell for which the MPU has been defined The name of the sector for which the MPU has been defined The system name if defined for the MPU or when no system name is defined the slot number The system name is defined in the MPU Properties Edit dialog box Current Software area Version Description The active software version The description of the active software Stand By Software area Version Description Card Info area HW Revision Vendor ID The current standby version The description of the current standby version The hardware version of a card The card vendor ID gt To switch between current and backup software versions In the MPU Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Switchover WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically resets the MPU WALKnet User s Manual 10 39 Chapter 10 Utilities IF MUX Software Versions Shelf only WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located in the IF MUXs You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time gt To view software versions on an IF MUX In the WALKnet Main Window select Versions from the Utility menu Then select W3000 Components
169. anual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration Figure 7 24 Global Parameters Dialog Box 10 0 1 82 Global Parameters 10 0 1 82 2 Click Edit Notes When Edit is not clicked the parameters are read only and their values are automatically refreshed When Edit is clicked the parameters can be modified and automatic refresh is disabled 3 Select the Enable Quality Of Service checkbox to enable QoS The remaining parameters become enabled 4 Select the Ethernet card Working Mode from the drop down list either Layer 2 or Layer 3 5 Enter values in the DiffServ Code Points area to determine the DiffServer Code Points for high medium low and best effort priority traffic You can enter a single number multiple single numbers separated by a comma a range of numbers for example 1 64 or a combination of these WALKnet User s Manual 7 41 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 6 In the Max Packet Size For High Priority Traffic field enter the maximum packet size 64 to 1500 permitted for high priority traffic 7 In the Max Packet Size For Medium Priority Traffic field enter the maximum packet size 64 to 1500 permitted for medium priority traffic 8 Click OK to apply the global QoS parameters Service QoS Parameters gt 7 42 WALKnet enables you to define QoS parameters for individual Frame Relay Ethernet services To configure service QoS parameters 1 In the Fram
170. anual WALKair 3000 Service Management Figure 7 48 Add TDM Service Properties Edit W3000 Stand Alone BS BU BSBU_SOLO Add TDM Service E 5 x B Location 1 TDM Service A____ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ Newt Bo TS EY CellName NewCell TDM SLA ID 2 Sie Ae as Sector NewSector3_1 TDM SLA Name saz Line Type Framed No CRC re it fi Client Bandwidth fi Frat chengal x Client Name aaa BS BU SA E1 Status Location Lab E1 port E Admin Status Enable x BS BU ID BSBU_SOLO Line Type Framed No CRC rae First Channel E a N ee TS ID ts 1 OK Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Q 3 In the TDM Service area Select the TDM SLA ID for the new service from the dropdown list in the TDM SLA ID field Information describing the selected TDM SLA is automatically displayed in the read only fields Select the First Channel for the new TDM service from the dropdown list in the First Channel field Select the Bandwidth for the new TDM Service using the arrows in the Bandwidth field 4 In the Status area Select the administrative status for the new service from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field Notes The First Channel and Bandwidth fields are read only when the Line Type of the E E1 Port is Unframed WALKnet User s Manual 7 89 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration
171. are gt To install WALKnet 1 Log on to Your UNIX Machine with root privileges and copy the following WALKnet files to a temporary directory e g home tmp wlkntfl zip readme txt 2 Navigate to the temporary directory and unzip the wlkntfl zip file 3 On the Unix terminal verify you current User and Environment 4 For HP Open View Integration only otherwise proceed to the next step modify your environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH according to the following format gt source lt Hpov_root gt OV bin ov envvars csh where lt Hpov root gt is the directory where HP Open View is installed gt setenv LD_LIBRARY_PATH OV_LIB 1 8 WALKnet User s Manual Installing WALKnet Following is an example screen Figure 1 1 LD_LIBRARY_PATH Environment Variable Window Edit Options Help more login banner SES to root floware set A PS1 PWD gt ce opt ov bin ou envvars cs ny tb gt LIBRARY PATH opt or setenv PATH PATH usr local netscape setenv ORACLE_SID walknet seteny ORACLE_BASE Zopt aracle oracteot app oracte seteny ORACLE_HOME ORACLE_BASE product s 1 Note It is recommended to put those variables in the cshrc file for C shell users or i login profile for other shell users 5 Check that the variables have been modified An example screen is shown below Figure 1 2 Variable Update Check p Terminal Y Window Edit Options Help
172. area within a city The use of a background image helps with orientation but is not required to create a map The cell icons representing the WALKair cells may be randomly arranged on the gray default background or specifically positioned on the background image showing the actual location within a city area Cell icon positions are always displayed in the last saved location in the map Maps including the configuration of the WALKair system are saved in map files in the WALKnet database Creating Map Background Images gt A map background can be any image saved in GIF format Background image files are saved in the WALKnet Maps folder in order to be immediately accessible when creating a new map See Creating a New Map on page 3 3 To create a map background a Scan an image and save it as a GIF file in the Maps folder located in the WALKnet folder lt root gt WALKnet Maps gif WALKnet User s Manual Creating a New Map Creating a New Map A map is created to represent a specific geographical area The cells for that area can then be defined Defining and configuring cells is described in Chapter 4 Cell Configuration gt To create a new map 1 Create a new map in one of the following ways From the File menu select New Map Click New E in the toolbar Right click in the Workspace and select New Map from the options displayed The Open dialog box is displayed
173. arms for the selected device are displayed 12 20 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Requesting Alarms from a WALKair 1000 BS BU Mixed Sector with WALKair 3000 Shelf gt To request alarms from a WALKair 1000 BS BU Mixed Sector with WALKair 3000 Shelf 1 Access Sector View see Accessing Sector View on page 12 19 Figure 12 9 W1000 W 3000 Shelf Sector View Sector View Iof x Sector Shelf Element Location New Cell Delete Chassis Slot gt Edit Nm S_MPU Sector Fan View SS 10 0 15 59 Power Supply Unit Move Browse JIF MUX 0 Power Input Board IF Unit Get Active Alarms FU ACT mm A CRITICAL m MAJOR m MINOR m io WARNING m ACO m PW RA EXTCLOCK m OD INT CLOCK m F 307 z a O a 3 a Q EEEEEEEE AA l Response OK 2 In Sector View click on the WALKair 1000 BS BU you want to display alarms for 3 From the Element menu select W1000 BS BU Get Active Alarms In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the latest alarms for the selected device are displayed WALKnet User s Manual 12 21 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Requesting Alarms from a WALKair 1000 BS BU Mixed Sector with WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU gt To request alarms from a WALKair 1000 BS BU Mixed Sector with WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU 1 Access Sector View see Accessing Sector View on page
174. ars in the field The E1 interface framing format Unframed Framed No CRC Framed CRC4 Framed CRC4 Ext The E1 loss alarm mode ITUT or ETSI The stan dard used for loss alarm criteria The El signaling mode Transparent CCS or None The type of the loopback applied to the E1 telecom interface None Remote Local Payload or Other The operational status of the Elinterface Up or Down Read only The administrative status of the telecom interface Enabled or Disabled 6 22 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters W3000 ATM NIU STM 1 Ports Configuration on a Shelf STM1 port parameters can be only accessed on the ATM NIU STM1 card The STM1 port is configured using the STM1 Port Properties dialog box To configure Shelf ATM NIU STM1 ports gt In ATM NIU View open the STM 1 Port Properties dialog box in one of the following ways E In the Interface Table double click the STM1 port you want to configure M Inthe Interface Table select the STM1 port you want to configure and then select Edit Port from the Port menu The STM1 Port Properties dialog box is displayed Figure 6 12 Shelf ATM NIU STM1 Port Properties Dialog Box STM_0 STM1 Port Properties ojx Location zs Cell Name NewCent Shelf ID MPU ATM NIU ID JSTM_0 Port Number fi ATM Settings Max number of VPCs fo Medium Type en t lt CSsS Max number of CCs 2048 i Line Type Muti Mod
175. ase Station BU View ProbT BS BU View BS BU Performance Location Cell Name Sector Name BS BU ID Browse Port Jol x Settings NewCell3 Serial Number ani 511 SigiSect Frequency Band F6 ProbT Oper Status connected Admin Status enable Detected Type Configured Type Description Speed Oper Status Admin Status 2048 Kbps t ae EZ FR 2M 5 D 35 21 2Mbps 2048 Kbps Dom Disate Not Installed ET FR Not Installed 2048 Kbps Down Enable eet eo ne Location Mexico WALKeirBU BS3 56 EFjiam 909 Gane Refresh Help Note The LED display at the bottom of Base Station BU View provides a graphical representation of the front panel of the BS BU The LEDs are updated according to the Gen Poll Interval SNMP parameter See Chapter 10 Utilities for details Base Station BU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected BS BU The parameters are read only In order to modify the configuration parameters see Modifying BS BU Properties on page 4 35 The following parameters are displayed in Base Station BU Views Location area Cell Name Sector Name BS BU ID Browse Button Settings area The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address
176. ased line services from the telecom port of a BS BU to the telecom port of TS BUs registered to the BS BU You can configure these services for a TS BU before it is physically located in the WALKair system or when it is disconnected from the BS BU Upon establishing the air link the TS BU receives all its configuration parameters from the BS BU Leased line services are configured from the Leased Line Services dialog box gt To access the Leased Line Services dialog box 1 In Base Station BU View from the BS BU menu select Services then Leased Line Services The Leased Line Services dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 3 Leased Line Services Dialog Box YAELsky Leased Line Services Joj x Leased Line Services Location Cell Name IntegrationCell Sector Name IntegSector Browse BS BU ID JYAELsky Port 3 9 Port 3 Disconnected Disable BS BS Port TS TS Port Bandwidth 3 Er a 1 x2 999 x21 31 7 4 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Leased Line Service Management The Leased Line Services dialog box displays a list of leased line services currently defined on the BS BU It includes the following read only fields Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of t
177. atchO ff ServiceConfigurationO n ServiceConfigurationO ff Send Criterion TS configuration does not match the TS Type BS configuration does not match the BS Type TS configuration match the TS Type BS configuration match the BS Type Illegal service configuration is detected Service configuration was not acked service configuration is OK Service configuration was acked WALKnet User s Manual Sector Traps Sector Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 55 SectorDownOn 56 SectorDownOff Send Criterion Sector A is operationally down Sector B is operationally down Sector A is operationally up Sector B is operationally up WALKnet User s Manual B 17 Appendix B MPU Communication Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 57 connectionToMpuLostOn 58 connectionToMpuLostOn Send Criterion MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU detected NIU connection Error detected BU connection Error detected TS connection Error detected IF MUX connection Error terminated NIU connection Error terminated BU connection Error terminated TS connection Error detected IF MUX connection Error WALKnet User s Manual Shelf Traps Shelf Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 59 BusErrorOn 60 BusErrorOff 61 shelfeCangeOn 62 shelfcCangeOff Send Criterion MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU slot MPU Unit MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU MPU detected TDM bus Error detected P
178. ate Default Gateway IP Address should not be 00 00 00 00 or 255 255 255 255 IP Subnet should not be 00 00 00 00 or 255 255 255 255 Local Router should not be 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask must be continuing 1 and should not be 255 255 255 254 or 255 255 255 255 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages Edit Frame Relay Service Error Type 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 6210 Description AdminStatus should be disabled Inconsistency between CIR and BC values Admin Status cannot be changed to Enable The Telecom Interface on TS side does not support 4 Mbps bandwidth Invalid Telecom Port type AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable The Telecom Interface has to be enabled first AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable S CIR Exceed BS TS Port Physical Rate Default Gateway IP Address should not be 00 00 00 00 or 255 255 255 255 IP Subnet should not be 00 00 00 00 or 255 255 255 255 Local Router should not be 255 255 255 255 Subnet Mask must be continuing 1 and should not be 255 255 255 254 or 255 255 255 255 Internal device problem Frame Relay Service Delete FR Service Error Type 630 Description Admin Status of the Connection must be Disabled WALKnet User s Manual C 13 Appendix C Add Authorized Manager Error Type Description 710 Maximum 10 Managers can be defined 711 I
179. ation tree provides a hierarchical view of the network displaying all the objects defined on the open map Figure 2 3 WALKnet Network Navigation Tree Uf l 5 E eee Australia_1 gp NewCell1 B Shei MPU 7 HIU 12 E1 1 HSC card IFMUX 2 IFMUX 7 BUA BU Red A BU B BU Red B BU 10 5G BU Red 10 5G BU Slot 14 BU Slot 15 WAL Kair3000Shelf NewSector4 W3000Stand AloneBS B 10 0 35 126 199 203 141 251 WALKair1000 10 0 1 82 10 0 1 84 10 0 15 199 10 0 25 205 annaran oe The color of the icon to the left of each element in the Network Navigation Tree reflects the status of the element as follows E Green OK no alarms E Yellow Minor alarm E Red Major alarm a Gray No connection with the device 2 12 WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Main Window Double clicking an element in the Network Navigation tree displays the View window for that element For example double clicking a BS BU displays Base Station BU View for the BS BU Use the Find field to locate an object by its name You can either search all objects in the Network Navigation tree or you can search objects of a specific type Workspace The WALKnet Workspace is the main working area of the WALKnet application It displays maps that specify cell locations Figure 2 4 WALKnet Workspace Map Australia_1 amp
180. ative status of the QPOTS port Enable or Disable The operational status of the QPOTS card The sta tus can be Up Down or Testing reflecting the readi ness of the port to provide a service This parameter is grayed read only and cannot be changed 6 16 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters The configuration parameters for a port are viewed or modified from the Port Configuration dialog box The configuration parameters for a port vary according to the port type W3000 BS BU Interfaces Configuration This section includes W3000 BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration on page 6 18 W3000 E1 Ports Configuration for a Stand Alone BS BU on page 6 21 W3000 ATM NIU STM 1 Ports Configuration on a Shelf on page 6 23 W3000 BS BU 12 x E1 NIU Ports Configuration on a Shelf on page 6 28 W3000 BS BU E3 NIU Ports Configuration on a Shelf on page 6 31 WALKnet User s Manual 6 17 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration W3000 BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration Both W3000 Shelf and W3000 Stand Alone BS BU support the Ethernet port interface gt To configure the Ethernet port on a W3000 BS BU In BS BU View open the BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box in one of the following ways a Double click a line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen a Select a
181. atus Disable cy NVBR VPIAVCI J Oper Status I UBR YPIZCI J i J ok Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Figure 7 45 Add IP Service Dialog Box W3000 Stand Alone BS BU Location zs Cell Name NewCell Sector NewSectorl Client _ Ethernet Client Name ABC Ethemet port es VLAN tagging mod Fassa Location ny ae Local Router IP Addr fo eit lt i BS BU ID 10 0 6 126 DestIPAddrBehindLR 0 0 0 0 TS 1D fst ti CS Subnet Mask Behind LR jo 00 0 Default Router IP Addr fo At oft at IP Service lt _ lt lt lt Subnet Mask fo 000 oe fi x essuvianio ie IP SLA Name stat TS VLAN ID fe CIR jf o E MIR 256 Sats e Admin Status Enable x Class of Service Platinum Oper Status o Cancel Refresh Help Response OK 2 In the IP Service area Select the IP SLA ID for the new service from the dropdown list in the IP SLA ID field Information describing the selected IP SLA is automatically displayed in the related read only fields 7 82 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Service Management Notes Select the committed information rate CIR for the new IP Service using the arrows in the CIR field For a Bronze SLA the CIR must be set to 0 A The CIR cannot exceed the maximum MIR in QAM and QPSK 3 If the system is
182. ault Tools Options Window WALKNet Help Alala Q BI CISCAT X serqeymhpvl400 boz lj4l IGOGO HPVU COXTERML med ru Map Edit View Performance Configuration Fault Tools Options Window WALKNet Help A eal el Ela Q SI l Y 193 124 27 41 L olx XTERM1 mcd ru_Alarms Map Edit View Performance Configuration Fault Tools Options Window WALKNet Help A a ain Pele OQ BI default Read write Auto Layout Overl default Read write Auto Layout Geometry Set default Read write Auto Layout Overlay Off Geometry Set WY WALKnet User s Manual 11 3 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization The alarm collection contains alarms that come from the specific WALKair device Once an alarm comes to the OV Event Subsystem from the BU it is received by the waalertmgr service which is the component of the Integration Pack responsible for events correlation When the waalertmgr service receives an alarm it retrieves the alarm data necessary to make a decision concerning how to handle the alarm The service then looks through the contents of the WALKair element s alarm collection If the same type and source of alarm is found in the alarm collection the following occurs a If the received alarm is an ON type alarm it is correlated under the previous alarm within the OV Alarm Browser No new object is created for such an alarm
183. ave a buAlarmData varbind this value is not used in the label E Trap_name is the alarm s name according to the trap specific number that came with the trap WALKnet User s Manual 11 5 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization You can display additional properties of the alarm object by right clicking the alarm object and then selecting Object Properties from the displayed popup menu The Object Properties dialog box for that alarm is displayed Figure 11 3 Alarm Object Properties Dialog Box Object Properties x Attributes 2 nsoro General Attributes WaALKair Attributes Edit Atiibutes Selection Name for 42443 2762244376 287672 testalarm Set Selection Name Comments Cancel Help Select WALKair Attributes from the Attributes area and click OK An Attributes dialog box with the specific alarm attributes appears as shown in Figure 11 4 11 6 WALKnet User s Manual Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring Figure 11 4 Alarm attributes Attributes for Object 0142443 2762244376 287672 testalarm WALKair Alarm Attributes Trap Specific ReadOnly Trap Name ReadOnly telecomLocalLoopbackOn Alarm Type ReadOnly 1 Alarm Severity ReadOnly Major Alarm State ReadOnly On Alarm Source ReadOnly 1 3 6 1 4 1 Alarm Data ReadOnly Alarm Data Trap Source ReadOnly Trap source Alarm Source IP ReadOnly 193 124 27 230 Alarm Date And Time
184. aving an MPU Configuration on page 5 13 in Chapter 5 Shelf Management Note z The LED display in Shelf View provides a graphical representation of the shelf front panel The LEDs are updated according to the Shelf Poll Interval SNMP parameter Editing Shelf Properties SNMP System Clock Minimum Alarm Severity In Shelf Properties you can set the SNMP configuration set the system clock and set the minimum alarm severity gt To edit shelf properties 1 Open the Shelf Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In Shelf View by selecting Edit Properties from the Shelf menu In Sector View for sectors defined by W3000 6 Ports IF MUX by selecting Edit Properties from the Shelf menu 4 22 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management The Shelf Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 16 Shelf Properties Edit Dialog Box Shelf Properties Edit iof x Location SNMP Configuration Cell Name Newcen SNMP Poll Interval sec 30 SNMP Poll Timeout sec 60 IP Address 10 0 6 220 Minimum Alarm Severity Info Shelf Settings Shelf Name J MPU Contact Person Alvarion ltd Shelf Location Alvarion ktd Admin Status Enable x System Clock Settings eee cn Clock Source Selection J Manual x Clock Output Enable x Clock Source niu Clock Redundancy Enable x Use Internal Clock Enable Cloc
185. ay header field to the end of user data Out Oct Out Octets The number of octets sent by the network 5 egress for this PVC end point This counter should only count octets from the beginning of the Frame Relay header field to the end of user data Click Stop at any time to stop the collection of data From the End Point Traffic Statistics dialog box you can do the following Use the Previous and Next buttons to scroll through the data collected in previous intervals Click Reset Counters to reset the counters for all or selected ports Click Save to save the collected data in an Excel file The full path name of the generated file is NMS_LOG FR lt yy mm dd hh mm gt ftm Set thresholds for counters A counter value is highlighted when it exceeds its threshold This procedure is the same as when setting thresholds for counters in the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box described in Setting Thresholds on page 8 43 Display a Frame Relay end point traffic graph for a selected counter This procedure is the same as when displaying graphs from the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box described in Displaying Signaling Graphs on page 8 44 WALKnet User s Manual 8 49 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring WALKair 3000 IP SLA Performance Monitoring WALKair 3000 provides performance monitoring for IP SLAs for both uplink and downlink directions The downlink parameters refer to measurements a
186. bscriber files containing the default extension sub Filter options provide you with the ability to filter the subscriber display and view only those subscribers with special parameters or all subscribers located on a specified TS BU WALKnet User s Manual 7 19 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration V5 subscribers are defined in the V5 Subscribers dialog box gt To access the V5 Subscribers dialog box The V5 Subscribers dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways E In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View from the BS BU menu select Services then V5 Configuration and then V5 Subscribers a In the Main window from the Configuration menu select Services then V5 Configuration and then V5 Subscribers Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The V5 Subscribers dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 12 V5 Subscribers Dialog Box 10 10 3 57 5 Subscribers _ OF x 5 Subscribers Location Cell Name NorthCell BS BU ID 10 10 357 az Sector Name Scansector BS V5 EF TS V5 EF TSE1 i Lel etc L3 Address ee Id tac L3Address Channel Gelsa gt _ 10 eie nblocked Ga TN over Y5 Bo mo 10 2 Unblocked PSTN over v5 over Y5 E E fee fp rf ii HH i i E 10 k j i Unblocked PSTN over V5 p Ts 10 2 B 6 Unblocked PSTN over V5 ae e a C2 E i i Ts 10 2 a Unblocked PSTN over Y5 fi E Ts 10 2 E Unblocked PS
187. by Alvarion to the folder You can easily identify the National Protocol File It starts with np 9 Restart your PC 10 You can now download the National Protocol File to a WALKair 1000 BS BU that communicates with a POTS interface Proceed to Downloading to Multiple Devices Downloading to Multiple Devices gt To download software to multiple devices 1 In the Main window select Software Download from the Utilities menu and then select Software Download The Software Download dialog box is displayed as shown below if a session is in progress WALKnet User s Manual 10 9 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 7 Software Download Dialog Box WALKNet Software Download K aloj x File Versions Session Description x4 ea Arawn TFTP server IPAddress 1010 15 1100 oS conn Ase amp MY S Target ersion 0S SF TTA Ie SENT GY RASA oee man C7 waka Kver Browse i ps ee VY I w ux o BMY amp watkair W P pusiot 4 M amp watkair 1000 e P su stot s V O Bs Bu 8S_0600 519 Z P sustot 41 M 2 TS BU TS_0600 s19 e ReserveProb W E FRET FR_0600 519 e o sm W OBR oB 0600 819 Ts 10 Ve rsa e E amp watkair 3000 sysna NewSectort a MS cena MV Downoad Switch over tJ E Wewsectort F Delayed F Delayed BY 10 0 1 82 fiarierano2 Po2sotePM 1071672002 023016 eM Vio tsn M tsn Download Concurrency 5 a Set V Open Log M gt tsa me nm j Notes
188. card as a clock provider Actual This parameter represents the actual status of the ATM NIU card as a clock provider Redundancy area Redundancy Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this Status card Enabled Disabled Stand By Indicates whether the board is a standby device Status Read only Redundant Indicates the slot number of the standby card ATM NIU None indicates that a redundant card is not Slot Number defined Interface list at bottom of dialog Onboard ATM Ports Configuration parameters Read only Port Type Can be E3 or STM1 Speed The data transfer rate in Kbps Port Oper The operational status of the telecom interfaces Status up or down From ATM NIU View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another ATM NIU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 E Edit properties see Modifying NIU Properties on page 5 28 a Edit onboard ports properties see Configuring ATM or E1 or E3 Interfaces on page 5 31 a Manage software versions resets see Accessing Software Reset Management on page 5 31 WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management Displaying 12xE1 NIU View 12xE1 NIU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the 12xE1 NIU gt To access 12xE1 NIU View 12xE1 View can be accessed in one of the following ways In the Navigation Tree by double cl
189. card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Read only Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable Read write f The Cell Name and Shelf ID fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and shelf for which the HSC is defined Note When you define a system name for the HSC that name appears in the HSC ID field and the title bar of the HSC dialog screens When no system name is entered HSC Slot Number is used to identify the HSC Moving HSC Slot Positions HSCs like all other cards can be moved from one slot to another For detailed description of moving HSCs refer to Chapter 4 Cell Configuration WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 5 Shelf Management Main Processing Unit MPU Management Displaying MPU View MPU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the MPU gt To access MPU View MPU View can be accessed in one of the following ways a In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking an MPU node a In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking an MPU Card a By selecting an MPU Card in Sector View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then selecting View a By selecting an MPU Card in Shelf View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then selecting View The MPU View screen for the selected MPU is displayed Figure 5 3 MPU View Dialog Box MPU MPU View Mi E MPU Location
190. cess the V5 Interfaces dialog box The V5 Interfaces dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways E In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View from the BS BU Terminal menu select Services then V5 Configuration and then V5 Interfaces a In the Main window from the Configuration menu select Services then V5 Configuration and then V5 Interfaces Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The V5 Interfaces dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 7 V5 Interfaces Dialog Box ProbT 5 Interfaces Ioj x V5 Interface Location Cell Name NewCell3 BS BU ID ProbT Sector Name SigiSect Inertface Index Device Type Interface ID Subscribers Oper Status Admin Status TS 123 V5 1 Out of Service Disable poo Out of Service pese _ _ Disable Close Refresh Help 7 12 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration The V5 Interfaces dialog box displays the V5 interfaces defined on the selected BS BU and the TS BUs registered to the BS BU Note When the V5 Interfaces dialog box is accessed from Terminal Station BU View it displays the V5 interfaces defined on the current TS BU and the BS BU to which it is connected registered The V5 Interfaces dialog box includes the following read only fields Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which this BS BU
191. cessacieneis tice sasheedicantecsiubiens 8 46 WALKair 3000 IP SLA Performance Monitoring sseceeeeeeeeees 8 50 Accessing IP SLA Performance Monitoring c eee 8 50 Executing WALKair 3000 IP SLA Performance Monitoring 8 51 Chapter 9 Security Management Modifying the System Password ccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneneeeees 9 2 Specifying User Types swiccnicisevedensacencsccicsinencatwracennicviainsianssciavevisancveunsiiaies 9 3 Adding New Users ssesesssessseescosossssrrrnrerrnnnunnerurnnnnuunuunnetuuunnneseeeeoee 9 4 Editing USETS oeaan iaiia Eae iadaaa aaa A a aiaa R EEEa 9 5 Deleting SIS siririna sii csnsontiiee eiia aANT AEE eE ia 9 5 Chapter 10 Utilities Authorized Managers ssnsnesssessunnnnnnnnennnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 10 2 Software Download secesssesecscinarnsnesaesseie cents wenraeeenienrein ceva ceeadenannansaaeneanin 10 7 Multiple BS BU Download 0 c eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenseeteeeaes 10 7 Single Device Download iti rcalenctiottncacddeadsnnsdeniebetnaesduubetenbidadenties 10 16 Configuration Upload and Download c cecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 19 WALKair 1000 Configuration Upload and Download 10 19 Creating Configuration Files 2 cccccsesccsscceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeees 10 21 Loading Configuration siipccitasedniiodicencetianei since duentadunceadnilebercaadanse 10 23 WALKair 3000 Shelf Con
192. cludes the following options a WALKair Alarms Monitor The WALKair Alarms Monitor Window displays in real time the most recent twenty SNMP traps alarms sent by WALKair 1000 WALKair 3000 devices and received by the WALKnet application a WALKair Alarms History The WALKair Alarms History window can display all the alarms from the devices Its display is refreshed manually by the operator Note HP OpenView integration with WALKnet see HPOV Customization on page 11 1 of this user s manual x We recommend to use HP OpenView for large installations For more information about For more information about the WALKnet Alarm Browser see The WALKnet Alarm Browser on page 12 1 of this user s manual Help Menu Help Index About The Help menu includes the following options a Help Index Provides access to online help a About Displays version information for the WALKnet application WALKnet User s Manual 2 9 Chapter 2 Getting Started Toolbar T U 3 ye ty 4 2 10 following tools New Open Save Refresh View Cell View Shelf View Sector View BS BU View TS BU View Terminals Sector Frequency RFU and Antenna Software Download The WALKnet Toolbar contains icons for quick access to key menu options that enable you to configure and view system components It includes the Enables you to create a new map Enables
193. colored square representing the fault status e green represents No Fault status e yellow represents a Minor Fault e red represents a Major Fault WALKnet User s Manual 4 67 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration x Terminal Sta tion Index System Name Customer ID Configured Type Detected Type Oper Status Admin Status Note TS BU reference number automatically assigned to TS TS BU Name assigned by the user A unique ID number per BS BU The Operator defines Customer IDs One of the available options is displayed e Not Installed default value e TS Type A TS unit 2 x Ethernet only e TS Type B TS unit 2 x Ethernet 4 x El e TS Type C TS unit 2 x Ethernet 8 x E1 e TS Type D TS unit 4 x Ethernet 2 x E1 One of the available options is displayed according to your system e Not Installed default value e TS Type A TS unit 2 x Ethernet only e TS Type B TS unit 2 x Ethernet 4 x El e TS Type C TS unit 2 x Ethernet 8 x E1 e TS Type D TS unit 4 x Ethernet 2 x E1 The operational status of the TS The administrative status of the TS e Enable e Disable You can sort TSs TS Index TS ID Customer ID Oper Status and Admin Status by clicking on the corresponding column header Creating Terminal Stations gt 4 68 To create a TS Once a TS has been defined its configuration parameters are accessible 1 From the Registered Terminals dialog box
194. cted 15 Min Intervals option is selected HK 4 In the list of parameters select the Graph checkbox to the right of a parameter to display that parameter in the graph 5 Click Get Data Values for the air link parameters for the selected time interval are displayed in the column to the right of the Graph column The graph displays air performance measurements for the selected parameters The color of the lines in the graph matches the corresponding color surrounding the selected checkbox of the parameter Notes When you select Current 15 Minutes as the time interval the Get Data button becomes a Stop button Clicking Stop terminates the accumulation of air link measurements 6 To set all Uplink and Downlink FER Frame Error Rate counters to 0 click Reset FER Counters WALKnet User s Manual 8 7 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring The detailed air performance parameters appearing in the list of parameters in the Detailed Air Performance dialog box are as follows DL UL ES Downlink Uplink Errored Seconds The ES ratio measured at the TS BU or BS BU as a percentage DL UL SES Downlink Uplink Severely Errored Seconds The SES ratio measured at the TS BU or BS BU asa percentage DL UL UAS Downlink Uplink Unavailable Seconds The UAS ratio measured at the TS BU or BS BU as a percentage DL UP DM Downlink Uplink DMs The DM ratio measured at the TS BU or BS BU as a percentage DL UL SNR MIN Downlink
195. d Indicates whether the user s LAN is working with VLAN This parameter defines whether the VLAN tag is sent in IP packets This field is read only Local LAN Router IP Address in case the client is connected to the TS via a Router The router s IP address must be defined The Destination IP Address behind the Local Router The Subnet Mask behind the Local Router The backbone Default Router IP address Each SLA can use a different Router on the backbone The Subnet Mask used in the TS on the client side VLAN ID for the BS BU field is active for Layer 2 VLAN ID for the TS BU field is active for Layer 2 The number of the ATM NIU card to define IP service connection path 1 to 16 indicates the ATM NIU card slot number Blank indicates Ethernet connection This field is read only WALKnet User s Manual 7 63 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration ATM port CBR VPI VCI rtVBR VPI VCI NrtVBR VPI VCI UBR VPI VCI The ATM NIU port interface number required defining the service connection path This field is read only The VCi VPi defined for level 1 If the ATM NIU for IP field indicates Ethernet connection or if the selected Class of Service is not Platinum this field is read only and blank The VCI VPI defined for level 2 If the ATM NIU for IP field indicates Ethernet connection or if the selected Class of Service is not Platinum or Gold this field is read only The VCI VPI de
196. d Read only Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this MPU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only WALKnet User s Manual 5 11 Chapter 5 Shelf Management 5 12 Slot Number Number of the slot in the shelf where this MPU is installed Read only Default Gateway area Name IP Address Location Contact Settings area System Name Redundancy Status Redundant MPU Slot Number Status area Oper Status Fault status Default Gateway name Administrative information describing the Default Gateway connected to the Base station It is useful to be in contact with Gate way staff in case of IP connection problems Read write Default Gateway IP address This is administrative information describing the Default Gateway con nected to the Base station It is useful to be in con tact with Gateway staff in case of IP connection problems Read write Default Gateway location This is administrative information describing the Default Gateway con nected to the Base station It is useful to be in con tact with Gateway staff in case of IP connection problems Read write Default Gateway contact This is administrative information describing the Default Gateway con nected to the Base station It is useful to be in con tact with Gateway staff in case of IP connection problems Read write System name of the MPU Read write Ind
197. d for this client are deleted first 7 54 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management The Service Level Agreement SLA defines the template of parameter values that is selected during the definition of an IP service for a client A WALKair 3000 system supports up to 1024 IP SLA The user can define up to 16 IP SLA on a specific TS Each IP SLA is associated with a specific TS You can configure an IP SLA details via the IP SLA List dialog box gt To access the IP SLA List dialog box The IP SLA list dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways E Shelf BS BU In Sector View select Shelf menu then select IP SLA from the SLA submenu of the Services menu B Shelf or Stand Alone BS BU In the Main window select Configuration menu then select IP SLA from the SLA submenu of the W3000 Services menu Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse dialog box and click OK E Shelf BS BU in Shelf View select IP SLA from the SLA submenu of the Services menu E Stand Alone BS BU only In BS BU View select SLA IP SLA from the Services menu The IP SLA List dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 55 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 34 IP SLA List Dialog Box Shelf MPU IP SLA List ojx IP SLA SLA ID Selection Location B BS BUID BU Slot 4 x CellName NewCen TS ID ts 13 xj ShelfID MPU Browse
198. d with the touch of a button W3000 Stand Alone BS BU System Management of the WALKair3000 Stand Alone system s Network Elements BS BU and TS BUs is as follows WALKnet is connected to the Ethernet port of the main board of the Stand Alone BS BU and communicates with it via the SNMP protocol over UDP IP The SNMP agent resides on the main board and provides management capabilities for the WalkAir 3000 Stand Alone system The BS BU SA is the proxy for the entire WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU system WALKnet User s Manual 1 3 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet A Stand Alone BS BU communicates with the TS Bus via an Alvarion proprietary protocol over an air link The TS BU does not have an SNMP agent Instead it has a small management kernel that interfaces the BS BU management kernel using the air link Embedded Operation Channel EOC The WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU supports In Band Management through the second Ethernet port WALKnet sends all SNMP queries to the WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU The BS BU encodes the requests and collects the information from the appropriate TS BUs if required In this way viewing or defining system resources and or providing fault identification are achieved with the touch of a button WALKnet User s Manual System Requirements System Requirements The WALKnet workstation and application requirements are as follows a Ethernet Network Card a Windows Platform Proc
199. dancy Status APA aA Redundancy Status Disabled xj Oper Status Down Stand By Status Jin Service Admin Status Disable x Redundant BS BU Slot No None Fault Status No Faults OK Apply Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Note z The Cell Name Sector A Name and Sector B Name Shelf ID and Slot Number fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell shelf and sectors for the defined W3000 BS BU 4 Select Carrier Index Note z Initially the carrier Index field has the value of the first available carrier index You may change it by selecting any other value from the dropdown list 5 Enter the W3000 BS BU System Name 6 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the W3000 BS BU from the dropdown list Available values are Enable Disable and Redundant If this will normally be in service select Enable WALKnet User s Manual 4 39 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration If this card will be in standby and will come into service only if another card fails select Redundant 7 Select the IF MUX parameters from the IF MUX A IF MUX B and Active IF MUX dropdown list according to your system Note A standby BS BU must be configured for the same IF MUX as the normally working BS BU it will replace 8 From the dropdown lists select connected ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU card numbers for Data and TDM services 9 The Modulation Change enables to descend from QAM16 to QPSK modulati
200. define an ODBC data source name that uses the Microsoft Access ODBC driver Create the database in the process 2 Set the NMS_DB_ NAME environment variable to ODBC lt Your Data Source Name gt Connecting to Oracle8i You can connect to an Oracle8i database from both WALKnet for Windows NT 2000 XP and WALKnet for UNIX The Oracle8i server can be hosted either on Windows NT 2000 XP or UNIX WALKnet connects to Oracle8i with the user ID and password used to log in to it A WALKnet user must also be created as an Oracle8i user to be able to connect to Oracle8i The WALKnet admin user must be created before WALKnet is run for the very first time and should be granted table creation permissions Therefore the following procedure must be performed creating user tables gt To create user tables in the database 1 Edit the sql file oracle8 sql and the replace the sample lines to match your system 2 Execute the following SQLPLUS command SQL gt start oracle8 gt To connect to an Oracle8i server from WALKnet for Windows 1 Install the Oracle8i NT 2000 XP Client software 2 Set the NMS_DB_ NAME environment variable to oracle81 lt net service name gt gt To connect to an Oracle8i server from UNIX 1 14 WALKnet User s Manual Connecting WALKnet to a Database 1 If the Oracle8i server is on a different workstation install the Oracle8i client 2 Set the NMS_DB_ NAME environment variable to oracle81 lt net ser
201. definition of the Terminal Station Basic Units TS BUs that are connected to the BS BUs Once a TS BU is registered to a BS BU you can configure the parameters and services for the TS BU TS BUs are identified by a Customer ID number Creating Terminal Station Basic Units You can register a TS BU and configure it before it is physically located in the WALKair system Then when the air link is established the TS BU receives all its configuration parameters from the BS BU TS BUs are defined from the Registered Terminals dialog box gt To register a new TS BU 1 Open the Registered Terminals dialog box in one of the following ways In Base Station BU View select Registered Terminals from the BS BU menu In the Main window select Terminals from the Configuration menu or click View Terminals in the toolbar Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The Registered Terminals dialog box is displayed 4 58 WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 34 Registered Terminals Dialog Box 10 10 10 227 Registered Terminals iof x Terminals Location E canore rc Sector Name JNewSector1 a Browse BS BU ID Loreena The Registered Terminals dialog box displays all Terminal Stations registered with the current BS BU Note x The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector for which
202. detailed description of deleting WALKair 3000 slot cards refer to Sector and Shelf Management on page 4 8 Modifying MPU Properties You can modify the properties of MPU from Sector View Shelf View or MPU View gt To modify MPU properties Open the MPU Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways 5 10 WALKnet User s Manual Main Processing Unit MPU Management E Select an MPU Card in Sector View Select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then select Edit Card Properties E Select an MPU Card in Shelf View Select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then select Edit Card Properties E In the MPU View select Edit MPU from the MPU menu The MPU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 5 4 MPU Properties Edit Dialog Box MPU 7 MPU Properties Edit E _ iol xi Location a B Cell Name Nece Shelf ID Shelf Slot Number Poo Default Gateway lt Name faiz IP Address 10 0 15 29 Location A Contact 3445 Settings A i lt i m i iii System Name MPUTA Redundancy Status Disses Redundant MPU Slot Number Nos gt Status Ra i_ iii _ _i _ oo i 1J_oi imi _ Oper Status uv sti i C r Admin Status Enade Cts yi Fault Status Mnr s S S Response OK 9 The following parameters are displayed in MPU Properties Edit dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this MPU has been define
203. detected loss of the radio link with more then 50 of TSs mostTsRadioLinkLoss condition is terminated BS detected loss of all radio links with TSs allTsRadioLinkLoss condition is terminated Accumulated Radio Link BER of a BU exceeds Threshold 1 Accumulated Radio Link BER of a BU exceeds Threshold 2 Accumulated Radio Link BER of a BU is below Threshold 1 Accumulated Radio Link BER of a BU is below Threshold 2 WALKnet User s Manual B 11 Appendix B RFU Traps Trap Number 37 38 39 40 Trap Name in MIB rfuChangeedOn rfuChangeedOff oduSwitching externAttenValueCh anged Send Criterion RFU power loss is detected RFU power sense fault is detected RFU A failure is detected RFU B failure is detected RFU power loss is terminated RFU power sense is OK MPU detected that RFU A is operational MPU detected that RFU B is operational Switching from RFU B to RFU A occurred Switching from RFU A to RFU B occurred Recommended value of the external attenuator is changed WALKnet User s Manual IF MUX Traps IF MUX Traps See the IFU Traps on page B 10 and Devices Traps on page B 8 WALKnet User s Manual B 13 Appendix B Software Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 41 softwarewDownloadOn 42 softwarewDownloadOff 43 diagnosticsSwOn 44 diagnosticsSwOff 45 switchVersionOn Send Criterion Software download process is started Softwa
204. dialog box The TDM SLA list dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways a In the Main window select Configuration then select TDM SLA from the SLA submenu of the W3000 Services menu Browse to the required shelf in the Browse Shelf dialog box and click OK a Shelf only In Shelf View select TDM SLA from the SLA submenu of the Services menu E Shelf only In Sector View select Shelf then select TDM SLA from the SLA submenu of the Services menu The TDM SLA List dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management Figure 7 39 TDM SLA List Dialog Box Shelf MPU TDM SLA List OLX TDM SLA SLA ID Selection Location az BS BU ID feuSit 4 S CellName Newel TSID 1s 13 cy ShelfID MPU TOMSLAID Browse TDM SLA Close Find Show Clients Refresh Help 9 Response OK Notes z For a Stand Alone BS BU the Sector name appears instead of the Shelf ID and the BS BU ID drop down list is grayed gt To display TDM SLA 1 Select the BS BU from the dropdown list in the BS BU ID field 2 Select the TS from the dropdown list in the TS ID field 3 To display all TDM SLAs currently defined on the selected BS BU and TS select All from the dropdown list in the TDM SLA ID field 4 To display one TDM SLA defined on the selected BS BU and TS select TDM SLA ID from the dropdown list in the TDM SLA ID field 5 Click the Fi
205. displayed in the Title Bar Menu Bar The WALKnet Menu Bar contains menus that enable you to configure and view system components It includes the following menus a File Menu on page 2 5 a Configuration Menu on page 2 6 a Performance Menu on page 2 7 a Utilities Menu on page 2 8 a Security Menu on page 2 8 a Fault Menu on page 2 9 2 4 WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Main Window Help Menu on page 2 9 File Menu New Map Open Map Save Map Save Map As Background Login Exit The File menu includes the following options New Map Enables you to create a new map Open Map Enables you to open an existing map Save Map Saves the current map in a file Save Map As Enables you to save the open map file with a new name Background Enables you to change the image file used as the background for the map Login Enables you to log in as a different user Exit Exits from the WALKnet application saving any configuration changes WALKnet User s Manual 2 5 Chapter 2 Getting Started Configuration Menu New Cell Cell Sector W3000 Shel W3000 BS BL SA W1000 BS BU Goto Terminal ermunals Frequencies RFU and An enna Authorized W anagers W3000 Services W1000 Services a ee Refresh The Configuration menu includes the following options 2 6 New Cell Enab
206. diting Frame Relay Ports gt 7 32 The properties of an existing Frame Relay port can be modified when its administrative status is Disable and there are no Frame Relay services defined over the port To edit Frame Relay ports 1 In the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box select an existing Frame Relay port 2 From the Port menu select Edit The Edit Frame Relay Port dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration Figure 7 19 Edit Frame Relay Port Dialog Box ProbT Edit Frame Relay Port Location ass Cell Name NewCell3 Sector Name Sigis ect BS BU ID ProbT Device EBUR Port Number Para 0 Port Type UNI Signaling Protocol fansiT 16170 yi User N391 e User N392 bo User N393 oOo User T391 hoo g Net N392 bo Net N393 4o fs Net T392 5o S E1 Time Slots ieee ok Cancel Refresh Help See 3 Modify the fields as required and click OK Deleting Frame Relay Ports Frame Relay ports can be deleted when there are no Frame Relay services defined over the port gt To delete Frame Relay ports 1 In the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box select an existing Frame Relay port 2 From the Port menu select Delete The selected port is deleted WALKnet User s Manual 7 33 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration F
207. double clicking a cell E By right clicking a cell and selecting Open from the options displayed E From the Configuration menu by selecting Cell or clicking View Cell in the toolbar Then browsing to the required cell in the Browse Cell dialog box and clicking OK The Cell View dialog box for the selected cell is displayed WALKnet User s Manual Cell Management Figure 4 3 Cell View Dialog Box ixl Cell Sector Location B Name NewCell1 Description This is cell NewCell1 Browse List of sectors sect Heading Beamwidth IF MUX Type Shelf Name NewSector2_1 0 15 degrees W10008 Ports NewSector3 0 15 degrees w3000 6 Ports NMS MPU new 0 15 degrees W3000 2 Ports Refresh Cell View displays the configuration parameters of the selected cell The parameters are read only To modify the configuration parameters see Modifying Cell Properties on page 4 7 The following Cell View parameters are displayed Location area Name The name of the cell Description A description of the cell useful in identifying the loca tion of the cell Browse Enables you to display configuration information in the open Cell View for another cell in the same map List of sectors area Sector The name of the sector The color of the box to the left of the name indicates the status of devices in the sec tor Heading The direction in which the antenna is facing O to 360 degrees Beam wi
208. ds Once a W3000 BS BU has been defined its configuration parameters and its registered Terminal Station TSs are accessible A BS BU can be defined as either a normally working in service card or as a redundant standby card that comes into service if a normally working card fails gt To create a Shelf W3000 BS BU 1 In Sector View or in Shelf View select an empty slot position in the shelf 2 In Sector View select Chassis Slot from the Element menu or select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu in Shelf View Then select BS BU from the New submenu The new W3000 BS BU is created and displayed in the selected slot 4 38 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management 3 Start configuring W3000 BS BU by selecting Chassis Slot from the Element menu in Sector View or by selecting Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu in Shelf View Then select Edit Card Properties The BS BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 25 W3000 Shelf BS BU Properties Edit Dialog Box MPU_BU Slot 4 BS BU Properties Edit ioi x Location B Cell Name NewCelt Shelf ID MPU Sector A Name J Slot Number a Sector B Name J Carrier Index E xj ecua System Name feu Slot 4 Data service ATM NIU None x IF MUX A IF MUX 0 xj TDM service ATM 12xE1 NIU None x Modulation Change Disable x IF MUX B None Actual IP Mode Basic Active IF MUX fir nur 1 Configured IP Mode Basic x Redun
209. dth The angle of the sector 15 30 45 60 90 or 120 180 and 360 degrees IF MUX Type W1000 8 Ports W1000 16 Ports W3000 6 Ports Shelf W3000 2 Ports up to 2 Stand Alone BS BUs per sector or W3000 None one Stand Alone BS BU without IF MUX WALKnet User s Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Shelf Name Shelf only The system name of the W3000 shelf within which the IF MUX is defined Note z The pie chart to the right of the List of sectors area provides a graphical representation of the sectors defined in the cell The color of the sector in the pie chart indicates the status of devices in the sector From Cell View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 a Edit cell properties see Modifying Cell Properties on page 4 7 a Assign frequencies to BS BUs see Frequency Planning on page 4 77 a Define new sectors see Sector Management on page 4 8 E Modify and delete existing sectors see Deleting and Editing Sectors on page 4 14 E Access Sector View see Displaying Sector View on page 4 10 The next step in configuring a cell is to define the sectors within the cell See Sector and Shelf Management on page 4 8 for details Editing and Deleting Cells Cells can be deleted from a map or their properties can be modified Deleting Cells Deleting cells from a ma
210. dy in use by another service Invalid Telecom Ports configuration if the port type is E1 only CCS Signaling mode is allowed Internal device problem Change V5 Interface Admin Status Error Type 340 Description Internal device problem Add V5 Subscribers Error Type 410 411 412 413 Description Wrong L3 Address for ISDN subscriber must be Integer between 0 and 8175 Subscriber already exists Selected E1 channel is already in use by another service Internal device problem Delete V5 Subscriber Error Type 430 431 Description Delete is allowed if AdminStatus is Disable Operational Status is Out of Service Internal device problem WALKnet User s Manual C 9 Appendix C Add Frame Relay Port Error Type 510 511 512 513 514 Description Max number of FR LPorts is 20 Illegal Signaling Protocol ansiT1617B is not supported The FR Port is already used by another service Unable to allocate E1 Channels for the FR LPort Internal device problem Edit Frame Relay Port Error Type 520 521 522 523 524 525 Description Change is allowed only if FR Service over this port is Disabled Illegal Signaling Protocol ansiT1617B is not supported If Signaling Protocol is changed from LMI to another one check that there is no DLCI s with a value of more then 991 defined on this port Incorrect setting NetT392 must be greater than User
211. e Number of YPCs currently in use Jo Line Config NAZ Number of YCCs currently in use Jo Max Number of VPI bits fe SEN fi Current Max VPI bits Je Loopback State No Loop x Max Number of VCI bits fi 6 Scrambling On Current Max VCI bits 16 Scrambling Payload fo COS Interface Loopback Location Code fo Interface Subesriber Address 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 Port Status ATM UNI Interface Type JAtmfUniPvcOnly Oper Status up Interface ILMI VPI fo Admin Status Enable xl Interface ILMI VCI heoo STM1 Port Settings a Refresh ken Response OK WALKnet User s Manual 6 23 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration ATM Configuration Parameters The following parameters are displayed in the STM1 Port Properties dialog box Location area Cell Name Shelf ID ATM NIU ID Port Number The name of the cell for which this ATM NIU has been defined The name of the Shelf for which this ATM NIU has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID The system name if defined for the ATM NIU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the ATM NIU The number of the onboard port ATM Settings area Max Number of VPCs Max Number of VCCs Number of VPCs currently in use Number of VCCs currently in use Max Number of VPI bits The maximum number of VPCs PVPCs and SVPCs supported by this ATM interface At the ATM UNI th
212. e maximum number of VPCs PVPCs and SVPCs ranges from 0 to 256 only The maximum number of VCCs PVCCs and SVCCs supported by this ATM interface The number of VPCs PVPC Soft PVPC and SVPC cur rently in use at this ATM interface This includes the number of PVPCs and Soft PVPCs configured at the interface plus the number of SVPCs currently established at the interface At the ATM UNI the configured number of VPCs PVPCs and SVPCs can range from 0 to 256 only Read only The number of VCCs PVCC Soft PVCC and SVCC currently in use at this ATM interface This includes the number of PVCCs and Soft PVCCs configured at the interface plus the number of SVCCs currently estab lished at the interface Read only The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM interface At the ATM UNI the maxi mum number of active VPI bits configured for use ranges from 0 to 8 only Read only 6 24 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Current Max VPI bits Max Number of VCI bits Current Max VCI bits ATM Address Type Interface Loopback Location Code ATM Admin Address Interface Sub scriber Address ATM UNI Interface Type The maximum number of VPI Bits that may currently be used at this ATM interface The value is the minimum Max Active VPI bits for this interface and of the inter face s UNI peer Read only The maximum number of active VCI bits conf
213. e 1 Disable Inactive a Close Refresh Help The Service List dialog box displays a list of services currently defined on the selected client This list includes the following read only fields Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined Shelf ID Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf Sector Stand Alone BS BU only The system name if defined of the unit or when no system name is defined the IP address of the unit Client area Client Name The administratively assigned name for this Client Location The physical location of this Client e g Client s address WALKnet User s Manual 7 79 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration BS BU ID TS ID List of IP Services SLA ID SLA Name CIR MIR Class of Service Eth port Admin Oper Shelf The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS The number of the SLA for the IP Data service Up to 16 SLA for the IP Data service can be defined on the particular TS The SLA Id is unique for this TS This is th
214. e Definition gt To define a system variable for the National Protocol 1 On your PC Select Settings then Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click on the System icon 3 In the System Properties Window select the Advanced tab 4 Click the Environmental Variables button The Environmental Variables Dialog Box is displayed Figure 10 5 Environmental Variables Dialog Box Environment ariables User variables For ricks Yalue ComSpec CWINNT system32 cmd exe NMS_LOG c nms_log NUMBER_OF_PR 1 05 Windows_NT Os2LibPath CAWINNTisystem32 os2 dll x aa Edit Delete Cancel 5 In the User variables area top area of dialog box click New 10 8 WALKnet User s Manual Software Download 6 In the New User Variable dialog box displayed as below type the following variable name in the Variable Name area NMS_NATIONAL_PROTOCOL_FILE Figure 10 6 New User Variable Dialog Box few User Variable ET Variable Name NMS_NATIONAL_PROTOCOL_FILE variable Value NP_USA cne In the Variable Value area type in the name of the file that includes the National Protocol parameters T Click OK The new National Protocol variable is displayed in the top area of the Environmental Variables dialog box 8 On your PC create a new local folder for the National Protocol file You can call it for example NatProtocol Copy the National Protocol File supplied
215. e IF MUX as the normally working BS BU it will replace 5 Select connected ATM NIU or 12 x E1 NIU card numbers for Data and TDM services from the dropdown lists 6 The Modulation Change enables to descend from QAM16 to QPSK modulation in case of bad link performance and to ascend from QPSK to QAM16 modulation in case of improvement in link performance Set to Enable or Disable as required 7 To modify the IP Mode in the Settings area from the Configured IP Mode drop down list choose Basic for Layer 3 mode or Bridging for Layer 2 mode 8 From the Redundant BS BU Slot Number drop down list select a stand by W3000 BS BU This parameter is not relevant for a standby BS BU 9 Click OK or Apply to save any modifications made to the properties of the W3000 BS BU Moving W3000 BS BU Slot Positions BS BUs like all other cards can be moved from one slot to another gt To move a W3000 BS BU WALKnet User s Manual 4 47 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 1 One of following ways may be used to move a W3000 BS BU from one slot to another In Sector View select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and select Move In Shelf View select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and select Move The Move Card dialog box is displayed Figure 4 29 Move BS BU Dialog Box lox Location B Cell Name NewCelll Shelf Name Shelf o Shelf IP Address 10 0 15 90 Card Name eu B Destination Slot Slot 1
216. e Main window from the Configuration menu select Services then Frame Relay Ethernet Configuration then BS BU or TS BU and then Frame Relay Port Browse to the required BS BU TS BU in the Browse BS BU Browse TS dialog box and click OK The Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 17 Frame Relay Port Configuration Dialog Box BEE ProbT Frame Relay Port Configuration Port Location B CellName NewCell3 Sector Name SigiSect BS BU ID ProbT Device Port Port Signaling User User User User Net Net Net eee Number Type Protocol N3931 N3932 N393 T391 N392 N393 T392 BS BU Pott 3 UNI ansiT1617D 6 3 4 10 3 4 15 TS 123 Port 3 TS 17 Port 1 UNI ansiT1617D 6 3 4 fio 3 a 15 TS 17 Port 2 UNI ansiT1617D 6 3 4 10 3 TS 17 Port 3 UNI ansiT 16170 6 3 4 fio 3 a 1 C a a a a Cee ee ee a eee Close Refresh Help Notes defines the logical ports for Ethernet interfaces defined on a BS BU or TS BU Thus the only parameters displayed in the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box for the Frame Relay Ethernet ports are Device and Port Number A You cannot define Frame Relay logical ports for Ethernet ports The BS BU automatically The Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box displays the Frame Relay ports defined on the selected BS BU and the TS BUs registered to the BS BU Notes When the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box is accessed from Terminal Statio
217. e Port Configuration dialog box for a V 35 X 21 V 35 FR or X 21 FR 2M or 4M configured port type is shown below Figure 6 4 V 35 X 21 V 35 FR or X 21 FR 2M or 4M Port Configuration Dialog Box 21 Port Configuration Location i ______ B Cell Name Tir S Sector Name SigiSe i i t t BS BU ID eae Port Patea Seting Max bandwidth Mes i Data Rate i oO B Operating Mode oee S x Timing Mode jnen o Clock Mode Standard O RX Clock Mode Standad o Loopback Mode None tt lt CSstsS x Admin Status Disate Response OK The configuration parameters for a V 35 X 21 V 35 FR or X 21 FR 2M or 4M configured port type are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name ofthe sector for which this BS BU TS BU has been defined 6 8 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters BS BU ID Port Settings area Max Bandwidth Data Rate Operating Mode Timing Mode Clock Mode RX Clock Mode Loopback Mode Admin Status The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box The number of the port in the BS BU TS BU The appropriate maximum bandwidth up to 4 Mbs The line data rate in Time slots The
218. e Relay Ethernet Service dialog box select an existing service from the list of Frame Relay Ethernet services 2 From the Forwarding Rules menu select Value Added Service The Value Added Services dialog box is displayed as shown below 3 Click Edit Notes When Edit is not clicked the parameters are read only and their values are automatically refreshed When Edit is clicked the parameters can be modified and automatic refresh is disabled WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration Figure 7 25 Value Added Services Dialog Box In the above example the selected service is defined over Frame Relay When the selected service is defined over Ethernet the Value Added Services dialog box includes an additional IP Parameters area that displays read only IP parameters of connections as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 43 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 26 Value Added Services Dialog Box Ethernet Sill Values Added Services Access List Location Cell Name WIK ea Sector Name NewSectr3 CS BS BU ID i Untagged TS Port DLCI Value fe IP Parameters c r Quality Of Service Connection IP Address 10 10 10 1q QOS Level siwe Default Gateway IP Address fini ae ehk Max Traffic Rate fo Local Router IP Address ivi lea fa Cala an be Voice jo kBps IP Subnet EE E Video bo kBps fo z Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Untagged TS Por
219. e SLA description as set by an Operator Committed Information Rate CIR for the IP traffic defined for this client in this particular IP service The CIR of the service cannot exceed the CIR of the SLA it is using This parameter defines the maximum rate for this pipe providing that free BW is available for allocation to it The pipe rate cannot exceed this number This parameter defines the Class of Service Bronze Silver Gold or Platinum This is the number of the Ethernet port one of the four Ethernet ports on the TS by which the SLA is served The administrative status of the service Indicates the current status of the service List of TDM Services SLA ID SLA Name E1 port The number of the SLA for the TDM Data service This is the SLA description set by an Operator This is the number of the E1 port one of the two E1 ports on the TS by which the SLA is served 7 80 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Service Management Line Type The E1 Interface framing format First Channel The first air time slot allocated for the specified TDM service Bandwidth Leased Line bandwidth size that is the number of the air time slots ATS used within this E1 port for this SLA This parameter provides the summarized bandwidth of all services defined with this SLA Each ATS is 64 Kbps therefore the actual bandwidth allocated for this TDM SLA is the number of ATSs x 64Kbps Admin The administrative statu
220. e TS Select either Enable or Disable 2 Click the OK button WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management A new TS is created The new TS properties may be viewed in TS View and edited in the TS Edit Properties dialog box Displaying TS View TS View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the TS and access Air Performance Monitoring gt To open TS View TS View is opened in one of following ways a In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a W3000 TS node a By double clicking a table line in the Registered Terminals dialog box a In the Registered Terminals dialog box by selecting a line in the terminals table and selecting View from the Terminal menu a From the Map window by selecting Goto terminal from the Configuration menu then browsing to the required TS The TS View displayed depends on the terminal interfaces Figure 4 41 TS View Ps sheltitt Terminal tation BUVew PY Terminal Performance Port Beatin Stings Cell Name Newcen Actual Frequency Band Jasco t SOSC S B Sector Name Configured Frequency Band Jao S S SherID Ronen Kalish Shelf Actual Modem Modulation Up Oam Down Qam esuip Lue Recommended Modem Modulation Gam SS T510 am Estimated BS TS Distance km Po SaN mor 56509A Fix Operating Point fzoo0000 Browse VOP Admin Status Ene ooo Detected Type TS 3300 Typect Configured Type fs 230 Tyec 8
221. e Table Row confirmation message is displayed as shown below Figure 7 14 Delete Table Row Confirmation Message Delete Table Row N You are about to delete the row Are you sure to 3 Click Yes to delete the selected subscriber WALKnet User s Manual 7 23 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Configuring V5 Subscribers Display Filter gt 7 24 The list of subscribers in the V5 Subscribers dialog box can be filtered to display only subscribers with specific parameters or all subscribers located on a specific TS BU To configure the V5 subscriber display filter 1 In the V5 Subscribers dialog box select Configure Filter from the V5 Subscribers menu The Configure V5 Subscribers Filter dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 15 Configure V5 Subscribers Filter Dialog Box ProbT Configure Y5 Subscribers Filter E3 Oper Status Removed yi BS BU V5 Interface Index Poo x V5 EF L3 Address Poo TS WAY YN NN Customer ID ha o x V5 Interface Index pooo x V5 EF L3 Address Booo E1 Channel 4 ti User Type jsn C CF OK Cancel Apply Clear Help 2 Specify one or more parameters that you want to use as a filter and click OK The list of subscribers in the V5 Subscribers dialog box displays only those V5 subscribers that share the specified filter parameters WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration V5 Global Parameters If the
222. e alarm Trap Source The value of the varbind 6 buTrapSource that came within the trap data According to the WAL Kair MIB definition it is a string containing BS for BS and TS lt customer id gt for the TS transmitting the trap Alarm The IP address of the BU device that is the source of Source IP the alarm The value is stored in the string format Alarm Date The time stamp when the alarm was received by the and Time OV Event Subsystem Parent Base The name of the object representing the BU on the Unit NNM map that is the source of the alarm All of these attributes are read only When you are finished click OK or Cancel to close the Attributes dialog box All alarms that come from the WALKair devices are displayed in a special popup window of the OV Alarm Browser named WALKair Alarms This enables the user to easily and directly access those alarms that are specific to the WALKair environment only and saves the time that it would have otherwise taken to filter these events from the common flow To display this popup window switch to the Alarm Categories window and then select WALKair Alarms The WALKair Alarms window is displayed 11 8 WALKnet User s Manual Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring Figure 11 5 WALKair Alarms Section in the Alarms Browser 2193 124 27 Segment1 is Map Edit view Performance Configuration Fault Tools Options Window WALKNet Help A dal eld gt elea A Le
223. e configured and detected port types the graphical representation is still of the configured port type but is inactive The LED indicators displayed in the graphical representation display the following status of the telecom interfaces a Int LED Shows the operational status of the indoor equipment Ext LED Shows the air link status a Eth LED Shows the operational status of the Ethernet interface on the BS BU only The colors of the LEDs indicate the following Green Operational Yellow Minor Alarm Red Major Alarm Additionally the Int LED may be Black indicating that the telecom card is not installed 6 2 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Changing the Configured Port Type You can change the configured port type for a port on both BS BUs and TS BUs Configuring services for a port see Chapter 7 System Services Configuration is done according to the configured port type Note x You cannot define two 4 Mbps ports on the same device gt To change the configured port type 1 In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View open the Change Configured Port Type dialog box in one of the following ways Select a port in the List of Ports area and select Change Configured Type from the Port menu Right click a port in the graphical representation of the BS BU TS BU and select Change Configured Type from the options displayed The Change Confi
224. e dropdown list in the E1 Link Type field When defining an interface for a TS BU this field is disabled and the E1 Link Type is None In the C Ch Log and C Path fields enter the V5 C Channel logical number and C Path None ISDN PSTN or ISDN and PSTN for each signaling channel Notes When you select an E1 port only one channel is available for signaling therefore you only need to specify values in the C_Ch16 Log and C_Ch16 C Path fields E1 75 120Q ports can have up to three channels for signaling as follows 16 CCS specify values in C_Ch16 Log and C_Ch16 C Path fields 15 and 16 CCS2 specify values in C_Ch16 Log C_Ch16 C Path C_Ch15 Log and C_Ch15 C Path fields 15 16 and 31 CCS3 specify values in C_Ch16 Log C_Ch16 C Path C_Ch15 Log C_Ch15 C Path C_Ch31 Log and C_Ch31 C Path fields 8 Click OK The new interface is displayed in the V5 Interfaces dialog box Viewing V5 Interface Properties When you have added a V5 interface you can view its properties gt To view V5 interfaces 1 In the V5 Interfaces dialog box select an existing interface from the list of V5 interfaces 2 From the V5 Interface menu select View Interface The View V5 Interface dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 16 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration Figure 7 9 View V5 Interface Dialog Box The View V5 Interface dialog box displays the properties of the
225. e first defined Frame Relay logical ports on the BS BU and on the TS BU gt To add Frame Relay Ethernet services 1 Access the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box from Base Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window 7 36 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration 2 From the Service menu select Add The Add Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 21 Add Frame Relay Service Dialog Box DN amma ennenen nana B Cel Name wk cet Sector Name Nenenn l BS BUID a Downlink Conm ted Burst aze BC Kbs Downlink Excess Burst sze BE Kbete i Dowrkink Conndtedinfcrreaion Rate DCIRKbas Seel 7 SSSS d Reserved Comrrited Inorrsstion Rate LLCIF Kbts Sec 7 Deiak Gateway IP Addess no 11011101110 Leen Router IP Actions fmo 1107110711 VLAN Id None IP Subnet mormomomz Local Subnet Mask Routing Method Scace gt i Advin Staus Fees VES POND Esine x ox Acer Cancel hpl 3 Select a telecom port from the list of ports configured as Frame Relay or Ethernet ports on the BS BU in the left Select One Frame Relay Port area 4 Select a registered TS BU from the dropdown list in the Device field 5 Select a telecom port from the list of ports configured as Frame Relay or Ethernet ports on the selected TS BU in the right Select One Frame Relay Port area 6 Enter a unique DLCI in the DL
226. e interface plus the number of SVCCs that are currently established at the interface Read only The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM interface At the ATM UNI the maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use ranges from 0 to 8 only WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Current Max VPI bits Max Number of VCI bits Current Max VCI bits ATM Address Type Interface Loopback Location Code Interface Sub scriber Address ATM Admin Address The maximum number of VPI Bits that may cur rently be used at this ATM interface The value is the minimum Max Active VPI bits for this interface and of the interface s UNI peer Read only The maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use at this ATM interface The maximum number of VCI Bits that may cur rently be used at this ATM interface The value is the minimum Max Active VCI bits for this interface and of the interface s UNI peer Read only The type of primary ATM address configured for use at this ATM interface private nsapE164 nativeE164 or other Read only Specifies the code for incoming OAM Loopback cells that are to be looped back at this interface A value of zero indicates that the management system has not set any loopback location code for this inter face The identifier assigned by a service provider to the network side of a public network UNI If this inter f
227. e of the sector for which this TS has been defined Shelf ID The name of the Shelf for which this TS has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID If this is a Stand Alone TS BU Shelf ID the name of the Stand Alone BS BU BS BU ID The system name if defined for the W3000 BS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the W3000 BS BU 6 42 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters TS ID The system name if defined for the TS or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS Port Number The number of the onboard port Settings area Line Type The E1 interface framing format Unframed Dou ble Frame Multi Frame CRC4 Multi Frame CRC4 Ext Loss Alarm The E1 loss alarm mode ITUT or ETSI The stan Mode dard used for loss alarm criteria Signaling The El signaling mode Transparent CCS or None Mode Loopback The type of the loopback applied to the E1 telecom mode interface None Remote Local Payload or Other Status area Oper Status The operational status of the telecom interface Up or Down Read only Port Admin The administrative status of the telecom interface Status Enabled or Disabled From the TS Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box you can do the following a Configure the parameters of an onboard E1 port a Set the E1 port administrative status WALKnet User s Manual 6 4
228. e system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf 7 96 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Show Clients Sector Client List Small square Client Name Location Info Admin Stand Alone BS BU only The system name if defined of the unit or when no system name is defined the IP address of the unit Indicates the client s service status Green All services function properly Red One or more services failed Gray There are no services defined The administratively assigned name for this Client The physical location of this client e g client s address The textual identification of the contact person together with the information on how to contact this person e g client s phone number The administrative status of the client Enable or Disable From the Show Clients dialog box you can edit existing clients and invoke the Service List dialog box WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 7 System Services Configuration This page left intentionally blank 7 98 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring In This Chapter WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring on page 8 2 WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring on page 8 11 V5 Call Statistics on page 8 20 Performance Data Collection on page 8 24 Frame Relay Statistics on page 8 39 WALKair 3000 IP SLA Per
229. e test Whether to display the BER Test Status dialog box upon activation of the test p The test parameters are saved in the WALKnet database Each time the BER Test dialog box is opened the last defined parameters are displayed 4 Select the devices to be tested in the tree on the right of the dialog box All devices lower in the hierarchy are automatically selected if a cell is checked so are all the devices in the cell You can uncheck devices you do not wish to test 5 Select OK or Apply The test is run and the BER Test Status dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 10 45 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 26 BER Test Status Dialog Box WALKNet BER Test Status Elapsed Counter Task BS BU TS Id Status Time Overflaw Starvation 10 10 3 50 20 heart jafioi0350 hs meor A jafio10350 75 26 TIMEOUT fafioi0350 T515 TIMEOUT jafio 10 3 50 T516 TIMEOUT fgf10 10 3 50 T5 24 TIMEOUT jafi0 10 350 75 23 TIMEOUT jafio10 350 Ts 22 TIMEOUT jafio10350 Ts 21 TIMEOUT jafio10 3 47 T5123 REFRESHING kahoa T5 555 ERROR j T5 33 ERROR ja l10 10 3 47 T5124 ERROR l ns T52 ERROR kaho TS7 ERROR Close Refresh Save Help Notes The BER Test Status dialog box is only displayed automatically if the Show Status checkbox is selected You can als
230. e versions located in the various components of the WALKair 1000 and WALKair 3000 systems You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time WALKair 1000 Software Versions WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located in BS BUs and TS BUs and the telecom cards located in them gt To view software versions on a BS BU Open the Versions and Reset Management dialog box in one of the following ways E In Base Station BU View select Versions from the BS BU menu E In the Main window select Versions from the Utilities menu or click Versions in the toolbar Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 10 27 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 17 Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box 10 10 3 69 Versions and Reset Management Standby Sw Version I The parameters in the Versions and Reset Management dialog box are described below gt To view software versions on a TS BU In Terminal Station BU View select Versions from the Terminal menu The Terminal Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below 10 28 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management Figure 10 18 Terminal Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box 10 10 3 69 Terminal Versions and Reset Management Integratio
231. eased Line Services menu select Edit The Edit Leased Line Service dialog box is displayed YAELsky Edit Leased Line Service Location aes Cell Name fintegrationCel Sector Name fintegs ector BS BU ID VAELsky Base Station Port Port Type First E1 Channel fi Terminal Station Customerld 399999999 Port Port 3 Port Type First E1 Channel Leased Line Service Bandwidth x 564KBPS 31 Oper Status Disconnected Admin Status Disable x o Cancel Refresh Help Response OK y Figure 7 5 Edit Leased Line Service Dialog Box WALKnet User s Manual 7 9 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 3 Modify the administrative status of the service by selecting Enable Disable from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field 4 Click OK Deleting Leased Line Services To delete a leased line service from the system the administrative status of the service must be disabled gt To delete leased line services 1 In the Leased Line Services dialog box select an existing service from the list of leased line services 2 From the Leased Line Services menu select Delete The Delete Table Row confirmation message is displayed Figure 7 6 Delete Table Row Confirmation Message Delete Table Row N You are about to delete the row Are you sure io 3 Click Yes to delete the leased line service 7 10 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration W
232. ector 1 In Cell View select a sector in the List of sectors and select Delete from the Sector menu The following Delete Sector confirmation message is displayed Figure 4 10 Delete Sector Confirmation Message Delete Sector AN This will permanently remove this sector and all its contents from this cell Are you sure 2 Click Yes to delete the sector from the cell 4 14 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management Modifying Sector Properties Modifying the properties of a sector enables you to modify the name and configuration parameters of the sector gt To modify sector properties 1 Open the Sector Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In Cell View by selecting a sector in the List of sectors and selecting Edit from the Sector menu In Sector View by selecting Edit Sector from the Sector menu The Sector Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 11 Sector Properties Edit Dialog Box Sector Properties Edit ioj x Beeation aaa a pp pmNpmM ama amaa az cot Name SERVER Sector aaa Name NewSectort Heading Jo Beam width fi 5 Degrees yi IF MUX Type Jw 000 8 Ports yi 2 Modify the Name Heading Beam width and IF MUX Type fields as required and click OK Note If IF MUX Type is W3000 6 Ports W3000 2 Ports or W3000 None this value can not be changed this field is disabled Sector Configuration Wizard Shelf only The
233. ed MODEM test failed DSP test failed GALILEO test failed GALBRIDGE test failed FALC test failed Expansion card E1 Eth test failed 24 diagnosticsFaultOff HW test passed successfully RAM test passed successfully FLASH test passed successfully FPGA test passed successfully SWITI test passed successfully MODEM test passed successfully DSP test passed successfully GALILEO test passed successfully GALBRIDGE test passed successfully FALC test passed successfully Expansion card E1 Eth test passed successfully WALKnet User s Manual B 9 Appendix B IFU Traps Trap Number 25 26 27 28 Trap Name in MIB ifuConnLostOn ifuConnLostOff ifuLockOn ifuLockOff Send Criterion Connection between BU and IFU is lost Connection between IF MUX and IFU is lost Connection between BU and IFU is OK Connection between IF MUX and IFU is OK IF synthesizer failed to lock on the frequency set on the synthesizer IFU Lock condition terminated WALKnet User s Manual Radio Link Traps Radio Link Traps Trap Number 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Trap Name in MIB RadioLinkLossOn RadioLinkLossOff mostTsRadioLinkLos sOn mostTsRadioLinkLos sOff allTsRadioLinkLossO n allTsRadioLinkLossOf f RadioLinkKBEROn RadioLinkBEROff Send Criterion BS detected loss of the radio link with one of TSs registered with it TsRadioLinkLoss condition is terminated BS
234. ed the IP Address of the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU is used as BS BU ID The system name is defined in the Stand Alone BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Browse Enables you to display configuration information for Button another W3000 BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map WALKnet User s Manual 4 53 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Status area Admin Status Oper Status Fault status Settings area Serial Number Vendor ID Frequency Band Channel Bandwidth Modulation Change Actual IP Mode Configured IP Mode Card Type area BS Type Detected Type Port area Interface Type Speed Port Oper Status Port Admin Status Administrative status of the W3000 BS BU Enable Disable or Redundant Current card status Up Down Test The severity of a BS BU fault No Faults Minor Major Critical The serial number of the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU N A RF channel that indicates the frequency used for transmission 14 MHz for this release Indicates if Modem Modulation Mode is selected automatically by BS BU Enable or is manually defined Disable The actual IP Mode is either Basic Layer 3 or Bridg ing Layer 2 The configured IP Mode is either Basic Layer 3 or Bridging Layer 2 Type of Stand Alone BS BU defined according to interface BS 3000 Type A 2 x Ethernet Ports BS 3000 Type B 1 x Ethernet 4 x E1 Ports BS 3000 Type C 1 x Ether
235. ed for optical SONET SDH signals Read only This variable indicates the status of the interface and is a bit map represented as a sum therefore it can represent multiple defects simultaneously The various bit positions are SectionNoDefect SectionLOS and SectionLOF Read only The current loopback state of the SONET SDH interface The possible values are follows NoLoop Not in the loopback state A device that is inca pable of performing a loopback on this interface always returns this value FacilityLoop The received signal at this interface is looped back out through the corresponding transmitter in the return direction TerminalLoop The signal about to be transmitted is con nected to the associated incoming receiver OtherLoop Loopbacks that are not defined here Determines whether scrambling is performed at the SDH SONET Options are On or Off Read only 6 26 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Scrambling Payload Status area Oper Status Port Admin Status Determines whether scrambling of cell payload is per formed Options are On or Off Read only The operational status of the telecom interface Options are Up or Down Read only The administrative status of the telecom interface Enabled or Disabled From the STM1 Port Properties dialog box you can do the following a Configure the parameters of an onboard STM1 port a Set the STM1 port admin
236. ed in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when TS BU no system name is defined the customer ID of the ports only TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box Port The number of the port in the BS BU TS BU Settings area Line Type The type of the E1 line Unframed Double Frame Multi Frame CRC4 or Multi Frame CRC4 ext Loss Alarm The standards used for the LOSS alarm criteria Mode ETSI or ITUT Signaling The signaling mode Mode e For El port type Transparent CCS or None e For E1 FR port type Transparent or None e For E1 75 120W port type Transparent CCS channel 16 is used for signaling CCS2 chan nels 15 and 16 are used for signaling CCS3 channels 15 16 and 31 are used for signaling or None A Transparent or CCS Common Channel Signal ing signaling mode cannot be defined when the E1 Line Type is Unframed None should only be selected when the El Line Type is Unframed Connector For E1 75 120Q port type only The physical con Type nection for the port BNC 75 Ohm or RJ45 120 Ohm WALKnet User s Manual 6 7 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Loopback Enables loopback testing for the following None Mode Remote Local or Payload Admin Administrative status of the El port Enable Dis Status able V 35 or X 21 V 35 FR or X 21 FR 2M or 4M Telecom Port Configuration Th
237. ee x E Error Alarms E Threshold Alarms E Status Alarms E Configuration Alarms E Application Alert Alarms File Actions View Help E WALKair Alarms Ack Cor Severity Date Time H RiT PatchView Alarms Be ger 18 12 xuveeqai mcd ru RiT PatchView Integration Pack E All Alarms serqeymhpv i400 Minor Bc ger 18 12 15 xuveeqai med ru RiT PatchView Integration Pack xuveeqai med ru RiT PatchView Integration Pack Minor Bc ger 18 12 16 09 xuveeqai mcd ru RiT PatchView Integration Pack Wi Poe Mir Bile Actions wew Help Ack Cor Severity Date Time sergeymhpv1400 mcd ru ON IFU Lock Failed BSO sergeymhpv1400 mcd ru OFF IFU Lock Failed BSO sergeymwhpv1400 mcd ru ON IFU Lock Failed BSO sergeymwhpv1400 mcd ru OFF IFU Lock Failed BSO sergeymhpv1400 mcd ru ON IFU Lock Failed BSO sergeymhpvl400 mcd ru OFF IFU Lock Failed BSO Normal Bc z H R Normal Be z o R Normal z o R BOOOOOOOOOOOO000 601 Alarms Critice 6 Alarms CriticakO Major3 Minor0 Waming 0 Normal3 default Read Write Auto Layout Overlay Off Geometry Set Z Crp 3 Pasa 1 3 7 Ha cr Kon anil renal anil Farad EE aa By default the automated correlation policy described above works for any BU object represented by an icon on the NNM map No correlation policy will work if the alarm came to the OV Event Subsystem from a WALKair elem
238. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeee 7 47 Adding Clients ccckissesctctiecstcaranenciasetaanes actecdanptnadasecnebeesabveatauaamianens 7 50 Editing CIeNtS sratine staia 7 52 Deleting Clients ssccidictdeinteticca tas cabnccubecnsan vushontcreddaveddeemaminterencaniieide 7 53 WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management cccsseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 55 WALKnet User s Manual 5 Contents Adding IP Goes aay ceterstias nceadaeren seas cciaptatstcenessakesaenaacbamcianaatestiaans 7 60 Editing Ml cae 2 Iaere name oeme ee mee E er ene tree omer ter eee eee 7 64 Deleting IP SLAS isccciienasdemethctcataadedocteseaiunl Salas dobend nnii ennen anerian 7 66 WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 7 68 Adding TDM SLAS sis iccyeczssccseas Cocttageasecctassveieuteans senda soteansteasantentacans 7 72 Editing TDM SLAS isiccssicsactectaancerttx mchaneancien idaanchootaacentendancaanantens 7 75 Deleting TDM SLAS exsssncetcreccinnasscdaeensneadanliaad te cnneadicasasnatek ethedieunncend 7 76 WALKair 3000 Service Manageme nt cssceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 7 78 Adding IP Services veccistcttnetaies deka adel eda etl ateetans pladastedceslddentadieladeenits 7 81 Editing P Services sssrinin oink 7 86 Deleting IP Services ssesscccicecessadashducredeniasinateetcraetatentadniinedetberahaaaaame 7 86 Adding TDM Services scicaicesasseccescevaiasssavmcecereexanisedddurniikeententanievede 7 88 Editing T
239. efined Shelf ID The IP address of the W3K shelf HSC ID The system name if defined for the HSC or when no system name is defined a slot number is used as HSC ID The system name is defined in the HSC Properties Edit dialog box Slot Number Number of slot in the shelf where this HSC is installed Browse Enables you to display configuration information for Button another HSC in any shelf within the same map Settings area Serial The serial number of the HSC Number WALKnet User s Manual 5 3 Chapter 5 Shelf Management PCI Bridge Number HW Revision Status area Bridge Connection Oper Status Admin Status Fault status Bus number for the HSC Bridge slots PCI to PCI bridge device Hardware version of a card This flag is set when the automatic process that con nects and initializes an HSC Bridge to the PCI bus has completed Connected Disconnected Unknown Current card status Up Down Test Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Detected Card Type area Detected Card Type The auto detected card type It also indicates whether the slot has a card inserted in it or not Redundancy area Redundancy Status Stand By Status Redundant HSC Slot Number Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this card Ind
240. el Oper Status User Type The unique subscriber identification number The BS BU V5 2 interface over which the subscriber is defined The specific L3 address identifying the subscriber on the BS BU V5 interface The identification number of the TS BU The TS BU interface over which the subscriber is defined The specific L3 address identifying the subscriber on the TS BU V5 interface The E1 channel allocated for the subscriber on the TS BU side The operational status of the subscriber Removed Blocked or Unblocked The user type PSTN over V5 ISDN over V5 ISDN over the QBRI interface or PSTN over the QPOTS interface WALKnet User s Manual 7 21 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Adding V5 Subscribers V5 subscribers are defined over V5 interfaces Subscribers can only be defined when the V5 Subscribers dialog box is accessed from Base Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window Notes A Ensure that you have first defined a V5 interface on the BS BU and on the TS BU gt To add V5 Subscribers 1 Access the V5 Subscribers dialog box from Base Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window 2 From the V5 Subscriber menu select Add Subscriber The Add V5 Subscribers dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 13 Add V5 Subscribers Dialog Box 10 10 3 57 Add V5 Subscribers User Id BS BU V5 Interface Index an yi V5 EF L3 Address lt lt
241. ell and sector for which the BS BU is defined and the reference ID of the TS BU The BS BU ID field is also read only and displays the system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name for the BS BU is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box WALKnet User s Manual 4 65 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 2 Modify the text fields identifying the name and location of the system and a contact person Note field and the title bar of the TS BU dialog boxes When no system name is entered the customer ID of the TS BU appears in the TS BU ID field and in the title bar of the TS BU dialog boxes i When you define a system name for the TS BU that name appears in the TS BU ID 3 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the TS BU from the dropdown list 4 In the Estimated BS TS Distance km field enter the approximate distance in km between the BS BU and TS BU Enter O to indicate a distance of less than 10 kilometers 5 Click OK to save any modifications made to the properties of the TS BU WAL Kair 3000 Terminal Station Basic Unit Management This section covers procedures for both WALKair 3000 Shelf and WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU units Accessing a Terminal Station Basic Unit Terminal Stations registered to a W3000 BS BU may be accessed through the Registered Terminals dialog box gt To open the Registered Ter
242. ements of the device 2 18 WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Navigation Model Horizontal Navigation Additionally the WALKnet navigation model enables you to navigate horizontally in all hierarchical levels Cell 5 Cell 5 Cell Shelf 5 Shelf Shelf Sector X Sector Sector BS BU BS BU BS BU TS BU r TS BU 7 TS BU MPU 5 MPU MPU NIU Fe NIU p NIU HSC 2 HSC HSC This means you can move between Views as follows E When you are in Cell View for a selected cell you can display the Cell View information for another cell in the same map without closing Cell View E When you are in Shelf View for a selected shelf you can display the Shelf View information for another shelf in any cell within the map E When you are in Sector View for a selected sector you can display the Sector View information for another sector in any cell within the map M When you are in BS BU or TS BU View for a selected BS BU or TS you can display the BS BU or TS BU View information for another BS BU or TS in any sector in any cell within the map WALKnet User s Manual 2 19 Chapter 2 Getting Started gt 2 20 a When you are in MPU NIU or HSC View for a selected MPU NIU or HSC you can display the MPU NIU or HSC View information for another MPU NIU or HSC in any shelf in any cell within the map Horizontal navigation enables rapid movement between cells Shelves sectors MPUs NIUs HSCs BS BUs and TS
243. en select BER Test The BER Test dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 25 BER Test Dialog Box WALKNet BER Test Biel Es re B Test Settings Bit Rate N 64Kbps o o Direction p x Test Duration Min hoo y Test Type Unicast Activation Delay po g Test Description m o M Show Status x EJ proba a p a Hewcem a p E NewSector1 a 10 10 3 443 K 182 K rs BX 10 10 3 47 IX Ts 42s xX 15 555 IX 15 33 IX 15 124 a p a Hewcenz a p E NewSector1 B D 10 10 3 50 ix a he x 18 14 KA Tre 49 4 J gt a 2 From the File menu select New Session The fields in the Test Settings area are enabled 10 44 WALKnet User s Manual Performing BER Tests 3 Specify the settings for the test as follows Bit Rate N 64Kbps Direction Test Duration Min Test Type Activation Delay Test Description Show Status Notes The bit rate You specify N which is a number between 1 and 32 The direction of the data transmission Up Down or Up amp Down The duration of the test in minutes The type of the test Unicast is the only supported test type When multiple BS BUs are selected for testing the delay in minutes between test activation on each BS BU When 0 is specified the test is activated on all BS BUs at the same time The delay is in minutes and can be defined between 0 and 24 A description of th
244. ent that is not present on the map To activate the correlation policy for a WALKair device that is not on the map you must first create the corresponding icon on the map Disabling a Correlation Policy To disable the correlation policy for a specific WALKair element on the map follow this procedure 1 Right click the desired BU object and select Object Properties from the displayed popup menu The BU s Object Properties dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 11 9 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization Figure 11 6 BU Object Properties Dialog Box Object Properties Capabilities General Attributes air Attributes 2 Select WALKair Attributes from the Attributes area and click OK An Attributes dialog box with the specific BU attributes is displayed Figure 11 7 BU Object Attributes Attributes for Object XTERM1 mcd ru Name ae PO Auto Alarms Correlation Enabled Wa amp LKnet response timeout 20 3 Select Auto Alarms Correlation choose Disabled in the dialog box that appears and then click OK in all the dialog boxes for the new setting to take effect 11 10 WALKnet User s Manual Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring Remember that when you turn the correlation policy on or off it influences all the alarms originating from the specific device It is not possible to enable or disable a correlation policy for each alarm selectively WALKnet User s Man
245. er s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Modifying Port Configuration Parameters The configuration parameters for a port are viewed or modified from the Port Configuration dialog box The configuration parameters for a port vary according to the port type Access to the Port Configuration dialog box is the same regardless of port type gt To modify port configuration parameters 1 In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View open the Port Configuration dialog box in one of the following ways Select a port in the List of Ports area and select Edit Port from the Port menu Double click a port in the List of Ports area Right click a port in the graphical representation of the BS BU TS BU and select Edit Port from the options displayed The Port Configuration dialog box for the selected port type is dis played 2 View or modify the configuration parameters in the Port Configuration dialog box as required and click OK The configuration parameters for the different port types are described in the following sections WALKnet User s Manual 6 5 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration E1 E1 FR or E1 75 1200 Telecom Port Configuration Parameters The Port Configuration dialog box for an E1 or E1 FR configured port type is shown below Figure 6 2 E1 or E1 FR Port Configuration Dialog Box ProbT 1 Port Configuration Location A a_i_i m i _ ja B Cell Name
246. er of Air Time Slots ATS Each ATS is 64 Kbps therefore the actual bandwidth allocated for this TDM service equals the number of ATSs x 64Kbps 7 90 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Service Management E1 port This is the number of the E1 port one of the two E1 ports on the TS by which the SLA will be served This field is read only Line Type The E1 Interface framing format This field is read only W3000 Shelf only ATM NIU card area read only ATM NIU for TDM The number of the ATM NIU card to define the TDM service connection path 1 to 16 Indicates the ATM NIU card slot number Blank indicates Ethernet connection ATM port The ATM NIU card port interface number required for definition of the service connection path VPI VCI The VPI VCI fields define the ATM virtual channel W3000 Shelf only 12xE1 Card Area read only NIU Slot Number The number of the ATM NIU E1 card to define TDM service connection path 1 to 16 Indicates the ATM NIU card slot number Blank indicates Ethernet connection E1 port The E1 NIU port interface number is required to define the service connection path This number ranges from 1 to 12 Line Type The E1 interface framing format This framing format must be identical to the format in the E1 area for the TS described earlier in this table WALKnet User s Manual 7 91 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration First Channel The time slot 1 31 W3
247. erface PLCP OOF is terminated on the E3 interface PLCP LOF is terminated on the E3 interface PLCP RAI is terminated on the E3 interface PLCP Framing Error is terminated on the E3 interface Loss of Cell Delineation condition is terminated on the E3 interface AIS is terminated on the E3 interface WALKnet User s Manual STM1 Port Services Traps STM1 Port Services Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Number 11 STM1LoopOn 12 STM 1LoopOff 13 STM 1IfChangedOn 14 STM 1lfChangedOff Send Criterion The STM1 interface is in facility loopback towards ATM state The STM1 interface is in terminal loopback towards W3K state The facility loopback towards ATM is removed from the STM1 interface The terminal loopback towards W3K is removed from the STM1 interface SLOS is detected on the STM1 interface PRDI is detected on the STM1 interface LRDI is detected on the STM 1 interface SOOF is detected on the STM1 interface SLOF is detected on the STM1 interface PAIS is detected on the STM1 interface LAIS is detected on the STM1 interface PLOP is detected on the STM1 interface PSLM is detected on the STM 1 interface SLOS is terminated on the STM1 interface PRDI is terminated on the STM1 interface LRDI is terminated on the STM1 interface SOOF is terminated on the STM1 interface SLOF is terminated on the STM1 interface PAIS is terminated on the STM1 interface LAIS is terminated on the STM1 interface PLOP is terminated on
248. erity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Read only Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable The Cell Name and Shelf ID fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and shelf for which the NIU is defined Note When you define a system name for the ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU that name appears in the ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU ID field and the title bar of the ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU dialog screens When no system name is entered the ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU Slot Number is used to identify the ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management Moving NIU Slot Positions NIU cards like all other cards can be moved from one slot to another For a detailed description of moving NIUs refer to Shelf Management on page 4 19 Accessing Software Reset Management For a detailed description of software reset management refer to Shelf Management on page 4 19 Configuring ATM or E1 or E3 Interfaces For a detailed description of configuring ATM or E1 interfaces please refer to Telecom Interfaces in Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration WALKnet User s Manual 5 31 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Intermediate Frequency Unit IFU Management Displaying IFU View IFU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the IFU gt To access IFU View IF
249. erties Edit ioi x Location zs Cell Name NewCelt Shelf ID MPU Sector A Name J Slot Number a Sector B Name J Carrier Index E Settings ________________________ System Name feu Slot 4 Data service ATM NIU None xj IF MUX A IFMUX 0 xj TDM service ATM 12xE1 NIU None x Modulation Change Disable x IF MUX B Noe ti sY ke A cst P Moto Basic Active IF MUX g Pala Z Configured IP Mode Basic x Redundancy Status Redundancy Status Disabled x Oper Status Down Stand By Status Jin Service Admin Status Disable xl Redundant BS BU Slot No JN one Fault Status No Faults OK Apply Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Note z The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector for which the W3000 BS BU is defined 4 46 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management 2 Modify the W3000 BS BU name Note m When you define a System Name for the W3000 BS BU that name appears in the BS BU ID field and the title bar of the W3000 BS BU dialog screens When no system name is entered BS BU Carrier Index is used to identify the W3000 BS BU 3 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the W3000 BS BU from the dropdown list Enable Disable or Redundant If the BS BU card will be in standby select Redundant 4 Select IF MUX parameters from dropdown lists Note A standby BS BU must be configured for the sam
250. es Configuration a From the IP SLA List dialog box you can add a new IP SLA and edit or delete an existing IP SLA Notes The IP SLA Add Edit and Delete menu items are disabled until you select the BS BU ID and TS ID The IP SLA Add Edit and Delete menu items are disabled until you select the BS BU ID and TS ID Adding IP SLA gt 7 60 Before adding a IP SLA ports must be defined on the BS BU and on the TS BU When adding an IP SLA you specify the IP SLA Name Maximum Information Rate MIR Class of Service CoS Local and Default router IP address and Subnet Mask and Ethernet port number on the TS Ifa connection is established via ATM NIU card W3000 Shelf only you can specify the VPI s VCI s values If a connection is established via a BS BU s Ethernet port VPI s VCI s fields are disabled To add an IP SLA 1 The IP SLA List dialog box select Add from the JP SLA menu The Add IP SLA dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management Figure 7 35 Add IP SLA Dialog Box Shelf Ronen Kalish Shelf Add IP SLA ioj x Location Ethemet B Cell Name Newt SS Ethemet port it yi VLAN tagging mode assa Shelf ID Ronen Kalish Shelf Local Router IP Addr fo 0 ft oft DestIPAddrBehindLR 0 0 0 0 BS BU ID Bug Subnet Mask Behind LA 0 0 0 0 Default Router IP Add 0 0 0 0 JS rsz Subnet Mask f
251. essage appears type y or n as required Figure 1 3 WALKnet HPOV Integration 13 1 10 Follow the process until the Installation Complete message appears WALKnet User s Manual Installing WALKnet 14 For HP Open View integration only otherwise proceed to the following step run the gt ovw fields command as shown below Figure 1 4 ovw fields command for HP Open View Perform trap integration using the following command gt xnmevents merge lt WALKnet_root gt Install HPOV traps dat 15 Enable Read amp Write privileges to all Unix Users using the following command gt chmod 775 lt walknet_root gt Projects FLOWARE WALKNet Ver1_0 Product Data AsciiDb WALKNetMaps WALKnet User s Manual 1 11 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet Post installation After WALKnet has been successfully installed but before it is invoked you must perform the following tasks 1 12 To connect the management station to a WALKair 1000 BS BU ora WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU define the following IP parameters on the BS BU using the Local Craft Interface LCI IP Address Network Mask Default IP Gateway Address In order to connect the management station to the WALKair 3000 Shelf define the following IP parameters on the MPU using the LCI IP Address Network Mask Default IP Gateway Address WALKnet User s Manual Connecting WALKnet to a Database Connecti
252. essor IBM Compatible PC with Pentium IV CPU 1 2 GHz Operating System Microsoft Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP Memory 1 GB RAM Hard Disk 6 GB 19 inch monitor Screen Resolution 1024 x 768 pixels Font Size small fonts Color Palette 16777216 colors gt o OD OD 2 o o o Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 5 5 or higher Or Netscape Version 4 5 or higher for On Line Help CD Drive WALKnet User s Manual 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet UNIX Platform Processor Sun Fire V210 Server Operating System Sun Solaris Version 2 8 and 2 9 Memory 1 GB RAM Hard Disk 9 GB Netscape Version 7 0 for On Line Help U W SCSI 2 oO Oo o o CD Drive Note Database requirements See Connecting WALKnet to a Database on page 1 13 1 6 WALKnet User s Manual Installing WALKnet Installing WALKnet WALKnet is installed on either Windows NT 2000 XP or UNIX WALKnet can also be installed either over HP OpenView Network Node Manager Version 6 4 or as a standalone application Note When WALKnet is installed as a standalone application SNMP Trap functionality is available from the WALKnet Alarm Browser See The WALKnet Alarm Browser on page 12 1 W The following procedure describes how to install WALKnet on Windows NT 2000 XP and UNIX platforms It does not describe the installation of HP OpenView HPOV For instructions on the installation of HP OpenView please see t
253. et Management dialog box or the Terminal Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Switchover WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically resets the BS BU or TS BU Notes Ea You can reset the BS BU or TS BU at any time by clicking Reset How ever do NOT click the Reset button until you are certain that a software switchover has been completed Telecom Card Software Versions WALKnet enables you to view the resident FR Ethernet and QBRI software versions located in the BS BUs and TS BUs You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time gt To view software versions on a telecom card 1 In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View select an FR Ethernet QBRI or QPOTS port 2 From the Port menu select Versions The Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 19 Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box B Location APA Cell Name NewCell5 Port erry Sector Name NewSectol Detected Type JV35 X21 FR 2M BS BU ID Peet ConfiguedType V35FR 2M Ct Current Software Version Version 04 80 Description FR_SW_for WALKair Checksum Jedi e 04 50 Description FR_SW_for_WALKair Checksum 7787 Hardware Revisions Stand By Software Interface Card woo Response OK Close Refresh Help Reset Switchover Q WALKnet User s Ma
254. eteeneseeeeeee 12 11 Deleting Alar mS ticisecscasiccasedcsenanmiantctance caaneadonebietmenednaduaunieosnateonatads 12 13 Saving an Alarms File aceccseiesedastcrecenceneatestanathectecamitbandeccbcretegiadudate 12 14 Opening an Alarms File ceactiscosiccaisctacteacrasas vaceontdcebatialtbentngerskeas 12 16 Requesting Active Alarms for a Device seeeseeeeereeereeen 12 17 Closing the WALKnet Alarm Browser Windows n 12 24 Appendix A WALKair 1000 Trap Descriptions 8 WALKnet User s Manual Contents Appendix B WALKair 3000 Trap Descriptions General Comments ssassn nenene neiaa ainina aaa B 2 Telecom Interface Traps ccccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeens B 3 E1 Port Services Traps siissicisciecicsccsivsesiveccierscadvsesdenrsvavscetsenvieussesesetiesse B 4 E3 Port Services TRAPS accciseesissdesscescieisscuhsavssevscesvscssvederavsoesstersserenevesses B 5 STM1 Port Services rapS sisecisciscecisscccssccssveesseesseavsveveresseessoerscencesstiegss B 7 Devices Taps i iri cuesssvcecesscetuseesiecsthestusueseatvshasusevsstesenesdessseesteritetseessev edeee B 8 Hardware Traps isssssscsssesescsdsaseesacenscesheaanpeaassscaasnessasvasasysbunvassiduisasscaisousiosts B 9 IFO TAPS ssseisscsssssececsedcoss dees secuvensensccensedsuasasestecsssedesnsseentedsnssactnsecessescceades B 10 Radio Link Traps i iscasivsiiccsssssncensensatanscaspesccesscasvendsessessscassensconstocveoacenscce B 11 PREU ia
255. eter DL SNR MIN Current Yalue 28 0 dB Minimum Maximum 2 Specify a minimum value for the parameter in the Minimum field and a maximum value in the Maximum field 3 Click OK WALKnet User s Manual 8 19 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring V5 Call Statistics WALKair provides monitoring of V5 call statistics with details of V5 call statistics for the current 15 minutes and the last 24 hours In addition WALKair accumulates V5 call statistics for up to 96 15 minute intervals and displays parameter values and their graphical representation in a detailed table gt To view V5 call statistics 1 Access the V5 Call Statistics dialog box in one of the following ways In the Base Station BU View select V5 Call Statistics from the Performance menu In the Main window select V5 Call Statistics from the Performance menu Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS dialog box and click OK The V5 Call Statistics dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 7 V5 Call Statistics Dialog Box ProbT 5 Call Statistics olx Location Cell Name RedundancyCell Sector Name RedundencySector BS BU ID ProbT Source Device 123 xj VSinterface Index 2 xj Time Period Current 15 Minutes Last 24 Hours Selected 15 Min Intervals From Time 05 10 01 14 23 42 ow To Time 05 10 01 15 08 42 Parameter TCL MSC PSC MNSC NCE NFCE NTC 4 Reset Counte
256. ether the Ethernet speed is 10 or 100 Mbps When Disable is selected the user can select the Handshake and Ethernet Speed manually see Hand shake and Ethernet Speed below The handshake value Half Duplex Full Duplex or None This field is read only if Auto Negotiation is set to Enable see above The Ethernet interface detected speed None Ether net 10 or Ethernet 100 This field is read only if Auto Negotiation is set to Enable see above WALKnet User s Manual 6 39 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration 6 40 Output Indicates whether the user s LAN is working with a VLAN Data VLAN Tagged Untagged This parameter defines whether the VLAN tag should send in IP packets Status area Oper Status The operational status of the telecom interface Up or Down Port Admin The administrative status of the telecom interface Status Enabled or Disabled From the TS Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box you can do the following Examine the configuration of an onboard Ethernet port Set the Ethernet port administrative status Set the Handshake Full or Half Duplex and the Ethernet Speed 10 or 100 Mbps Set the Ethernet port output VLAN data tag WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters TS E1 Port Configuration gt To configure a TS E1 port In TS View open the TS E1 Port Configuration dialog box in one of the following ways a Double click a
257. ew name and the new name appears in the Title Bar WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 3 Map Management 3 8 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 4 Cell Configuration In This Chapter Workflow on page 4 2 Cell Management on page 4 3 Sector and Shelf Management on page 4 8 Base Station Basic Unit Management on page 4 30 Terminal Station Basic Unit Management on page 4 58 Frequency Planning on page 4 77 Configuring the RFU and Antenna on page 4 82 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Workflow To monitor and manage the WALKair system you must first define and create a representational view of the WALKair system After creating a map to represent the geographical area of the WALKair system described in Chapter 3 Map Management you create and configure the cells within the system The typical workflow for WALKair 3000 and WALKair 1000 is as follows Create a Cell Define Sectors Define and configure melf chassis Define and configure BS Define and configure TS The following sections describe each step of the workflow 4 2 WALKnet User s Manual Cell Management Cell Management The first step in configuring a cell is to create a cell and locate it within a map Cells can be added removed and renamed in a map but they cannot be transferred between maps Creating a New Cell The first step in configuring a ce
258. ewSectort SNMP Poll Timeout sec Jeo BS BU Address fi 0 0 6 126 Minimum Alarm Severity info Ja Seny eG System Name J Name System Location J IP Address System Contact J Location Tx Power fi 5 00000 Contact Tx Default Gain dB 0 00000 Status i Modulation Change Disable xi Oper Status Down Actual IP Mode Bridging Admin Status Disse Ff Configured IP Mode Bridging Fault Status No Faults System Clock Clock Source Selection Manual Clock Source Jintemal xi Clock Redundancy Disable gt f Clock Primary Master Clock Primary Actual Clock Secondary Master gt l Clock Secondary Actual a Response OK Apel Cancel Refresh Heb 3 In the SNMP Configuration area from the Minimum Alarm Severity drop down list select the required Alarm Severity the minimum level of alarms to be displayed The options are as follows Info All alarms displayed Critical Only Critical alarms displayed Major Major and Critical alarms displayed Minor Minor Major and Critical alarms displayed Warning Warning Minor Major and Critical alarms displayed 4 In the Settings area enter or accept the Tx Default Gain value as follows For a system with a 2 Port MUX but does not include WALKair 1000 units the Default Gain 4 automatically For a system with a 2 Port MUX and WALKair 1000 units the Default Gain O type in manually For a system with
259. f Message Information about the status of the download process on the device Notes x Sort the list by clicking on the column headers You can click Refresh to update the display or click Log File to select another previously generated log file 10 14 WALKnet User s Manual Software Download Displaying the Versions Report The Versions report enables you to view the current and backup versions currently installed on a selected device To display a Versions report 1 In the Component Selection tree select the components for which you want to view version information 2 In the Device Selection tree select the specific devices for which you want to view version information 3 From the Versions menu select Versions The Versions report is displayed as shown below Figure 10 9 Versions Report WALKNet Software Versions Of x Doce Current Current Current Stand By Stand By Stand By lt Version Description Checksum Version Description Checksum ProbT 05 43 Active Sw Version 10129 05 30 Standby Sw Version 42895 la ProbT Port2 ETH 05 30 FR_S W_for WALKair 41409 05 43 FR_SW_for WALKair 32326 la ProbT REG 123 05 30 Active Sw Version 60601 05 43 Standby Sw Version 10169 la ProbT REG 123 Port2 ETH 05 30 FR_SW_forWALKair 41409 05 43 FR_SW_for WALKair 32326 la ProbT Ter 05 43 Active Sw Version 10169 05 3a Standby Sw Version 12926 ProbT TS 10 F WALKnet User s Manual 10 15 Chapter 10 Util
260. f Management Figure 5 5 Save Configuration Dialog Box NMS MPU Save Configuration OF Xx Location _ _ _ _ Cell NewCelll Shelf Name NMS MPU Shelf IP Address 10 0 15 59 Save Configuration V Service MV Topology The Cell Name Shelf Name and Shelf IP Address are displayed in the dialog box 2 To save a service configuration check the Service check box 3 To save a Topology configuration check the Topology check box Note x Both Service and Topology can be saved at the same time 4 To apply the changes click Apply 5 Click on OK to complete saving the configuration Uploading and Downloading an MPU Configuration Once an MPU card has been configured its configuration can be uploaded to a server Later on the saved configuration can be downloaded from the server to another MPU or to the original MPU if problems were encountered after changing parameters and it is required to return to the original configuration gt To upload or download an MPU configuration to a server 1 In Sector View from the Shelf menu select Configuration Then select Configuration Load 5 14 WALKnet User s Manual Main Processing Unit MPU Management The Configuration Load dialog box is displayed Figure 5 6 Configuration Load Dialog Box Shelf Configuration Load File ma _se Configuration Location Cell Shelf Name Shelf IP Address Ox Ne
261. failed Clock control detected that the Master Clock Link is operational Clock control detected that the Redundant Clock Card is operational Clock control detected that the Redundant Clock Link is operational Clock control detected that the clock on bus A is OK Clock control detected that the clock on bus B is OK Clock control detected that at least one of the clocks bus A or bus B is OK Clock control detected that system is operating on valid from telecom clock WALKnet User s Manual General Traps General Traps Trap Number 75 76 77 Trap Name in MIB LciAccessOn LciAccessOff DeviceReset Send Criterion An access via LCI was detected An unauthorized access attempt via LCI multiple wrong password was detected LCI access was terminated Device is about to perform a reset WALKnet User s Manual B 25 Appendix B This page left intentionally blank B 26 WALKnet User s Manual c Appendix C WALKair 1000 Error Messages In this Appendix This appendix describes the errors issued by WALKnet Appendix C WALKair 1000 Error Messages WALKnet issues a specific error message when the system receives errors from a device The message contains error codes C 2 Change Configured Port Type on page C 4 El Port Configuration on page C 4 V35 X21 Port Configuration on page C 5 Ethernet Port Configuration on page C 5 QBRI
262. fi 0 o Cancel Help Note The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector for which the BS BU is defined 3 In the IP Address field enter the IP address of the BS BU 4 In the SNMP Poll Interval sec field enter how often the NMS is polling the BS BU 4 30 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management In the SNMP Poll Timeout sec field enter the timeout period If there is no response from the BS BU for this period its status is considered disconnected Click OK The new BS BU is created and is displayed in the selected slot in Sector View Displaying Base Station BU View Base Station BU View enables you to specify the configuration parameters of the BS BU and access associated Terminal Stations gt To access Base Station BU View Base Station BU View is accessed in one of the following ways In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a BS BU node In Sector View by double clicking a BS BU In Sector View by selecting a BS BU and selecting View from the BS BU menu In the Main window by selecting BS BU from the Configuration menu or clicking View BS BU in the toolbar Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and click OK The ProbT Base Station BU View for the selected BS BU is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 31 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 21 B
263. figuration Upload and Download 10 24 WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU Configuration Upload and Download 10 25 Versions and Reset Management cccccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenennes 10 27 WALKair 1000 Software Versions c ccccececeeeeceeceeececeeeneeeeeeeens 10 27 WALKnet User s Manual 7 Contents WALKair 3000 Software Versions cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 10 33 Performing BER ests sciiiicccncatinenasivvemesanesiensnnddincrenuvisivasieuniananeneanins 10 44 Configuring SNMP Parameters ccccccceseesseeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 10 48 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization Integration OvervieW aj iisicicecsciisassinsssaasdeasasaseduseadsoasiensssassenscenseseaeeceebeass 11 2 Alarms Correlation and Object Status Coloring ssseeeeeeeeeeees 11 3 Disabling a Correlation Policy wrsccccencmccsssteatanccanevernevnieaticeecbvavagneces 11 9 Access to WALKair Base Station Element View ccssseeeeees 11 12 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser OVGI VIEW ticrdctancetennutsciedestunciel aaae aE EE ea e EAEE a aaia aaaea 12 2 Alarm Browser Windows cccccccssssssseeceeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeesesseeneeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 4 Manipulating Alarms sssssaneeenennennnnnnrennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 12 9 Sorting Alar MS a srrrsriscsisseosi rinses ainia aa a Ep Ekaa 12 9 Acknowledging Alarms ccccccecessseceeseceeeeseesseeceneeee
264. figuration parameters and examine the shelf elements LEDs a Display configuration information for another shelf in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 a Edit shelf properties see Editing Shelf Properties on page 4 22 SNMP configuration system clock and minimum alarm severity a Edit IF MUX properties see Editing IF MUX Properties on page 4 25 a Define new chassis cards BU NIU or HSC see Creating a New Chassis Slot Card on page 4 27 a Change type or delete existing chassis cards see Changing Chassis Slot Card Type on page 4 27 a Access Chassis Card View and edit properties see Chapter 5 Shelf Management a Move chassis card to a different slot see Moving a Card to Another Chassis Slot in Chassis on page 4 28 a Access IF Unit View for a selected IF Intermediate Frequency Unit see Intermediate Frequency Unit IFU Management on page 5 32 in Chapter 5 Shelf Management a Access Power Supply Unit View for a selected Power Supply Unit see Power Supply Unit PSU Management on page 5 35 in Chapter 5 Shelf Management a Access Power Input Board View Chapter 5 Shelf Management WALKnet User s Manual 4 21 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration E Access Fan View see Fan Management on page 5 39 in Chapter 5 Shelf Management E Save defined system services or topology on the shelf MPU see S
265. figured type the mismatch condition is terminated This Trap is sent when the telecom interface opera tional state is down up This Trap is sent when the event is detected from the customer premises equipment connected to the TS BU serial port This Trap is sent when the V5 2 Link Id procedure fails This Trap is sent when the restart of the V5 interface procedure fails This Trap is sent when an IF Mux connection discon nection is detected This Trap is sent when an RFU redundancy cable con nection disconnection is detected This Trap is sent when an RFU A failure is detected This Trap is sent when an RFU B failure is detected This Trap is sent when switching to the redundant RFU fails A 4 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Trap Descriptions Trap Type ODU Switching To RFUA ODU Switching To RFU B Configuration Download Start Configuration Download End Configuration Download Abort Reset Required Phys If Conf Mis match External Attenua tor Value Changed BU Office Clock Failure ON OFF QBRI U interface LOS ON OFF QBRI T interface LOS ON OFF QBRI Power Feeding Failure ON OFF qtlcm Local Loopback ON OFF Description This Trap is sent when switching from RFU B to RFU A occurrs This Trap is sent when switching from RFU A to RFU B occurrs This Trap is sent when the configuration download process is started This Trap is sent when the configuration do
266. fined the slot number is used as the ATM NIU ID The system name is defined in the ATM NIU Properties Edit dialog box Enables you to display configuration information for another 12xE1 MIU in any shelf within same map Number of the slot in the shelf where this 12xE1 MIU is installed The serial number of the 12xE1 NIU The hardware version of the 12xE1 MIU The card vendor ID Current card status Up Down Test The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable Detected Card Type Area Detected Card Type The auto detected card type It also indicates whether the slot has a card inserted in it or not WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 5 Shelf Management Clock Provider Status area Configured Actual This parameter represents the configured status of the 12xE1 NIU card as a clock provider This parameter represents the actual status of the 12xE1 NIU card as a clock provider Redundancy area Redundancy Status Stand By Status Redundant NIU Slot Interface list at bottom of dialog Interface Type Speed Port Oper Status Port Admin Status Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this card Enabled Disabled Indicates whether the board is a standby device Read only Indicates the slot number of the standby card None i
267. fined for level 3 If the ATM NIU for IP field indicates Ethernet connection or if the selected Class of Service is Bronze this field is read only The VCI VPI defined for level 4 If the ATM NIU for IP field indicates an Ethernet connection this field is read only 5 Click OK The new IP SLA is displayed in the IP SLA List dialog box Editing IP SLAs The IP SLA Name MIR Class of Service can be edited for W3000 Shelf and W3000 Stand Alone BS BU For W3000 Shelf only VPI s VCI s of existing IP SLAs can be edited gt To add an IP SLA 1 In the IP SLA List dialog box select an existing IP SLA from the list of IP SLAs 2 From the JP SLA menu select Edit Double click on the line in the table identical to the Edit selected line option The IP SLA Properties Edit dialog box in edit IP SLA mode appears as shown below 7 64 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management Figure 7 36 IP SLA Properties Edit Dialog Box Shelf Shelf IP SLA Properties Edit Iof x Location _ Ethermet B Cell Name NewCell ollie so fi g VLAN tagging mode Taga CS Shelf ID Shelf CS Local Router IP Addr jo 0 0 0 DestIPAddrBehindLR 0 0 0 0 BS BU ID eu B Subnet Mask Behind LR jo 0 0 0 Default RouterIPAdd o 0 0 0 ee rs2 Subnet Mask v0 00 z BS BU VLAN ID jE PA a Lsvuanio E IP SLA Name fret ea for IP a ae lt ATM Port E CBR VPIAVCI Ej E MIR j River vPI ae ee
268. follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which the NIU has been defined Shelf ID The name of the Shelf for which the NIU has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID ATM NIU ID The system name if defined for the ATM NIU or when no system name is defined the slot number The system name is defined in the ATM NIU Properties Edit dialog box Current Software area Version The active software version Description The description of the active software Stand By Software area Version The current standby version Description The description of the current standby version Card Info area HW Revision The hardware version of a card Vendor ID The card vendor ID gt To switch between current and backup software versions In the ATM NIU Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Switchover WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically resets the ATM NIU WALKnet User s Manual 10 43 Chapter 10 Utilities Performing BER Tests WALKnet enables you to test the BER Bit Error Rate without interfering with the normal WALKair operations The BER meter allows accurate measures of radio air link performance The BER meter counts the exact number of errored bits and reports the error measurement to WALKnet gt To activate the BER Test 1 In the Main window select Utilities from the Tests menu and th
269. formance Monitoring on page 8 50 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring WALKair provides air performance monitoring for the bi directional air link path between a BS BU and the Terminal stations connected to it Air performance monitoring is based on the error performance measurements of 5S msec fixed size air frames Each air frame is monitored by means of a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC WALKair s air performance monitoring is compliant with ITU T Recommendation G 826 and ITU T Recommendation G 821 WALKair provides an air performance summary with details of air performance for the current 15 minutes and the last 24 hours In addition WALKair accumulates APM parameters for up to 96 15 minute intervals and displays these parameter values and their graphical representation ina detailed air performance table Air Performance Summary gt The air performance summary enables you to view the Downlink DL and Uplink UL parameters for selected time intervals To view the air performance summary 1 Access the Air Performance Summary dialog box in one of the following ways In the Terminal Station BU View select Air Performance Summary from the Performance menu In the Main window select Air then Air Performance Summary from the Performance menu Browse to the required TS BU in the Browse TS dialog box and click OK The Air Performance Summary dialog box is displayed as sho
270. from the Shelf menu WALKnet User s Manual 4 19 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Shelf View is displayed Figure 4 15 Shelf View NMS MPU Shelf View Shelf IF MUX Services Location olx Cell NewCelt Shelf IP Address fi 0 0 15 59 Browse Setting Area Number in Rack fi Hw Rev J Serial Number fo Shelf Name JNMS MPU Shelf Location Osnat s room Admin Status Enable i j EFL PSUS amp PSU6 ss 8 ay 9 amp te e e La E RRRRRRRRRRARRRA A Close Refresh Help Response OK 9 The following parameters are displayed in Shelf View Location area Cell Shelf IP Address Browse The name of the cell The IP address of the W3K shelf Enables you to display configuration information in the open Shelf View for any other shelf in any cell within the same map The following parameters will appear in Sector View for sectors defined by the W3000 6 Ports IF MUX for a W3000 Shelf Settings area Number in Rack HW Revision Serial Number The shelf number in the rack The shelf s hardware revision number The shelf s serial number 4 20 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management Shelf Name The system name of the shelf Shelf The physical location of the shelf Location Admin The administrative status of the shelf Status From Shelf View you can do the following a Analyze the shelf con
271. g box and clicking OK Sector View for the selected sector is displayed WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management Figure 4 7 Sector View W1000 IF MUX with WALKair 1000 BS BUs only Sector View Ol x Sector BS BU Location zs Cell wi K_Cell Sector wi K_NMS Lab_Sector O R Ket Re Reo R KIO o THO THO TO THO COCO B Rs 1460 Figure 4 8 Sector View W3000 IF MUX with both WALKair 1000 BS BUs and WALKair 3000 Shelf SERVER Shel Name wx She NewSectee2 Shot IP Address fiss 13975 IF MUX Number fo FE a g WALKnet User s Manual 4 11 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 9 Sector View WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU only Sector Element Location B ca oa Sector View displays the configuration parameters of the selected sector NewCen Sector friewSector2 Browse aiai ne which are read only Roll the mouse over a parameter to display its name if defined or its IP address To modify the configuration parameters see Modifying Sector Properties on page 4 15 The following parameters displayed in Sector View Location area Cell Sector Browse The name of the cell for which this sector has been defined The name of the sector Enables you to display configuration information in the open Sector View for another sector in any cell in the same map The following parameters wil
272. g box is accessed from the Sector Configuration Wizard the Next button applies the shelf properties and opens the Edit IF MUX Properties dialog box bottom window in figure OR 4 16 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management If this dialog box is accessed from selecting Edit Shelf the OK button applies the shelf properties top window in figure Note The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector 2 In the IP Address field select the shelf IP address from the list of defined shelves or select New IP Address and enter the new IP address for the shelf 3 In the SNMP Poll Interval sec field enter how often the NMS is polling the shelf 4 In the SNMP Poll Timeout sec field enter the timeout period If there is no response from the shelf during this period it is considered disconnected The following dialog box is displayed when you change the shelf s IP address Figure 4 13 Update All Sectors Confirmation Message Warning AN Would you like to update all sectors for this shelf Clicking Yes means that for all sectors in which this shelf is referred to the old shelf IP address will be replaced with the new one Clicking No means that only the current sector is updated Edit IF MUX Properties Editing IF MUX properties enables you to select the IF MUX for the sector and to define its parameters gt To edit IF MUX proper
273. g data and V5 call statistics data from BS Bus and TS Bus It also describes how you can monitor the collection process and configure some parameters such as the frequency of collection cycles WALKnet automatically collects the air performance monitoring data and V5 call statistics data from all BS BUs and TS BUs defined on the current map and saves it in the database BS BUs accumulate data in 15 minute intervals for a 24 hour period WALKnet performs data collection on a cyclical basis and collects closed intervals that it has not previously collected A cycle ends when all the BS BUs have been processed You can specify how often WALKnet runs a data collection cycle whether to collect from BS BUs concurrently or consecutively and whether to eliminate selected BS BUs from the collection process Refer to Configuring Performance Data Collection on page 8 35 WALKnet collects data in two modes Client and Server In Server mode WALKnet reads the data from the BS BUs and TS BUs and stores it in the database In Client mode WALKnet does not read from the BS BUs or the TS BUs Instead it provides a view into the database and information about what another WALKnet session is collecting This is to avoid the possibility of multiple WALKnet sessions collecting and storing data in the database A typical management system configuration includes one workstation running WALKnet configured as a collection Server and zero or more WALKnet session
274. gured Port Type dialog box is displayed Figure 6 1 Change Configured Port Type Dialog Box x Location AAae I i i p A_ A i B Cell Name Newe Sector Name fwalkarioco oo BS BU ID sly Pott Pors Port Type Detected Type El Configured Type E o Cancel Apoly Refresh Help Response OK WALKnet User s Manual 6 3 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration 2 In the Configured Type field select the required port type from the dropdown list The available port types are as follows El The port configuration parameters for these E1 FR port types are described on page 6 6 E1 75 1200 V 35 The port configuration parameters for these X 21 ort types are described on page 6 8 V 35 FR 2M poner i X 21 FR 2M V 35 FR 4M X 21 FR 4M Ethernet The port configuration parameters for this port type are described on page 6 10 QBRI The port configuration parameters for this port type are described page on page 6 13 QPOTS The port configuration parameters for this port type are described page page 6 14 Note A QBRI or a QPOTS port can only be configured on a TS BU W 3 Click OK In Base Station BU View or Terminal Station BU View the new port type is displayed as the Configured Type for the selected port Note f You cannot change the configured port type for ports participating in services or for ports with the administrative status Enable 6 4 WALKnet Us
275. h between current and backup software versions In the IF MUX Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Switchover WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically resets the IF MUX WALKnet User s Manual 10 41 Chapter 10 Utilities ATM NIU Software Versions WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located in the ATM NIUs You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time gt To view software versions on an ATM NIU Access the Versions and Reset and Management dialog box in one of the following ways E In ATM NIU View select Versions from the ATM NIU menu Or a In the WALKnet Main Window select Versions from the Utility menu Then select W3000 Components ATM NIU The ATM NIU Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 24 ATM NIU Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box Location B Cell Name Newt Shelf ID wakShef o ATM NIU ID Nu Current Software Version 3 14 Description 3 14 D Standby Software Version 3 4 Description Version 3 4 Card Info Hardware Rerevision Rev 0i Vendor ID fi ese Refresh Reset Switchover Help Q Response OK 10 42 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management The read only parameters displayed in the ATM NIU Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as
276. has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is specified in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box This field is only present when the V5 Interfaces dialog box is accessed from Terminal Station BU View List of Leased Line Services Interface Index Uniquely identifies the interface Device The device BS BU or TS BU on which the interface is defined Type The type of V5 interface supported by the device V5 1 V5 2 QBRI or QPOTS WALKnet User s Manual 7 13 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Interface ID The identification or reference number for the inter face Subscribers The number of subscribers using the V5 interface Oper Status The operational status of the V5 interface In Service or Out of Service Admin Status The administrative status of the V5 interface Enable or Disable By default the administrative status of V5 interfaces is Disable From the V5 Interfaces dialog box you can define new V5 interfaces view and edit the properties of existing interfaces and delete interfaces Adding V5 Interfaces gt 7 14 V5 interfaces are defined on BS BUs and TS BUs However V5 interface
277. he BS BU and TS BU in order to optimize modem per formance Max Tx Power The maximum power value for Tx Initial Rx Power The initial power value for Rx 4 94 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Default Modem Working Point area read only Initial Tx Power The initial power value for Tx for the default modem Max Tx Power The maximum power value for Tx for the default modem Initial Rx Power The initial power value for Rx for the default modem 4 95 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 4 Cell Configuration This page left intentionally blank 4 96 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 5 Shelf Management In This Chapter Hot Swap Controller Management on page 5 2 Main Processing Unit MPU Management on page 5 8 Network Interface Unit Management on page 5 17 Intermediate Frequency Unit IFU Management on page 5 32 Power Supply Unit PSU Management on page 5 35 Power Input Board PIB Management on page 5 37 Fan Management on page 5 39 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Hot Swap Controller Management Creating Hot Swap Controller Cards For detailed description of creating WALKair 3000 HSC card refer to Modifying HSC Properties on page 5 5 Once an HSC has been defined its configuration parameters are accessible Displaying HSC View HSC View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the HSC gt To
278. he BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box List of Leased Line Services BS Port The number of the port in the BS BU BS Port Type The configured BS BU port type E1 E1 75 1200 V 35 or X 21 TS Customer Id The identification number of the TS BU TS Port The number of the port in the associated TS BU TS Port Type The configured TS BU port type E1 E1 75 120Q V 35 or X 21 Bandwidth The bandwidth x 64Kbps allocated for the specified x 64KBPS leased line service Oper Status The operational status of the leased line service Con nected or Disconnected Admin Status The administrative status of the leased line service Enable or Disable From the Leased Line Services dialog box you can add new leased line services between ports and edit or delete existing services WALKnet User s Manual 7 5 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Adding Leased Line Services When adding leased line services you specify the ports on the BS BU and TS BU participating in the service and the bandwidth provided by the service gt To add leased line services 1 In the Leased Line Services dialog box from the Leased Line Services menu select Add The Add Leased Line Service dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Leased Line Service Management Figure 7 4 Add Leased Line Service Dialog Box YAELsky Add Leased Line Service
279. he instructions supplied by Hewlett Packard After installation of HP OpenView test the HP OpenView Discover Your Network and perform a map layout Installing WALKnet on Windows The installation procedure is a standard Windows installation with easy to follow on screen instructions To install WALKnet 1 Install HP OpenView if required 2 Insert the WALKnet CD into your computer s CD ROM drive 3 Navigate to the WALKnet directory Double click the WALKnet exe file to invoke the WALKnet installation wizard 4 Follow the on screen instructions During the installation procedure you must select Standalone HPOV or both The HPOV option is only available if HP OpenView is installed on your computer WALKnet User s Manual 1 7 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet 5 If WALKnet is installed over HP Open View the traps must be customized as follows Open a DOS console window and navigate to the lt OpenView home directory gt bin and perform the ovw fields commands Notes za The installation of WALKnet over HPOV customizes the HPOV Refer to Chapter 11 HPOV Customization for more details If a previous version of WALKnet is installed on your computer remove it and restart your computer before installing this version of WALKnet Installing WALKnet on UNIX The installation CD includes the following files E Readme txt which includes installation instructions E wlkntfl zip which contains WALKnet softw
280. hioo Port Number Settings AA Aaa MAC Address foooooooooooo Auto Negotiation Enae tC S x Handshake Fa Dupes Ethernet Speed JEthemet100 K Dutput VLAN Data asd m Status Oper Status Down Admin Status JEnable xl aj moj ceea raaf e elp Response OK WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters The following parameters are displayed in the TS Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box Location area Cell Name Sector Name Shelf ID BS BU ID TS ID Port Number Settings area MAC Address Auto Negotiation Handshake Ethernet Speed The name of the cell for which this TS has been defined The name of the sector for which this TS has been defined The name of the Shelf for which this TS has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID If this is a Stand Alone TS BU Shelf ID the name of the Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined for the W3000 BS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the W3000 BS BU The system name if defined for the TS or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS The number of the onboard port The MAC address of the Ethernet card This field is read only Two values Enable or Disable When Enable is selected the system automatically senses whether the communication is Full or Half Duplex Handshake and wh
281. iagnostic Matrix Fault ON OFF Diagnostic S W Version Fault ON OFF Diagnostic ORCA Fault ON OFF Diagnostic DSP Fault ON OFF Illegal Service Configuration ON OFF Radio Link Inter ference ON OFF Radio Link Loss ON OFF Most TS Radio Link Loss ON OFF TS Radio Link Loss ON OFF IFU Lock ON OFF RFU Power Loss ON OFF Serv Not Ack ON OFF Software Down load Start End Description This Trap is sent when a Flash memory test fault is detected a Flash memory test is passed This Trap is sent when a Matrix test fault is detected a Matrix test is passed This Trap is sent when the wrong software version is detected the software version test is passed This Trap is sent when the ORCA test fails the ORCA test passes This Trap is sent when the DSP test fails the DSP test passes This Trap is sent when an illegal service configuration is detected when service configuration is OK This Trap is sent when radio link interference is detected by the BS BU the radio link interference con dition is terminated This Trap is sent when the BS BU detects the loss of the Downlink radio link establishment This Trap is sent when the BS BU detects the loss of the radio link with more than 50 of the TS BUs the Most TS Radio Link Loss condition terminated This Trap is sent when the BS BU detects the loss of the radio link with one of the TS BUs registered with it the TS BU Radio Link Loss condition terminated
282. ialog box 1 Access the Configuration Load dialog box in one of the following ways In Base Station BU View select Configuration Load from the BS BU menu In the Main window select Configuration Load from the Utilities menu Select W3000 BSO BU SA and browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS BU dialog box and then click OK The Configuration Load dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 10 25 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 16 Configuration Load Dialog Box W3000 Stand Alone BS BU ioi xi File Configuration Location H_ amp i i yx lt ca_im B Cell Nemc CS Sector NewSecto3 1 BS BU Address fis3 203141 251 Admin Status Enae st S S S Browse FTP Parameters FTP Server IP Address 0o g0 g0 0 FTP Server File Path E Load Action None 88t lt CSst LoadStts Put Get Chose Refresh Heb Response OK 2 If you want to navigate to a different BS BU click Browse and select the appropriate BS BU 3 In the FTP Parameters area enter the Server IP Address and the FTP Server File Path 4 To upload to the server click the Put button or select Put from the Configuration menu Or To download from the server to the BS BU click the Get button or select Get from the Configuration menu 10 26 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management Versions and Reset Management WALKnet enables you to view the resident softwar
283. icates whether redundancy is allowed for this card Enabled Disabled Read write Indicates the slot number of the standby card None indicates that a redundant card is not defined Current card status Up Down Test Read only The severity of the card fault This is summarized information regarding the card s health in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Read only WALKnet User s Manual Main Processing Unit MPU Management Admin Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Status Disable Read write Note f The Cell Name and Shelf ID fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and shelf for which the MPU is defined Note and the title bar of the MPU dialog screens When no system name is entered MPU Slot Number is used to identify the MPU 4 When you define a system name for the MPU that name appears in the MPU ID field Saving an MPU Configuration The configuration of the defined system topology and or defined system services can be saved on the shelf MPU gt To save a configuration on the shelf MPU 1 Open the Save Configuration dialog box in one of the following ways In Sector View from the Shelf menu select Configuration Then select Save Configuration In Shelf View from the Shelf menu select Configuration Then select Save Configuration The Save Configuration dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 5 13 Chapter 5 Shel
284. icates whether the board is a standby device Indicates the slot number of the standby card None indicates that a redundant card is not defined From HSC View you can do the following HM Display configuration information for another HSC in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 E Edit HSC properties see below WALKnet User s Manual Hot Swap Controller Management Deleting HSCs Deleting HSC from a shelf permanently removes the HSC from the shelf gt To delete an HSC For detailed description of deleting WALKair 3000 slot cards refer to Shelf Management on page 4 19 Modifying HSC Properties You can modify the properties of HSC from Sector View Shelf View or HSC View gt To modify HSC properties 1 Open the HSC Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways Select an HSC Card in Sector View Select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then select Edit Card Properties Select an HSC Card in Shelf View Select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then select Edit Card Properties In the HSC View screen select Edit HSC from the HSC menu The HSC Properties Edit dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 5 5 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Figure 5 2 HSC Properties Edit Dialog Box HSC card HSC Properties Edit Ox Location Cell Name RusCell Shelf ID MPU 7 Slot
285. icking a 12xE1 NIU node In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking a 12xE1 NIU Card By selecting a 12xE1 NIU Card in Sector View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then selecting View By selecting a 12xE1 NIU Card in Shelf View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then selecting View The 12xE1 NIU View screen for the selected 12xE1 NIU is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 5 21 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Figure 5 8 12 xE1 NIU View Dialog Box NIU 12 E1 1 12xE1 NIU View 5 22 WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management 12 x E1 NIU Configuration Parameters 12xE1 NIU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected 12xE1 NIU Card The parameters are read only In order to modify the configuration parameters refer to Modifying NIU Properties on page 5 28 The following parameters are displayed in the 12xE1 NIU View dialog box Location area Cell Name Shelf ID 12xE1 NIU ID Browse Button Slot Number Settings area Serial Number HW Revision Vendor ID Status area Oper Status Fault status Admin Status The name of the cell for which this 12xE1 MU has been defined The name of the shelf for which this 12xE1 NMIU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID The system name if defined for the ATM NIU or when no system name is de
286. iew Select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then select Edit Card Properties E In NIU View select Edit NIU from the NIU menu The Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Two examples are shown below one for ATM NIU STM 1 or E3 and one for 12xE1 NIU WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management Figure 5 10 ATM NIU 12xE1 E3 NIU Properties Edit Dialog Boxes STM_O ATM NIU Properties Edit NIU 12 E1 1 12xE1 NIU Properties E dit WALKnet User s Manual 5 29 Chapter 5 Shelf Management NIU Properties Parameters The following parameters are displayed in an NIU Properties Edit dialog box Location area Cell Name Shelf ID Slot Number Settings area System Name Redundancy Status Redundant NIU Slot Number Status area Oper Status Fault status Admin Status Note The name of the cell for which this NIU has been defined The name of the shelf for which this NIU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only Number of the slot in the shelf where this MIU is installed The system name of the NIU Read write Indicates whether redundancy is allowed for this card Enabled Disabled Indicates the slot number of the standby card None indicates that a redundant card is not defined Read write if Redundancy is enabled Current card status Up Down Test Read only The sev
287. ified time interval 15 min or 24 hrs 8 14 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring Detailed Air Performance The detailed air performance parameters include both DL parameters that refer to measurements at the TS and UL parameters that refer to measurements at the BS BU gt To view the detailed air performance parameters 1 Access the Air Performance Summary dialog box in one of the following ways In Terminal Station View select Detailed Air Performance from the Performance menu In the Main window select Air then Detailed Air Performance from the Performance menu Browse to the required TS in the Browse TS dialog box and click OK The Detailed Air Performance dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 5 Detailed Air Performance Dialog Box W3K Shelf Presentation Bu Presentation TS 3 Air Performance Detailed OLX Location 21 08 Cell Name Nesce ttst lt Cs S Sector Name NewSecto ttCt S BS BU ID Presentations o Shelf ID WK She st S S TS ID Presentation t53 oo Time Period C Current 15 Minutes Last 24 Hours Browse Selected 15 Min Intervals From Time 05 13 02 17 28 47 gt To Time 05 13 02 21 08 47 J aL LLL UT cs eka Jk LLL kD edd dU LLL 17 28 17 43 17 58 18 13 18 28 18 43 18 58 19 13 19 28 21 08 Close Get Data Heb WALKnet User s Manual 8 15 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring 2 Se
288. igured for use at this ATM interface Read only The maximum number of VCI Bits that may currently be used at this ATM interface The value is the minimum Max Active VCI bits for this interface and for the inter face s UNI peer Read only The type of primary ATM address configured for use at this ATM interface private nsapE164 nativeE164 or other Read only Specifies the code for incoming OAM Loopback cells that are to be looped back at this interface A value of zero indicates that the management system has not set any loopback location code for this interface The primary address assigned for administrative pur poses for example an address associated with the service provider side of a public network UNI thus the value of this address corresponds with the value of ifPhysAddress at the host side If this interface has no assigned adminis trative address or when the address used for administra tive purposes is the same as that used for ifPhysAddress then this is an octet string of zero length Read only The identifier assigned by a service provider to the net work side of a public network UNI If this interface has no assigned service provider address this is an octet string of zero length The Address length implies the address type no address 0 octets E 164 8 octets or NSAP 20 octets When subaddresses are used the address may represent concate nation of address and subaddress E 164_E 164 16 octets E 16
289. ilscoomrecadentiatmntenendattduegaes 5 28 Moving NIU Slot Positions cxcccschiscntccntcicasavecanthcoaneieatehciuenontiveartiandse 5 31 Accessing Software Reset Management cceeeeeeeeeeetteeees 5 31 Configuring ATM or E1 or E3 Interfaces eeeeee teeter eee 5 31 Intermediate Frequency Unit IFU Management seseeeeeeeeeees 5 32 Displaying IFU Vew sess czeaccczecuessncveteccocaaseecnaccor dsahavebamusteadteas staee 5 32 Power Supply Unit PSU Management 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 35 Displaying PSU Edit Properties c c cceeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeneeeecees 5 35 Power Input Board PIB Management ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneneeeeees 5 37 Displaying PIB Properties 0 1c ccccecscsissscescnsseseeeesediaerneceneneansnecees 5 37 Fan Management sscecstesninnitencansssacwivedernacawsienssedesntscaeneesnseaesenicnsncauanences 5 39 Displaying Fan Edit properties cccceeeeeseeeseeeseenseeneeeeneeees 5 39 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters s s s 6 2 4 WALKnet User s Manual Contents Changing the Configured Port Type eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeee 6 3 Modifying Port Configuration Parameters 0 0 0 eects 6 5 WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters cccceee 6 17 W3000 BS BU Interfaces Configuration ccceeeeeeeeeeereeeeeees 6 17 W3000 TS BU Interf
290. ime Period Traffic Graphs Cell and Shelf details BS BU TS ID and IP SLA details Selecting the monitoring time period Selecting traffic priorities CIR and MIR for viewing Uplink and downlink graphical representations of the traffic rates in kbps Executing WALKair 3000 IP SLA Performance Monitoring gt To access IP SLA performance monitoring Referring to the figure below if the required shelf does not appear in the location area of the dialog click Browse find and select the required shelf and then click OK WALKnet User s Manual 8 51 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8 25 IP SLA Performance Monitoring liat IP SLA Performance File Location Cell W3KCell Shelf IP Address 10 0 15 89 Shelf Name liat Browse SLA ID Selection Time Period BS BU ID BU Slot 6 Last 24 Hours tsi0 ist ooo Selected 15 Min Intervals IP SLA ID ool a Traffic priority Rate Select for Mm r Notes Refresh ioxi Uplink Traffic Downlink Traffic If an IP SLA has not been defined for the selected Terminal Station no IP SLA will be available in the IP SLA ID drop down list Defining IP SLAs is dealt with in Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 3 In the SLA ID selection area select the required BS BU TS ID and the SLA ID for the IP SLA to monitor 4 Select the time period for which you want to view
291. in the following format cell name sector name BS BU name or IP address TS BU Customer ID IF V5 Interface Index Interval The date and time of the last interval collected for the BS BU The BS BU accumulates V5 call statistics for the whole interface so there is no distinction between uplink and downlink Viewing Data for a Selected BS BU 8 30 You can view all the data saved in the database for a selected BS BU or TS BU at any time The data is stored in Excel files CSV format named APM_ lt BS BU IP Address gt _ lt TS_BU Customer Id gt WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection By default data files are saved in the directory lt WALKnet root gt NMSApmLog lt map_name gt You can change the directory name by setting the environment variable NmsApmLogDir gt To view data collected for a specific BS BU TS BU 1 In the Performance Data Collection dialog box select a BS BU TS BU from the APM or V5 tab and click Generate The Select APM Intervals dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 13 Select APM Intervals Dialog Box Select 4PM Intervals Link NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT TS 10 Intervals in DataBase From 12 02 2001 04 20 28PM To 12702 2001 06 05 00 PM Select Intervals From 1270272001 04 20 28 PM To 1270272001 06 05 00 PM ok Cancel This dialog box indicates the available time period for which data for the selected link is available in the dat
292. ined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box Port The number of the port in the BS BU TS BU WALKnet User s Manual 6 13 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration U Interface Settings area parameters set per line interface Select The U interface 1 2 3 or 4 If Loopback Mode U interface will be set see below select the required line inter face 1 2 3 or 4 and then specify the required parameter Loopback Optional Enables loopback testing for the follow Mode ing None Remote Local Payload or Repeater Operational The operational status of the QBRI port This is a Status read only parameter Up Down or Testing QBRI Ports Settings area parameters set per port Power The power feeding of the QBRI port On or Off Feeding If you change this field the following warning is displayed This change may disturb any service on U Interface NOTE The Power Feeding parameter can only be changed if Admin Status is set to Disable see below Admin The administrative status of the QBRI port Status Enable or Disable QPOTS Port Configuration Parameters 6 14 The QPOTS port can only be configured on a TS BU The Port Configuration dialog box for a QPOTS configured port type is shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Figure 6 8 QPOTS Port Configuration Dialog Box Silly QPOTS Port Configuration Location B Cell Name NewCelt
293. ion does not respond to the request within a predefined time interval an error message appears notifying the user 11 12 WALKnet User s Manual Access to WALKair Base Station Element View that the time limit has expired If this happens the current WALKnet session should be closed manually and the user should attempt to open the WALKair Base Station Element View window again To change the timeout value for a WALKnet response follow this procedure 1 Right click the desired WALKair element and select Object Properties from the displayed popup menu The Object Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 11 6 on page 11 10 2 Select WALKair Attributes from the Attributes area and click OK An Attributes dialog box with the specific WALKair attributes appears as shown in Figure 11 7 on page 11 10 3 Select WALKnet response timeout choose a value between five and 60 seconds in the dialog box that is displayed and then click OK for the new value to take effect WALKnet User s Manual 11 13 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization This page left intentionally blank 11 14 WALKnet User s Manual 2980 12 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser In This Chapter This Chapter describes the WALKnet Alarm Browser Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser Overview 12 2 From WALKnet Version 7 7 as an alternative to HP OpenView you can use the WALKnet Alarms Browser to view the SNMP traps that
294. ional Status Mandatory The A interface 1 2 3 or 4 Select 1 and specify the Line Start Type and Line AC Impedance and then select 2 and specify the Line Start Type Line and AC Impedance and so on Optional Enables loopback testing for the follow ing None Local or XPayload If the mode is speci fied is XPayload then a second member line interface must be selected under XPayload Loop back Pair see below Optional If Loopback Mode see above was set to XPayload then the second member of the line inter face pair must be selected Mandatory Enables the following Line Start options Loop Start or Ground Start This parame ter should be specified for each A interface Mandatory Enables the selection of one of the fol lowing impedances for an A interface 600Q 900Q 600Q 216uF 900Q 216uF 270 750Q 150uF 220 8200 120uF 220 820Q 115uF 370 6200 310uF This parameter must be specified for each A interface The operational status of the line interface The sta tus can be Up Down or Testing reflecting the readi ness of the line to provide a service This parameter is grayed and cannot be changed Port Settings area parameters set per port Ring Voltage Vrms Admin Status Operational Status Mandatory Enables the user to enter a value for the Ring Voltage between 20 Vrms and 60Vrms NOTE the Ring Voltage can only be changed if the Admin Status is set to Disable see below The administr
295. is is the SLA description as set by an Operator The Leased Line bandwidth size is the number of air time slots ATS used within this E1 port for this SLA This parameter provides the summarized bandwidth of all services that use this SLA Each ATS is 64 Kbps so the actual bandwidth allocated for this TDM SLA equals the number of ATSs x 64Kbps This is the number of the E1 port one of the two E1 ports on the TS by which the SLA is served The E1 Interface framing format WALKnet User s Manual 7 71 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 7 From the TDM SLA List dialog box you can add a new TDM SLA and edit or delete an existing TDM SLA TDM SLAs can be added for either an ATM NIU or a 12xE1 NIU Notes The TDM SLA Add Edit and Delete menu items are disabled until you select the BS BU ID and TS ID Adding TDM SLAs gt 7 72 Before adding a TDM SLA ports must be defined on the BS BU and on the TS BU When adding a TDM SLA you specify the TDM SLA Name and E1 port number on the TS For a W3000 Shelf if the connection is established via an ATM NIU card you can specify the VPI VCI values and if the connection is established via a BS BU Ethernet port then the VPI VCI fields are disabled and blank For a 12xE1 NIU first channel is specified To add a TDM SLA 1 In the TDM SLA List dialog box select Add from the TDM SLA menu The Add TDM SLA dialog box that is displayed depends on whether the
296. istrative status WALKnet User s Manual 6 27 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration W3000 BS BU 12 x E1 NIU Ports Configuration on a Shelf 12xE1 NIU port parameters can be only accessed on the 12xE1 NIU card The E1 port is configured using the 12xE1 NIU Port Properties dialog box gt To configure an E1 port In 12xE1 NIU View open the NIU 12xE1 Port Properties dialog box in one of the following ways a In the Interface Table double click the E1 port you want to configure a In the Interface Table select the E1 port you want to configure and then select Edit Port from the Port menu The E1 Port Properties dialog box is displayed Figure 6 13 Shelf BS BU 12 x E1 Port Properties Dialog Box NIU 12 E1 1 E1 Port Properties ioj x Location Cell Name Newelt CS Shelf ID mpu 12KE1 NIU ID Nue Port Number DE E1 Settings nia Line Type Framed No CRC x Loss Alarm Mode ITUT xv Signaling Mode Transparent x Loopback Mode None x Port Status riirii Oper Status Down Admin Status Disable yi Assigned Channel Map SSSRESSEERRSEEEE SOS SSS o Apply Cancel Refresh Help elp Q Response OK 6 28 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters 12 x E1 Configuation Parameters The following parameters are displayed in the 12 x E1 Port Properties dialog box Location area Cell Name Shelf ID 12xE1 NIU ID
297. ities Information about the software versions installed on the selected device is displayed in the following fields Device The type of device Current Version The current version Current The description of the current version Description Current The CRC of the current version Checksum Standby Version The current standby version Standby The description of the current standby version Description Standby The CRC of the current standby version Checksum Notes The LED to the left of the device name indicates the communication sta tus with the device When communication fails only the LED and Device information are displayed You can click Refresh to update the display or click Save to save the versions report Versions reports are saved in files named VER date time log and placed in the directory defined by the NMS_LOG environment variable sub directory INVENTORY Single Device Download You can download software to an individual WALKair 1000 BS BU or TS BU gt To download software to a single device 1 In Base Station BU View select Software Download from the BS BU menu The Software Download dialog box is displayed as shown below 10 16 WALKnet User s Manual Software Download Figure 10 10 Software Download Dialog Box iveProbT Software Download Location B Cell Name NewCein Sector Name NewSectort 8S BU ID JResevePiobT TFTP Parameters Server IP Address fo miot ts
298. k Average Received Signal Level The average signal level received at the antennaport of the TS s RF Unit or the BS BU s RF Unit in dBm Uplink Minimal Transmit Signal Level The minimum transmitted signal level at the antenna port of the TS s RF Unit in dBm Uplink Maximal Transmit Signal Level The maximum transmitted signal level at the antenna port of the TS s RF Unit in dBm Uplink Average Transmit Signal Level The average transmitted signal level at the antenna port of the TS s RF Unit in dBm Downlink Uplink Frame Errors Rate The FER at the TS or BU This is measured by the number of received errored air frames divided by the total number of received air frames during a given time period Setting the Parameter Range WALKnet enables the display of several graphs simultaneously in the Detailed Air Performance dialog box The counters have different ranges and you can specify the minimum and maximum values for each counter in the Set Parameter Range dialog box WALKnet then uses the minimum and maximum values to scale the graphical display for the counter gt To set the parameter range 1 Double click the value column the column to the right of the Graph column of a selected parameter The Set Parameter Range dialog box is displayed as shown below 8 18 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring Figure 8 6 Set Parameter Range Dialog Box Set Parameter Range Param
299. k Source Status up Clock Primary Master Clock Primary Actual a a Slot 1 NIU Sit 1 NIU Type ATM NIU NIU Type JATM NIU Clock Source Port 1 Clock Source Por 1 Clock Secondary Master Clock Secondary Actual MMmi _ _ ____ NIU Slot 1 NIU o NIU Type ATM NIU NIU Type ATM NIU Clock Source Port 2 Clock Source Por 2 Response OK 2 In the SNMP Poll Interval sec field enter in how often the NMS is polling the shelf in seconds 3 In the SNMP Poll Timeout sec field enter the timeout period in seconds If there is no response from the shelf within this period its status is considered disconnected 4 In the SNMP Configuration area from the Minimum Alarm Severity drop down list select the required Alarm Severity the minimum level of alarms to be displayed The options are as follows Info All alarms displayed Critical Only Critical alarms displayed Major Major and Critical alarms displayed Minor Minor Major and Critical alarms displayed oO oO Oo gt O Warning Warning Minor Major and Critical alarms displayed 5 Modify the text fields identifying the name location of the system and a contact person WALKnet User s Manual 4 23 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 6 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the shelf from the dropdown list Note f The system default for the clock source is a Clock Primary Master in an NIU card on
300. l Duplex or None This field is read only if Auto Negotiation is set to Enable see above The Ethernet interface detected speed None Ether net 10 or Ethernet 100 This field is read only if Auto Negotiation is set to Enable see above Indicates whether the user s LAN is working with a VLAN This value Tagged is read only This parameter defines whether the VLAN tag should send in IP packets The operational status of the telecom interface Up or Down This field is read only The administrative status of the telecom interface Enable or Disable From the W3000 BS BU Ethernet Port Configuration dialog box you can do the following a Examine the configuration of an onboard Ethernet port a Set the Ethernet port administrative status a Set the Handshake Full or Half Duplex and the Ethernet Speed 10 or 100 Mbps WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters W3000 E1 Ports Configuration for a Stand Alone BS BU The W3000 Stand Alone BS BU supports the E1 port interface gt To configure the E1 port on a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU 1 In BS BU View open the BS E1 Port Configuration dialog box in one of the following ways Double click a line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen Select a line in the port configuration table located at the bottom of the screen and then select Edit Port from the Port menu to display the W3000 BS BU
301. l Establishments The number of calls establishments that occurred during the selected time period Number of Failed Call Establishments The percentage of call establishments that failed due to lack of free air channels during the selected time period Number of Terminated Calls The percentage of calls terminated due to air link loss ALL during the selected time period 8 22 WALKnet User s Manual V5 Call Statistics Setting the Parameter Range WALKnet enables the display of several graphs simultaneously in the V5 Call Statistics dialog box The counters have different ranges and you can specify the minimum and maximum values for each counter in the Set Parameter Range dialog box WALKnet then uses the minimum and maximum values to scale the graphical display for the counter To set the parameter range 1 Double click the value column the column to the right of the Graph column of a selected parameter The Set Parameter Range dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 8 8 Set Parameter Range Dialog Box t Parameter Range Parameter DL SNR MIN Current Yalue Minimum Maximum ok Cancel Help 2 Specify a minimum value for the parameter in the Minimum field and a maximum value in the Maximum field 3 Click OK WALKnet User s Manual 8 23 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Performance Data Collection This section describes how WALKnet collects the air performance monitorin
302. l appear in Sector View for sectors defined by the W3000 6 Ports IF MUX for a W3000 Shelf Location Area Shelf only Shelf Name Shelf IP Address IF MUX Number The name of the WALKair 3000 shelf The IP address of the WALKair 3000 shelf The number of IF MUXs selected to serve this sec tor The value is between O and 7 as defined by the DIP switch on the IF MUX From Sector View you can do the following 4 12 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management Display configuration information for another sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 Edit sector properties see Modifying Sector Properties on page 4 15 Assign frequencies to BS BUs see Frequency Planning on page 4 77 Configure RFU and antenna parameters for this sector see Configuring the RFU and Antenna on page 4 82 Define new BS BUs see Creating Base Station Basic Units on page 4 30 Modify or delete existing BS BUs see Deleting and Editing BS BUs on page 4 34 Access Base Station BU View for a selected BS BU see Displaying Base Station BU View on page 4 31 Move a BS BU to a different slot see Moving BS BU Slot Positions on page 4 37 For sectors defined by a W3000 6 Ports IF MUX you also can do the following a Edit shelf properties see Editing a Shelf on page 4 16 a Edit IF MUX properties see Edit IF MUX Properties o
303. larm Browser Requesting Alarms from a WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU gt To request alarms from a WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU 1 Access Sector View see Accessing Sector View on page 12 19 Figure 12 12 W3000 Stand Alone Sector View Sector View Ol x Sector Element Loca W100065 BU gt Cell cee nn ector3 Browse New Delete Edit Close Refresh Heb 2 In Sector View click on the WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU you want to display alarms for 3 From the Element menu select W1000 BS BU Get Active Alarms In the WALKair Alarms Monitor window the latest alarms for the selected device are displayed Closing the WALKnet Alarm Browser Windows gt To close the WALKair Alarms Monitor or Alarms History window Click on the Cos button in the window 12 24 WALKnet User s Manual Appendix A WALKair 1000 Trap Descriptions In this Appendix WALkair 1000 traps associated with WALKnet Appendix A Trap Type E1 Local Loop back ON OFF E1 Remote Pay load ON OFF E1 Payload Loop back ON OFF E1 Channel Loop back ON OFF Telecom Dis abled Enabled E1 Alarm Indica tion Signal ON OFF E1 Loss of Frame Alignment ON OFF E1 Loss of Signal ON OFF E1 Loss of Multi frame Alignmen tON OFF E1 Remote Alarm Indication CRC ON OFF E1 Remote Alarm Indication ON OFF Telecom IF Fault ON OFF BU Dis abled Enab
304. layed in the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box Editing Frame Relay Ethernet Services The properties of a Frame Relay Ethernet service can be modified as required gt To edit Frame Relay Ethernet services 1 In the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box select an existing service from the list of services 2 From the Service menu select Edit The Edit Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 38 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration Figure 7 22 Edit Frame Relay Ethernet Service Dialog Box Sill Edit Frame Relay Ethernet Service Location Cell Name fw K_Cell B Sector Name NewSector3 BS BU ID sin JBS BU Port 1 s 1 0 Port 2 DLC UpLink Committed Burst size BC Kbits UpLink Excess Burst size BE Kbits UpLink Committed Information Rate UCIR Kbits Sec DownLink Committed Burst size BC Kbits th DownLink Excess Burst size BE Kbits DownLink Committed Information Rate DCIR Kbits Sec 7 Reserved Committed Information Rate LLCIR Kbits Sec f Default Gateway IP Address fi10 110 110 110 Local Router IP Address 110 110 110 111 VLAN Id None IP Subnet 110 110 110 112 Local Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Routing Method Source yi Admin Status Inactive x ox Appt Cancel Refresh Help elp Response OK Q 3 When the service is defined over Ethernet modify all fields as
305. ld enter the number of BS BUs that WALKnet can collect data from at the same time The value must be between 1 and 10 Notes z d To collect data more quickly increase the Max Concurrency value 3 Click Apply 4 To specify which BS BUs to include in the data collection process click BS BUs The Select APM BSBUs To Enable dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 8 35 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8 18 Select APM BSBUs To Enable Dialog Box WALKNet Select APM BSBUs To Enable r4 yakov E M w Newell E M NewSectori M c ProbT lo ei Y 4 b Selection ProbT o Notes z By default all BS BUs are selected meaning they will be included in the collection process Disabling BS BUs from the collection process is done per tab or per type of data In the above example the BS BUs button was clicked with the APM tab displayed and any subsequent disabling of BS BUs relates only to the collection of air performance monitoring data 5 Uncheck the BS BUs that you want to eliminate from the data collection process and click OK WALKnet only collects air performance monitoring data from the selected BS BUs during the next collection cycle 6 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 from the V5 tab if required and uncheck the BS BUs from which WALKnet will not collect V5 call statistics data Notes Ea To enable disabled BS BUs repeat Steps 4 to 6 and reselect the deselected B
306. le if the Service Operational Status is Invalid 226 AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable Device cannot allocate the bandwidth for this service on the BS TS side 227 The Service can be defined only over the E1 or V35 X21 configured Telecom port 228 Inconsistent bit rate between E1 and V35 X21 Telecom ports selected for the service 229 Internal device problem WALKnet User s Manual C 7 Appendix C Edit Leased Line Services Error Type 230 231 232 233 Description Inconsistent service configuration and Telecom port configuration AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable if the Service Operational Status is Invalid AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable E1Channels are not available for this Service AdminStatus cannot be changed to Enable if the Telecom Interface AdminStatus is Disabled Internal device problem V5 Interfaces Error Type 310 311 Description Internal device problem Delete Interface is allowed only when AdminStatus is Disable and OperStatus is Out of Service Add V5 Interfaces Error Type 320 321 322 C 8 Description The E1 port is already in use by another service Invalid Telecom Ports configuration if the port type is E1 only CCS Signaling mode is allowed Internal device problem WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages Edit V5 Interfaces Error Type 330 331 332 Description The E1 port is alrea
307. lect the time period for which you want to view detailed air performance by selecting one of the following Current 90 Minutes Displays the reported performance parameters for the current 90 minute interval Last 24 Hours Displays the reported performance parameters for the last 24 hour period including the current 15 minute interval Selected 15 Min Intervals Displays the reported performance parameters for up to 96 15 minute intervals 3 If you select Selected 15 Minute Intervals select the time interval by selecting start and finish times from the dropdown lists in the From Time and To Time fields Notes The From Time and To Time fields are only displayed when Selected 90 Min Intervals is selected HK 4 In the list of parameters select the Graph checkbox to the right of a parameter to display that parameter in the graph 5 Click Get Data Values for the air link parameters for the selected time interval are displayed in the column to the right of the Graph column The graph displays air performance measurements for the selected parameters The colors of the lines in the graph match the corresponding color surrounding the selected checkbox of the parameter Notes When you select Current 15 Minutes as the time interval the Get Data button becomes a Stop button Clicking Stop terminates the accumulation of air link measurements 8 16 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring
308. led Diagnostic RAM Fault ON OFF Diagnostic E2PROM Fault ON OFF Description This Trap is sent when the E1 telecom interface enters exits the Local Loopback state This Trap is sent when the E1 telecom interface enters exits the Remote Loopback state This Trap is sent when the E1 telecom interface enters exits the Payload Loopback state This Trap is sent when the E1 telecom interface enters exits the Channel Loopback state This Trap is sent when the operational status of the telecom interface becomes Disabled Enabled This Trap is sent when the AIS is detected terminated on the E1 interface This Trap is sent when the LFA is detected terminated on the E1 interface This Trap is sent when the LOS is detected terminated on the E1 interface This Trap is sent when the LMFA is detected termi nated on the E1 interface This Trap is sent when the RAI and CRC errors are detected terminated on the E1 interface This Trap is sent when the RAI is detected terminated on the El interface This Trap is sent when a telecom interface fault is detected terminated This Trap is sent when the BS BU operational status becomes Disabled Enabled This Trap is sent when a RAM test fault is detected a RAM test is passed This Trap is sent when an E2PROM test fault is detected an E2PROM test is passed A 2 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Trap Descriptions Trap Type Diagnostic Flash Fault ON OFF D
309. led default value e TS Type A TS unit 2 x Ethernet only e TS Type B TS unit 2 x Ethernet 4 x El e TS Type C TS unit 2 x Ethernet 8 x El e TS Type D TS unit 4 x Ethernet 2 x El Configured Type One ofthe available options is displayed according to your system e Not Installed default value e TS Type A TS unit 2 x Ethernet only e TS Type B TS unit 2 x Ethernet 4x El e TS Type C TS unit 2 x Ethernet 8 x E1 e TS Type D TS unit 4 x Ethernet 2 x El Status area Oper Status Current card status Up Down Test Admin Status Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable Fault status The severity of the TS fault This is summarized infor mation regarding the card s status in the slot No Faults Minor Major Critical Port area Interface Type Select either Ethernet or E1 Speed The data transfer rate in Kbps Oper Status The operational status of the port up or down Admin Status The administrative status of the port Enable Disable From TS View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another TS in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 WALKnet User s Manual 4 73 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration a Edit TS properties see Modifying TS BU Properties on page 4 65 a Access the RFU and Antenna properties a Edit the configuration of onboard E1 and Ethernet ports a Access Air Perform
310. les you to create a new cell Cell Enables you to open Cell View for a selected cell Sector Enables you to open Sector View for a selected sector Shelf Enables you to open Shelf View for a selected shelf W3000 Shelf Enables you to open BS BU Main Processing Unit MPU Network Interface Unit ATM NIU or Hot Swap Controller HSC Views for a selected Shelf component W3000 BS BU SA Enables you to open WALKair 3000 for a Stand Alone BS BU W1000 BS BU Enables you to open WALKair 1000 for a selected BS BU Goto Terminal Enables you to open TS BU View for a selected TS BU Terminals Enables you to display the Terminal Stations registered to a selected BS BU WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Main Window Frequencies Enables you to assign frequencies to BS BUs RFU and Antenna Enables you to configure RFU and antenna parameters for BS BUs and TS BUs Authorized Managers Enables you to define Trap destinations and authorized managers W3000 Services Enables you to define services between telecom ports of a WALKair 3000 system Services Enables you to define services between telecom ports of a WALKair 1000 system Refresh Updates the status of devices on the map Performance Menu Air Call Statistics Frame relay Collection b IP SLA Performance The Performance menu includes the following options Air Provides access to a summary of air performance and detailed sta
311. lf the slot number of the BS BU is used as the BS BU ID TS ID The TS system name if defined or when no system name is defined the customer id ID of the TS is used as the TS ID The system name is defined in the TS Properties Edit dialog box Serial number Device identifier given during production Browse Button Enables you to display configuration information for another TS in any sector in any cell in the same map Settings area Actual Current RF channel that is indicates the frequency Frequency Band currently used for transmission Configured The frequency currently selected for transmission Frequency Band This RF channel will becomes active after the next reset At reset the Active RF channel is set to Config ured Actual Modem The actual Modem Modulation for Uplink and Down Modulation link Possible values e Qam e Qpsk Recommended The recommended Modem Modulation Modem Modulation 4 72 WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Estimated BS TS The distance in kilometers between the Base Station distance km and the Terminal Station as estimated by the Opera tor Rx Operating The target Rx power per carrier in dBm at the Point antenna The default value is 80 dBm Use the following format 80 00000 VOP Admin VOP Variable Operating Point Status Enable or Disable Detected and Configured area Detected Type One of the available options is displayed e Not Instal
312. link direction WALKnet User s Manual 7 35 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration DOWN CIR Kbits Sec LLCIR Kbits S VLAN ID IP Subnet Peer DLCI Status Oper Status Admin Status Concentration Ratio CRO The Committed Information Rate measured in Kbits per second for the PVC end point in the downlink direction The Leased Line Committed Information Rate measured in Kbits per second for the PVC end point This bandwidth is permanently allocated for the service The identification of the virtual LAN This field is only enabled when service is defined over Ethernet The IP address of the IP subnet related to this Frame Relay connection This field is only enabled when service is defined over Ethernet When the Port Type is UUNI or NUNI the Peer DLCI Status is None When the Port Type is NNI the Peer DLCI Status is Deleted Active Inactive or None The operational status of the PVC connection The administrative status of the PVC connection Active or Inactive The quality of service for the DLCIs with CIR equal to 0 QOS is supplied according to the following rule if CRO is n for each n DLCIs with CIR 0 a single ATS 64 K is allocated Adding Frame Relay Ethernet Services Frame Relay Ethernet services can only be defined when the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box is accessed from Base Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window Notes Ensure that you hav
313. list where the ATM NIU or 12 x E1 NIU card that will be the Primary Clock Master is placed in the Clock Primary Master field Select also the port on the card from the Clock Source drop down list WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management 12 If you selected Manual as the selection mode and NIU as the clock source and you have enabled Clock Redundancy In the Clock Secondary Master field select a slot number where the ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU card that will be Secondary Clock Master is placed Select Not Specified for when no Secondary Master is defined this is for redundancy disabled 13 Click OK to save any modifications made to the properties of the Shelf Note z The Cell Name and IP Address fields are read only fields that display the cell name and the Shelf IP address Editing IF MUX Properties gt To edit IF MUX properties 1 Open the W3000 IF MUX Properties dialog box in one of the following ways In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking an IF MUX node In Shelf View by double clicking an IF MUX In Shelf View by selecting an IF MUX and selecting Edit Properties from the JF MUX menu The W3000 IF MUX Properties Edit dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 25 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 17 W3000 IF MUX Properties Edit Dialog Box Location zs Cell Name W3K_Cell Sector Name 206_5 ector Shelf Name Shel_NMS Shelf IP Address fi
314. ll is to create a cell To create a cell a map must be open in the WALKnet workspace gt To create a new cell 1 Open a map 2 From the Configuration menu select New Cell or right click in the Workspace and select New Cell from the options displayed The Cell Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 1 Cell Properties Edit Dialog Box Cell Properties Edit Joj x Name NewCelll Description This is cell NewCelll Cancel Hep 3 In the appropriate fields enter a Name with no blank spaces and Description for the cell and click OK A cell icon pa representing the new cell is displayed in the top left corner of the workspace 4 Click the cell icon and keeping the mouse button pressed drag it to the required location on the map as in the example below WALKnet User s Manual 4 3 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 2 Locating Cell on Map You have now defined a cell with no configuration properties The next step is to configure the cell by defining sectors within it See Sector and Shelf Management on page 4 8 for details Displaying Cell View gt Cell View displays configuration information for a cell and enables you to configure a cell by defining sectors within it To access Cell View Cell View is accessed from the Main window in one of the following ways a In the Network Navigation Tree by double clicking a cell node a In the workspace by
315. lly blank 1 20 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 2 Getting Started In This Chapter Starting WALKnet on page 2 2 WALKnet Main Window on page 2 4 WALKnet Navigation Model on page 2 15 Error Information on page 2 22 Updating Information on page 2 23 If you are already familiar with the application go to Chapter 4 Cell Configuration for more detailed instructions about procedures Chapter 2 Getting Started Starting WALKnet The procedure for starting WALKnet varies according to whether it is installed over HP OpenView or as a standalone application a When installed over HP OpenView invoke WALKnet from HP OpenView by selecting Run_WALKNet from the HP OpenView Main menu a When installed as a standalone application over HP OpenView invoke WALKnet as described below When installed over HP OpenView as a standalone application you can invoke WALKnet using either of the above methods gt To start WALKnet without HP OpenView on UNIX E When WALKnet is installed on UNIX WALKnet is invoked by activating Run_WALKnet from the installation directory gt To start WALKnet without HP OpenView on Windows 1 From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt WALKnet gt WALKnet The WALKnet Login dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 2 1 WALKnet Login Dialog Box WaALKnet Login k i0 x WALKNet Version 7 7 User Name Password
316. log box select Add User from the Authorization menu The New User dialog box is displayed Figure 9 3 New User Dialog Box New User User Name 0 User Type Administrator x Password Confirm Password Oe ok Cancel Help 2 Enter a name for the new user in the User Name field This is the name the user must enter in the WALKnet Login dialog box when starting WALKnet see Chapter 2 Getting Started 3 Select a user type from the dropdown list in the User Type field The user type will determine the amount of access the user will have to WALKnet functions 4 Enter a password for the new user in the Password field This is the password the user must enter in the WALKnet Login dialog box in order to access WALKnet see Chapter 2 Getting Started 5 Re enter the password in the Confirm Password field 6 Click OK The new user is displayed in the List of users in the Authorization dialog box 9 4 WALKnet User s Manual Specifying User Types Editing Users An Administrator user can edit an existing user in the WALKnet system by modifying their user type and password Note All users can change their own password Only Administrator users can change all users passwords and user types gt To edit a user 1 In the Authorization dialog box select a user in the List of users and select Edit User from the Authorization menu The Edit User dialog box is displayed Figu
317. log box select a full configuration file and click Download The configuration in the selected file is downloaded to the current BS BU Notes If the selected configuration file is empty an error message is displayed When the download process is completed the Load Status field displays Successful The configuration download process is about three or four minutes long If the BS BU cannot perform the download process the Load Status field displays General Error You should try again a short time later The download process can also be rejected by the BS BU if it finds a problem with the file In this case the Load Status field indicates the problem WALKair 3000 Shelf Configuration Upload and Download See Chapter 5 Shelf Management 10 24 WALKnet User s Manual Configuration Upload and Download WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU Configuration Upload and Download A WALKair 3000 Stand Alone BS BU stores the configuration for itself and all its registered TS BUs in non volatile memory The configuration can be uploaded from the BS BU and saved in the WALKnet database and downloaded from the WALKnet database to any other BS BU This enables backup of your WALKair 3000 system configuration and can also speed up the configuration process or be used for BS BU replacement Uploading and downloading BS BU configurations are performed from the Configuration Load dialog box gt To access the Configuration Load d
318. lure state LOS Receiving LOS failure state LoopbackState Looping the received signal RevTestCode Receiving a Test Pattern OtherFailure Any line status not defined here UnavailSigState Near End in Unavailable Signal State NetEquipOOS Carrier Equipment Out of Service The current loopback state of the SONET SDH interface The values mean NoLoop Not in the loopback state A device that is incapable of performing a loopback on this interface will always return this value FacilityLoop The received signal at this interface is looped back out through the corresponding transmit ter in the return direction TerminalLoop The signal to be transmitted is con nected to the associated incoming receiver OtherLoop Loopbacks that are not defined here Describes the way the ATM cells are mapped into the E3 frame Options are PLCP or Direct mapping Describes the length of the E3 line coax Options are Short or Long WALKnet User s Manual 6 35 Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Scrambling Determines whether scrambling is performed at the E3 Options are On or Off Framing Determines the framing used options are G 751 or G 832 Status area Oper Status The operational status of the telecom interface Up or Down Read only Port Admin The administrative status of the telecom interface Status Enable or Disable From the E3 Port Properties dialog box you can do the following a Configure the parameters
319. m name is defined the slot number of the BS BU W3000 Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS The number of the SLA for the IP Data service Up to 16 SLA for an IP Data service can be defined on a particular TS The SLA ID is unique for this TS This field is read only This is IP SLA description Summarized SLA Committed Information Rate This rate is calculated as the sum of all CIR s assigned for all Clients that share this SLA for IP services This field defines the Committed Information Rate for the entire IP traffic The system guarantees this rate to be transferred in the air This field is read only This parameter defines the Maximum Information Rate this pipe can achieve providing that free BW is available for allocation to it The pipe rate cannot exceed this number This parameter defines the Class of Service of this SLA Platinum Gold Silver or Bronze 7 62 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Management Eth port VLAN tagging mode Local Router IP Addr Dest IP Addr Behind LR Subnet Mask Behind LR Default Router IP Addr Subnet Mask BS BU VLAN ID TS VLAN ID Ethernet area ATM NIU for IP This is the number of the Ethernet port one of the four Ethernet ports on the TS by which the SLA is serve
320. mation a trapSource predefined string that represents the entity that transmitted the trap or on behalf of which the trap is transmitted by the MPU a Note The WALKnet application for HP Open View correlates Traps according to Trap numbers in BuAlrmType the information in BuAlrmData trapSource B 2 WALKnet User s Manual Telecom Interface Traps Telecom Interface Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Send Criterion Number 1 TelecomIfChangedOn Telecom interface fault is detected Telecom interface is operationally down Admin status of the telecom interface becomes enable 2 TelecomIfChangedOff Telecom interface fault is terminated Telecom interface is operationally up Admin status of the telecom interface becomes enable WALKnet User s Manual B 3 Appendix B E1 Port Services Traps Trap No 3 B 4 Trap Name in MIB TelecomLoopbackOn TelecomLoopbackOff El1lfChangedOn E1lfChangedOFF Send Criterion Telecom Interface enters the Local Loopback state Telecom Interface enters the Remote Loopback state Telecom Interface enters the Payload Loopback state Telecom Interface exits the Local Loopback state Telecom Interface exits the Remote Loopback state Telecom Interface exits the Payload Loopback state LOS is detected on the E1 interface LFA is detected on the E1 interface LMFA is detected on the E1 interface Multiframe is not detected on the El interface after double frame
321. mended Modem Modulation Terminal Area Terminal Station Index Customer ID Configured Type Settings area System Name System Location System Contact Estimated BS TS distance km Rx Operating Point VOP Admin Status Admin Status Two available Modem Modulation values for Uplink and Downlink e Qam e Qpsk Sequential number set by the program for the Termi nal Station Cannot be changed by the user Important The customer ID can only be entered once when a new TS is created It cannot be edited later One of the available options is displayed according to your system e Not Installed default value e TS Type A TS unit 2 x Ethernet only e TS Type B TS unit 2 x Ethernet 4 x El e TS Type C TS unit 2 x Ethernet 8 x E1 e TS Type D TS unit 4 x Ethernet 2 x El The System Name is used as the TS ID If the system name is not defined WALKnet uses the Customer ID as the TS ID Optional Optional This field is mandatory The distance in kilometers between the Base Station and the Terminal Station as estimated by the Operator Enter an integer between O and 15000 0 15 Km This field is mandatory Enter the target Rx power per carrier in dBm at the antenna in the Rx Operat ing Point field The default value is 80 dBm Use the following format 80 00000 VOP Variable Operating Point Select either Enable or Disable The administrative status of th
322. meters for WALKair 1000 TS BU 1 In Terminal Station BU View select RFU and Antenna from the Terminal menu The Terminal RFU amp Antenna dialog box is displayed Figure 4 54 WALKair 1000 Terminal RFU and Antenna Current Modem Working Point dBm Default Modem Working Point dBm ProbT Terminal RFU amp Antenna e x Location B Cell Name NewCelt Sector Name E 0 vers ector BS BU ID ProbT TS BU ID JREG 123 Antenna ___ ________ F Cable __________ _ Type Vertical xj Type Jumma K Length m o pie fo Gain Valid Valid BFU Tx Gain dB 25 00000 a Type fF sof x Gain 8 47 00000 External Attenuator H w Rev a Recommended None Actual iv e v TS IF MUX Disable of LE z Initial Tx Power 20 00000 Initial Tx Power 20 00000 Max Tx Power 20 00000 Max Tx Power 20 00000 Initial Rx Power 45 00000 Initial Rx Power 45 00000 Close Refresh Help Response OK 2 The RFU and antenna parameters for a TS BU are the same as the sector RFU and antenna parameters see page 4 83 except for the following There is no redundancy so there are no RFU B H W Rev or RFU B IF Cable parameters The parameters in the Current and Default Modem Working Point areas are as follows Current Modem Working Point area Initial Tx Power The initial power value for Tx This enables the fine tuning of distance measurements between t
323. minals dialog box a In the Map window select Terminals from the Configuration menu then select a W3000 BS BU from the opened tree a In the BS BU View screen select Registered Terminals from the BS BU menu The Registered Terminals dialog box is displayed 4 66 WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 39 W3000 Registered Terminals Dialog Terminals Location B Cell Name Sector Name Browse shen Registered Terminis OO OO iixi NewCen Shelf ID Ronen Kalish Shelf BS BU ID 111 TS Index system ame Customer Configured Type Detected Type il 111 2 Refresh Heb The following parameters are displayed in the Registered Terminals dialog box Location area Cell Name Sector Name Shelf ID Shelf Name BS BU ID Browse Button The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined Shelf The name of the shelf for which this BS BU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Stand Alone Name of the Stand Alone BS BU The BS BU system name if defined or when no sys tem name is defined the Carrier Index of the BS BU is used as the BS BU ID Enables you to display the Registered Terminals view for any other BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map Terminals table Fault status A
324. n BU View it displays the Frame Relay ports defined on the current TS BU 7 28 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration The Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box includes the following read only fields Location area Cell Name Sector Name BS BU ID TS BU ID List of FR Ports Device Port Number Port Type Signaling Proto col User N391 User N392 The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is specified in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box This field is only present when the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box is accessed from Terminal Station BU View The device BS BU or TS BU on which the interface is defined The telecom port number The type of network interface supported by the logical port UUNI UNI user side NUNI UNI network side or NNI The local in channel signaling protocol used for the logical port None Lmi AnsiT1617D or CcittQ933A The user side N391 full status polling cycle value for the logical port The user side N392 er
325. n Mode Automatic Frequency Raster Raster 1 v Configured RFU AFUA RUAHWwRy e S RFU B HAW Rev can Oper Status Tene RFU A IF Cable gt RFU BIF Cable A a a_i Type LMR400 Type LMR400 Length m fi Length m fi 0 Gain Valid vaid Gain Valid valid Tx Gain dB 200000 Rx Gain dB 2 00000 RxGain dB 200000 RxGaintee 200000 External Attenuator External Attenuator Recommended l 10 dBm xj Recommended l 10 dBm gt Actual None l Actual None ox Cancel Ect Appl Refresh Show Status Heb elp Response OK 2 Click Edit to modify the parameters as required The following are RFU and antenna parameters Location area read only Cell Name The name of the cell for which the selected BS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which the selected BS BU has been defined Antenna area Type The only antenna type is vertical Altitude m The elevation above sea level in meters Sector Type area Redundancy Whether redundancy is enabled or not Disabled Enabled RFU area Type The RFU head type WALKnet User s Manual 4 83 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Frequency The frequency raster type Raster Raster 1 Raster 2 RFU A H W Rev The RFU A head type hardware revision RFU B H W Rev The RFU B head type hardware revision This field is only enabled when redundancy is enabled Selection Mode The selec
326. n page 4 17 a Define a new chassis card BU NIU or HSC see Creating a New Chassis Slot Card on page 4 27 a Change the chassis card type see Changing Chassis Slot Card Type on page 4 27 a Delete an existing chassis card see Deleting Chassis Slot Card on page 4 27 E Access another chassis card View and Edit Properties see Chapter 5 Shelf Management WALKnet User s Manual 4 13 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration a Move a card to a different slot see Moving a Card to Another Chassis Slot in Chassis on page 4 28 a Access Power Supply Unit properties for a selected Power Supply Unit card see Power Supply Unit Management in Chapter 5 Shelf Management a Access Power Input Board properties see Power Input Board Management in Chapter 5 Shelf Management E Access Fan properties see Fan Management in Chapter 5 Shelf Management The next step in configuring a cell in WALKair 1000 system is to define base units within sectors see WALKair 1000 Base Station Basic Unit Management on page 4 30 for details The next step in configuring a WALKair 3000 system is to configure a shelf and chassis see Chapter 5 Shelf Management for details Deleting and Editing Sectors Sectors can be deleted from a cell or their properties can be modified Deleting Sectors Deleting sectors from a cell also deletes the entire sector configuration gt To delete a s
327. n tree select one or both of the actions from the following WALKnet User s Manual 10 11 Chapter 10 Utilities Download To download the selected software component to the selected devices The download operation tells the device to copy the file with the software from the specified TFTP server to the standby area of a corresponding component Switch over To switch between the current and standby software versions on the selected devices The switchover process automatically resets the selected devices The switchover operation exchanges the active and standby areas and initiates the reset of a corresponding component Notes If you select both Download and Switch over the switchover process is performed after the download process 9 If required delay the start of the download and switchover processes by selecting the Delayed checkbox and specifying the start time in the date and time fields 10 In the Download Concurrency field select the number of devices in different cells which will receive the software download request simultaneously and click Set Notes x Set the Download Concurrency low enough to avoid overloading the system 11 If required select the Open Log checkbox to automatically display the log file after the download process begins 12 Click Apply The download process begins During the download process the color of the selected devices reflects their status in the download p
328. nCell 10 10 3 69 I Riese gt To switch between current and backup software versions The read only parameters displayed in the Versions and Reset Management dialog box and Terminal Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as follows WALKnet User s Manual 10 29 Chapter 10 Utilities Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which the BS BU TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which the BS BU TS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box This field appears in the Terminal Versions and Reset Management dialog box only Current Software area Version The current version Description The description of the current version Checksum The CRC of the current version Stand By Software area Version The current standby version Description The description of the current standby version Checksum The CRC of the current standby version Hardware Revisions area BU The BS BU hardware version IFU The IFU hardware version 10 30 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management In the Versions and Res
329. ncy Scale MHz Response OK The Location area displays the name of the sector for which fre quency assignment is being performed the name of the cell to which the sector belongs and the type of active RFU TBD Note The Shelf Name and IF MUX Number defined for this sector are displayed only for a W3000 Shelf The BS BU Frequency Assignment area provides a list of the WAL Kair 1000 BS BUs and WALKair 3000 BS BUs in the sector and the frequency channels assigned to them The Channel in use field dis plays the frequency currently operating on the BS BU The Select channel field is used to select a new frequency index RF channel number that becomes active after the next BS BU reset of the BS BU The Frequency Scale area displays the specific Uplink and Downlink frequencies in MHz associated with each frequency channel The Fre quency scale contains two scales The Frequency scale marked with capital Fs is used to display WALKair 1000 frequencies The Fre quency scale marked with lowercase Fs is for WALKair 3000 frequen cies 4 80 WALKnet User s Manual Frequency Planning 2 To change a frequency assignment for an operational BS BU select a new frequency index RF channel number in the Select channel field 3 Click OK when you have completed the frequency assignment for the sector WALKnet User s Manual 4 81 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Configuring the RFU and Antenna The RFU and antenna par
330. nd button Notes The TDM SLA ID field is disabled in case there are no TDM SLAs on the selected BS BU and TS WALKnet User s Manual 7 69 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration The TDM SLA List dialog box displays a list of TDM SLAs currently defined on the selected BS BU and TS This list includes the following read only fields 7 70 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management Location area Cell Name Shelf ID Sector The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined W3000 Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf W3000 Stand Alone BS BU only The name of the sector in which the unit is defined SLA ID Selection area BS BU ID TS ID TDM SLA ID List of TDM SLA SLA ID SLA Name Bandwidth TS E1 port TS Line Type Shelf The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer Id of the TS The number of the SLA for the TDM Data service The number of the SLA for the TDM Data service Up to 16 SLA for TDM Data services can be defined on a particular TS The SLA ID is unique for this TS Th
331. nd click OK 2 In BS BU view from the BS BU menu select License to display the License dialog box an example of which is shown below Figure 7 1 License Dialog Box for a BS BU Sill License E O x Location ass Cell Name Newel Sector Name Secto3345 BS BU ID eio Browse Settings BU Type siom Serial Number 20017 MAC Address 0050C2012ABD IP Address fioo25205 2C List Of Features TT v5 2 T Class of Service I NAT DHCP I IPSEC License Key 4AE 3428 24B0F423028547154 OK Cancel Apply Refresh Help Response OK 3 Enter the license key supplied and then click Apply 7 2 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 License Management The license is transmitted to WALKair 1000 via SNMP 4 Verify that the WALKair features provided by your license are available by clicking Refresh In the example dialog box shown below for a BS BU the license key entered enabled the WALKair V5 2 and Class of Service features Figure 7 2 Enabled BS BU Options in License Dialog Box Sill License 5 Click OK to continue WALKnet User s Manual 7 3 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration WALKair 1000 Leased Line Service Management Leased lines are defined between telecom ports WALKair supports leased line services defined over E1 E1 75 120W and V 35 X 21 telecom cards You configure le
332. ndicates that a redundant card is not defined Onboard E1 Ports Configuration parameters Read only Can be E1 only The data transfer rate in Kbps The operational status of the telecom interfaces up or down The administrative status of the telecom interfaces Enabled or Disabled From 12xE1 NIU View you can do the following Display configuration information for another 12xE1 NIU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 Edit NIU properties see Modifying NIU Properties on page 5 28 Edit onboard ports properties see Configuring ATM or E1 or E3 Interfaces on page 5 31 page 4 19 Manage software versions resets see Shelf Management on WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management Displaying E3 NIU View E3 NIU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the E3 NIU E3 View can be accessed in one of the following ways a In the Navigation Tree by double clicking an E3 NIU node E In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking an E3 NIU Card a By selecting an E3 NIU Card in Sector View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then selecting View a By selecting an E3 NIU Card in Shelf View Then selecting Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and then selecting View The E3 NIU View screen for the selected E3 NIU is displayed Figure 5 9 E3 NIU View Dialog Box
333. ned on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface OFF This trap is sent when remote loopback is removed on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface ON This trap is sent when payload loopback is defined on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface OFF This trap is sent when payload loopback is removed on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface ON This trap is sent when repeater loopback is defined on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface OFF This trap is sent when repeater loopback is removed on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface ON This trap is sent when operational status of U Interface is Up buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface OFF This trap is sent when operational status of U Interface is down buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface ON This trap is sent when a U Interface or Analog line test fault is detected This trap is sent when oper ational status of U Interface is down buAlrmData con tains the Port and Analog Line or U InterfaceOFF This trap is sent when U Interface or Analog line test passed ON This trap is sent when Persistent Power Alarm is detected on the QPOTS Analog line buAlrmData con tains the Port and Analog line OFF This trap is sent when recovery from the Persistent Power Alarm is detected on the QPOTS Analog line b
334. net 8 x E1 Ports BS BU The type of interface The data transfer rate in Kbps The operational status of the port up or down The administrative status of the port Enabled or Disabled From Stand Alone BS BU View you can do the following WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management Display configuration information for another W3000 Stand Alone BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 Modify W3000 BS BU properties see Modifying W3000 Stand Alone BS BU Properties on page 4 56 Access the Terminal Stations registered to this W3000 BS BU see Accessing a Terminal Station Basic Unit on page 4 66 Edit the configuration of an onboard Ethernet or E1 port see below Manage Software Versions and Reset see below Accessing Onboard Ethernet and E1 Port Configuration Onboard Ethernet port and E1 port configuration parameters may be accessed through BS BU Ethernet or E1 Properties dialog boxes For details see Telecom Ports Configuration in Chapter 6 Telecom Port Configuration Accessing Software Versions and Reset Management For a detailed description of Software Versions and Reset management please see Versions and Reset Management in Chapter 10 Utilities Deleting W3000 Stand Alone BS BUs Deleting W3000 Stand Alone BS BU from a sector permanently removes the W3000 BS BU and all its components from the sector
335. ng WALKnet to a Database This section requires some basic knowledge about relational databases and their installation WALKnet uses a relational database to store air link performance data and BS BU configurations The latter are stored in the local file system if a database is not defined The environment variable NMS_DB_ NAME defines the database to WALKnet Note z Accessing the Environment Variable On your PC Select Settings then x Control Panel In the Control Panel double click on the System icon In the System Properties Window select the Advanced tab Click the Environmental Variables button Or Right click on the My Computer icon select Properties Advanced Tab and then click on Environmental Variables Figure 1 5 Database Environment Variable example Microsoft Access Edit User ariable a 2 xi Variable Name NMS_DB_NAME Variable Value odbc walknetDb cme In order to establish connectivity between WALKnet and the database database user accounts Oracle8i only must be established and WALKnet s environment must be set Product Support WALKnet supports the following databases a Oracle version 8 1 6 and higher The Oracle server can be hosted either on SUN Solaris or Windows NT 2000 XP E Microsoft Access on NT 2000 XP WALKnet User s Manual 1 13 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet Connecting to Microsoft Access gt To connect to Microsoft Access 1 Using any name
336. nk The recommended Modem Modulation Possible values e Qam e Qpsk The name of the TS The location of the TS TS Contact The distance in kilometers between the Base Station and the Terminal Station as estimated by the Opera tor TS administrative status requested by the NMS Enable Disable When you define a system name for the TS that name appears in the TS ID field and the title bar of the TS dialog boxes When no system name is entered the customer ID is used to identify the TS WALKnet User s Manual Frequency Planning Frequency Planning Frequency planning enables you to assign frequencies for WALKair 1000 BS BUs and WALKair 3000 BS BUs in a sector Frequencies are assigned from the Sector Frequency Planning dialog box WALKair 1000 Frequency Planning This section describes frequency planning for the sectors containing WALKair 1000 BS BUs only gt To assign BS BU frequencies 1 Open the Sector Frequency Planning dialog box in one of the following ways In Sector View select Frequencies from the Sector menu In Cell View select a sector in the List of sectors area and select Frequencies from the Cell menu In the Main window select Frequencies from the Configuration menu or click Sector Frequency in the toolbar Browse to the required sector in the Browse Sector dialog box and click OK The Sector Frequency Planning dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4
337. nnel value means that the C bits are not used except for sending receiving AIS The values in sequence describe dsx3M23 ANSI T1 107 1988 9 dsx3SYNTRAN ANSI T1 107 1988 9 dsx3CbitParity ANSI T1 107a 1990 9a dsx3ClearChannel ANSI T1 102 1987 8 e3Framed CCITT G751 12 e3Picp ETSI T NA 91 18 13 Read only Line Coding The line coding for this interface B3ZS CMI NRZ RZB or Other The B3ZS and CMI are used for elec trical SONET SDH signals STS 1 and STS 3 The Non Return to Zero NRZ and the Return to Zero are used for optical SONET SDH signals Read only WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Interfaces Configuration Parameters Section Status Loopback State ATM Map ping Line Length The line status of the interface This contains loop back state information and failure state information The dsx3LineStatus is a bitmap represented as a sum therefore it can represent multiple failures and a loopback see dsx3LoopbackConfig object for the type of loopback simultaneously The dsx3NoAlarm must be set if and only if no other flag is set If the dsx3loopbackState bit is set the loopback in effect determined from the dsx3loopbackConfig object The various bit posi tions are NoAlarm No alarm present RevRAIFailure Receiving Yellow Remote Alarm Indication XmitRAIAlarm Transmitting Yellow Remote Alarm Indication RevAIS Receiving AIS failure state XmitAIS Transmitting AIS LOF Receiving LOF fai
338. not automatically reflected in the V5 tab and vise versa gt To filter the display 1 Select the APM tab or the V5 tab 2 From the View menu in the Performance Data Collection dialog box select Display Mode and then one of the following Show All To display all the BS BUs defined on the current map Show Enabled To display only those BS BUs enabled for collection For a description of how to eliminate a BS BU from the collection process refer to Steps 4 to 6 in Configuring Performance Data Collection on page 8 35 Select To display the Select APM BSBUs To Display dialog box as shown below 8 32 WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection Figure 8 15 Select APM BSBUs To Display Dialog Box WALKNet Select APM BSBUs To Display F4 yakov F t Newell M NewSectori K f Silly vr 4 b Selection ProbT o Select the BS BUs that you want to display in the selected tab and click OK Only the selected BS BUs are displayed in the selected tab Notes z The title above the tab indicates the selected filter ALL BSBUs ENABLED BSBUs or SELECTED BSBUs 3 Select the other tab and filter the display as required If you filtered the first tab to display only selected BS BUs the second tab is also titled SELECTED BSBUs and does not display anything as no BS BUs have yet been selected Notes z To display all the BS BUs defined on the current map
339. nternal device problem Edit Authorized Manager Error Type Description 720 Internal device problem Software Download Error Type Description 810 Download cannot be started Software Download TFTP session is already in OPEN state 811 Software Download cannot be Aborted Software Download TFTP session is already in CLOSE state BS BU Properties Edit Error Type Description 910 Internal device problem C 14 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Error Messages Terminal Properties Edit Add New TS Error Type 920 921 Description Customer ID is already assigned to another Terminal Station on this BS BU Internal device problem Terminal Station BU Properties Edit Error Type 930 931 Description Estimated BS TS Distance can be changed only when TS AdminStatus is Disable Internal device problem Sector RFU and Antenna No Redundancy Error Type 1010 1011 Description The IF band is NOT valid for IF actual hardware card type Internal device problem Sector RFU and Antenna Redundancy Error Type 1020 1021 Description The IF band is NOT valid for IF actual hardware card type Internal device problem WALKnet User s Manual Appendix C Terminal RFU and Antenna Error Type Description 1030 The IF band is NOT valid for IF actual hardware card type 1031 Internal device problem C 16 WALKnet User s Manual
340. nual 10 31 Chapter 10 Utilities gt To switch between current and backup software versions The read only parameters displayed in the Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management dialog box are as follows Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which the BS BU TS BU has been defined Sector Name The name of the sector for which the BS BU TS BU has been defined BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box This field only appears when the Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management dialog box is accessed from Terminal Station BU View Current Software area Version The current version Description The description of the current version Checksum The CRC of the current version Stand By Software area Version The current standby version Description The description of the current standby version Checksum The CRC of the current standby version Hardware Revisions area Interface Card The Telecom card hardware version 10 32 WALKnet User s Manual Versions and Reset Management gt In the Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Switchove
341. o aT ae BS BU VLAN ID he o IP SLAID fy e Pe ATM IP SLA Name Tet ATMNIU for IP a as ATM Port E CBR YPI VCI E e r MIR 256 2 River VPC a a NetVBR VPI VCI a A Class of Service Platinum x UBR VPLAVCI E 4 ok Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Q 2 Select the Class of Service from the dropdown list in the Class of Service field select the Ethernet port number from the dropdown list in the Eth port field select the MIR for the new IP SLA using the up down arrows in the MIR field and enter the values in the remaining fields 3 If the system is functioning in Layer 2 bridging mode the BS BU VLAN ID and TS BU VLAN fields are active in the Add IP SLA Dialog Box If so enter the BS BU VLAN ID and TS VLAN ID Or 4 If the system is functioning in Layer 3 basic mode skip this step WALKnet User s Manual 7 61 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Location area read only Cell Name Shelf ID Sector BS BU ID TS ID IP SLA area IP SLA ID IP SLA Name CIR MIR Class of Service Ethernet area The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined W3000 Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf W3000 Stand Alone BS BU only The name of the sector in which the unit is defined W3000 Shelf The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no syste
342. o display the BER Test Status dialog box by selecting Show Results from the File menu 6 Monitor the status of the BER test as required The following information is provided for each BS BU TS TU tested BS BU The IP address of the BS BU TS ID The customer ID of the TS BU Status The current status of the test Elapsed Time The time in minutes that has elapsed since the begin ning of the test BER The detected bit error rate Counter Overflow The number of times error counters overflow occurred If 0 is not displayed the BER test value is not reliable Task Starvation The number of times the BER meter task starvation occurred If 0 is not displayed the BER test value is not reliable 10 46 WALKnet User s Manual Performing BER Tests Notes TThe LED to the left of each device indicates the communication status Green indicates OK Yellow indicates waiting for response and Red indicates time out Notes f WALKnet tracks BER tests and keeps the results in log files Log files are named BER_Test date time log and placed in the directory defined by the NMS_LOG environment variable sub directory BER_Test Information is saved to this sub directory when clicking Save For information about how to define the NMS_LOG Environment Variable see Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files on page 1 16 7 To end the session immediately press the Abort button WALKnet User s Manual 10 47 Chapter 1
343. o o 5 84 IF MUX ID Number 2 Setting Area a a i i i_ _ ma parama eo Tx Power fis5 o0000 Rx Operating Point za00000 System Name JIF Muxthee Reference Oscillator Tea yi Oper Status Dom tst lt Cis sS Admin Status Ende ox Cancel Help Response OK Q 2 In the Tx M amp C Attenuator Default Gain field modify the IF MUX TX VVA default value if necessary Default for 26 GHz system 6 00000 Default for 28 GHz system 1 00000 3 In the Tx Power field modify the target Tx power per W3K carrier in dBm at the antenna 4 In the Rx Operating Point field modify the target default Rx power per carrier in dBm at the antenna 5 In System Name field insert the system name of IF MUX 6 In the Reference Oscillator field define active TCXO A or B in the IF MUX 7 Click OK to save any modifications made to the properties of the IF MUX 4 26 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management Creating a New Chassis Slot Card gt To create a new card 1 In the chassis picture select an empty slot 2 From the Chassis Element menu select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu then New and then the type of new card 3 The new card is displayed in the selected slot in Chassis View Note If a configured card is not detected empty slot or if a detected card is not configured configured type not equal to detected type the card picture will appear in gray Dele
344. oad session WALKnet User s Manual 10 13 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 8 Software Download Log WALKNet Software Download Log olx B Log file name F 7nmsiog SDL SDL_1 0 14 2001_13 51 55 log Date BS BU ID Device Message 10 14 2001 13 51 55 Download started 10 14 2001 13 51 55 10 0 8 201 TS 123 FR Started 10 14 2001 13 51 55 10 0 8 201 TS 2 FR In progress 10 14 2001 13 52 56 10 0 8 201 TS 2 FR No response from TFTP server 10 14 2001 13 52 56 10 0 8 201 BS BU FR Started 10 14 2001 13 52 56 10 0 8 201 BS BU FR In progress 10 14 2001 13 53 56 10 0 8 201 BS BU FR No response from TFTP server 10 14 2001 13 53 56 10 0 8 201 TS 123 Started 10 14 2001 13 53 56 10 0 8 201 TS 17 Started 10 14 2001 13 53 56 10 0 8 201 TS 11 Started 10 14 2001 13 53 56 10 0 8 201 TS 2 In progress 10 14 2001 13 53 56 10 0 8 201 TS 3 In progress 10 14 2001 13 53 57 10 0 8 201 TS 4 TS Disconnected 10 14 2001 13 54 57 10 0 8 201 TS 2 No response from TFTP server 10 14 2001 13 54 57 10 0 8 201 TS 3 No response from TFTP server 10 14 2001 13 54 57 Download finished Close Refresh Log Fil Heb Information about the current or last download session is displayed in the following fields Date The date and time of the action described in the Message field BS BU ID The system name if defined for the BS BU or shelf When no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU or Shelf Device The component within a BS BU or Shel
345. odify the configuration parameters see Modifying W3000 Shelf BS BU Properties on page 4 46 The following parameters are displayed in BS BU View Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this W3000 BS BU has been defined Sector A The name of the sector for which this W3000 BS BU Name has been defined via IF MUX A Sector B The name of the sector for which this W3000 BS BU Name has been defined via IF MUX B Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this W3000 BS BU has been defined If Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as Shelf ID 4 42 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management BS BU ID Slot Number Browse Button Status area Admin Status Oper Status Fault status Settings area Serial Number Vendor ID Actual Frequency Band Configured Frequency Band Data Service ATM NIU TDM Service NIU ATM 12 x El IF MUX A IF MUX B Active IF MUX The system name if defined for the W3000 BS BU or when no system name is defined carrier index of W3000 BS BU is used as BS BU ID The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Number of slot in the shelf where this BS BU is installed Enables you to display configuration information for another W3000 BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map Administrative status of the W3000 BS BU Enable Disable or Redundant Current card status
346. of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Prop erties Edit dialog box Enables you to display configuration information in the open Base Station BU View for another BS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map 4 32 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management Serial The serial number of the BS BU Number Frequency The frequency at which the BS BU is operating Band Oper Status The operational status of the BS BU Connected meaning that at least one TS BU is synchronized with the BS BU or Disconnected Admin The administrative status of the BS BU Enabled or Status Disabled Ports area A list of telecom ports on the BS BU Detected The type of telecom interface card Type installed detected E1 E1 75 120W V 35 X 21 E1 FR V 35 X 21 FR 2M or V 35 X 21 FR 4M Configured The type of telecom interface card configured E1 Type E1 75 120W V 35 X 21 E1 FR V 35 FR 2M X 21 FR 2M V 35 FR 4M or X 21 FR 4M Description A full description of the interface Speed The data transfer rate in Kbps Oper Status Admin Status Name Location The operational status of the telecom interfaces up or down The administrative status of the telecom interfaces Enabled or Disabled The name of the BS BU The location of the BS BU From Base Station BU View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another BS BU in any sector in any
347. ol errors meaning protocol discriminator message type call reference and mandatory information element errors This counter is not displayed when the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box is accessed for a TS BU N Inactive Network Side Channel Inactive The number of times the network side channel was declared inactive meaning N392 errors in N393 events This counter is not displayed when the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box is accessed for a TS BU 4 Click Stop at any time to stop the data collection 8 42 WALKnet User s Manual Frame Relay Statistics From the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box you can do the following a Use the Previous and Next buttons to scroll through the data collected in previous intervals E Click Reset Counters to reset the counters for selected ports a Click Save to save the collected data in an Excel file The full path name of the generated file is NMS_LOG FR lt yy mm dd gt fsm a Set thresholds for counters A counter value is highlighted when it exceeds its threshold Refer to Setting Thresholds on page 8 43 a Display a Frame Relay signaling graph for a selected counter Refer to Displaying Signaling Graphs on page 8 44 Setting Thresholds You can specify thresholds for a signaling counter so that counter values exceeding specified values are highlighted Thresholds are applied for the values received during 10 minute intervals If an
348. on Cell Name SERVER i CO S Shelf ID wok Shelf PSU Number Settings AA oi_ _ j ma ii HW Revision Be tst sS Power Quality Tolerant SS Oper Status bp Admin Status Enae yi ok Apply Cancel Refresh Heb elp Q Response OK PSU Properties dialog box displays the configuration parameters of the selected PSU The following parameters are displayed in the PSU Properties dialog box Location area WALKnet User s Manual 5 35 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Cell Name The name of the cell for which this PSU has been defined Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this IFU has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only PSU Number Power Supply Unit s number Read only Settings area HW Revision PSU hardware revision Read write Power Indicates the actual system power quality Quality Tolerant Intolerant Read only Oper Status Current card status Up Down Test Read only Admin Status Administrative status requested by NMS Enable Disable Read write From the PSU Properties dialog box you can do the following a Examine PSU s configuration parameters a Edit PSU s configuration parameters 5 36 WALKnet User s Manual Power Input Board PIB Management Power Input Board PIB Management Displaying PIB Properties The Power Input Board Properties dialog bo
349. on ccc B CellName NewCen Shelf ID Shelf Client Client Name CLI Location ad Information BsBuID us aa TS ID sz o i Admin Status Ende i S S ox Cancel Apply Refresh Help Response OK Q 2 Modify the Location and Information fields in the Client area as required 3 Modify the administrative status of the client by selecting Enable Disable from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field as required 4 Click OK or Apply Deleting Clients To delete a client from the system all services defined for this client should be deleted first gt To delete clients 1 In the Client List dialog box select an existing client s from the list of clients multiple selections enabled 2 From the Clients menu select Delete The Delete Client confirmation message is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 53 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 32 Delete Client Confirmation Message Warning AN You are about to delete the client s Are you sure 3 Click Yes to delete the selected clients The Delete Client Error message box appears if any of the selected clients have services Figure 7 33 Delete Client Error Message AN All services defined for clients should be deleted first 5 Click OK to delete only the clients without services from the list of selected clients Notes To delete a client from the system all services define
350. on in case of bad link performance and to ascend from QPSK to QAM16 modulation in case of improvement in link performance Set to Enable or Disable as required 10 To configure the IP Mode in the Settings area from the Configured IP Mode drop down list choose Basic for Layer 3 mode or Bridging for Layer 2 mode 11 From the Redundancy Status drop down list select Enable if this card will be normally in service and another BU standby will back it up If this is a redundant standby card this parameter is not relevant 12 From the Redundant BS BU Slot Number drop down list If this card will be normally in service and redundancy is not required select None If this card will normally be in service and redundancy is required select the slot number of the standby W3000 BS BU that will come into service if this card fails If this is a redundant standby card this parameter is not relevant 13 Click OK to save any modifications made to the properties of the W3000 BS BU Note You can re configure W3000 BS BU parameters using the BS BU Properties Edit Dialog M Box 4 40 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management Displaying W3000 Shelf BS BU View BS BU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the W3000 Shelf BS BU and access associated Terminal Stations gt To access W3000 Shelf BS BU View Shelf BS BU View is accessed in one of the following ways In Naviga
351. onfiguration Enter the textual identification of the contact person together with the information on how to contact this person e g Client s Phone number in the Information field 4 Shelf only Select the BS BU for the client from the dropdown list in the BS BU ID field The TS ID dropdown list is automatically filled with the configured TSs of this BS BU and blank value is displayed by default 5 Select the TS for the new client from the dropdown list in the TS ID field 6 Select the administrative status of the new client by selecting Enable Disable from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field 7 Click OK The new client is displayed in the Client List dialog box Notes f In the Client Name field you can only enter English letters spaces and wildcard symbols The data in the Client Name field is converted automatically to uppercase English letters when the user clicks the OK button Editing Clients The Location Information and Administrative Status of an existing client can be edited gt To add a client 1 In the Client List dialog box select a client from the list From the Clients menu select Edit Double Click on the line in the table identical to the Edit selected line option The Client Properties Edit dialog box is d 7 52 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Client Management Figure 7 31 Client Properties Edit Dialog Box Shelf Client Properties Edit Bile x Locati
352. or WALKair 3000 the TS BU RFU and Antenna parameters are accessed from Sector A View only gt To configure RFU and antenna parameters for a BS BU 1 In BS BU View select RFU and Antenna from the BS BU menu The RFU amp Antenna dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 91 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 53 BS BU RFU amp Antenna Dialog Box 1 0 25 205 RFU amp Antenna J lolx Sector Name NewSector4 Location B Cell Name NewCen BS BU ID 10 25 205 Type othe Altitude m pooo RU w Fo H W Rev Eo Redundancy isese CS S Configwed RFU RFUA gt Antenna IF Cable Type Other x Length m J 0 Gain Valid Not vaid Tx Gain dB 25 00000 Rx Gain dB 2a 00000 Extemal Attenuator Recommended None Actual None Current Modem Working Point dBm Nominal Tx Power 18 00000 Nominal Rx Power 80 00000 Default Modem Working Point dBm Nominal Tx Power 18 00000 Nominal Rx Power 80 00000 o Cancel Apel Update Current Refresh Hep elp Q Waiting For Response Note z The BS BU RFU and Antenna dialog box displays the RFU and antenna parameters Ee received from the selected BS BU If the parameters are different from those specified in the WALKnet database a warning message is displayed The parameters should then be retransmitted from the sector RFU amp Antenna dialog box for the selected
353. or the selected counter is displayed A sample signaling graph for the U Rel Errors counter is shown below WALKnet User s Manual Frame Relay Statistics Figure 8 21 Signaling Graph 10 10 3 69 U Rel Errors of x Location za a aaa Cell Name IntegrationCell Sector Name IntegSector BS BU ID fi 0 10 3 69 Scale Minimum 0 Maximum 100 Apply Port Graph CATIN Port 1 freen 12 Port 1 24 59 25 59 26 59 27 59 28 59 29 59 30 59 31 59 32 59 33 59 Paling 3 In the list of ports select the Graph checkbox to the right of a port to display the counter statistics for that port in the graph 4 Click Get Data Data is displayed in the graph for the selected ports as it is collected Values for the selected counter received after the first 10 second polls are displayed permanently in the First fields The difference between the value from the current poll and the previous poll is displayed in the Value fields Notes y You can change the scale of the graph by entering values in the Minimum and Maxi mum fields in the Scale area and clicking Apply 5 Click Stop at any time to stop the collection of data WALKnet User s Manual 8 45 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring End Point Traffic Statistics The end point traffic statistics relate to the Frame Relay services configured over the Frame Relay ports gt To view end point traffic statistics 1 Acce
354. ox is cleared 12 12 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Deleting Alarms You can delete one or more alarms from the alarms list in the WALKair Alarms History window You can delete either a group of selected alarms acknowledged alarms see Acknowledging Alarms on page 12 11 or all the alarms in the list Note f To delete alarms you must log in to WALKnet as either an Administrator or an Operator Tester and Monitor users are not authorized to delete alarms gt To delete selected alarms 1 In the WALKair Alarms History window select one or more alarms by clicking on the alarm row s Note f Use the lt CTRL gt key on the keyboard and mouse to select alarms one by one and the lt Shift gt key and mouse to select a group of adjacent alarms 2 From the Actions menu select Delete and then Selected Alarms The selected alarms are removed from the alarms list gt To delete acknowledged alarms 1 In the WALKair Alarms History window from the Actions menu select Delete and then Acknowledged Alarms The acknowledged alarms are removed from the alarms list WALKnet User s Manual 12 13 Chapter 12 The WALKnet Alarm Browser gt To delete all the alarms in the alarms list 1 In the WALKair Alarms History window from the Actions menu select Delete and then All Alarms Saving an Alarms File At any time you can save an alarms file with a filename of your choice that
355. p also deletes the entire configuration of the cell gt To delete a cell 1 In the map right click a cell and select Delete from the options displayed The Delete Cell confirmation message is displayed 4 6 WALKnet User s Manual Cell Management Figure 4 4 Delete Cell Confirmation Message Delete Cell AN This will permanently remove this cell and all its contents from this map Are you sure 2 Click Yes to delete the cell from the map Modifying Cell Properties Modifying the properties of a cell enables you to modify the name and description of the cell gt To modify cell properties 1 Modify the properties of a cell in one of the following ways In the map by right clicking a cell and selecting Properties from the options displayed In Cell View by selecting Edit Cell from the Cell menu The Cell Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 5 Cell Properties Edit Dialog Box Cell Properties Edit ioj x Name SERVER Description This is cell NewCell3 Cancel 2 Modify the Name and Description of the cell as required and click OK WALKnet User s Manual 4 7 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Sector and Shelf Management The following section describes how to create and manage a sector Shelf management is described on page 4 19 Sector Management The next step in configuring a cell is to define the sectors within the cell A cell can include up to 16 sector
356. ports on the selected device are displayed in the Available Links area Notes To define V5 over E1 and E1 75 120W the signaling must be CCS Therefore only E1 and E1 75 120W ports with CCS signaling are displayed in the Available Links area By default the administrative status of a V5 interface is Disable You can modify this status in the Change V5 Interface Admin Status dialog box Refer to Editing V5 Inter faces on page 7 17 for details 4 Enter numbers in the V5 Interface Id and Variant ID fields as required Notes A The V5 Interface Idx field displays an identifier for the V5 interface 5 When defining an interface for a TS BU enter the maximum number of calls that can run over the V5 interface in the Max Number of Calls field The number can be between 0 31 for E1 and E1 75 1200 ports between 0 8 for QBRI ports and between 0 4 for POTS ports WALKnet User s Manual 7 15 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 6 Select the checkbox in the Select field to select the port for participation in the V5 interface Notes f When you select a QBRI port the E1 Link Id E1 Link Type C Ch Log and C Ch C Path fields are not relevant and are disabled T If you selected an E1 or E1 75 120Q port further define the V5 interface as follows Enter an ID number for the port in the E1 Link Id field When defining an interface for a BS BU select an E1 link type of Primary Secondary or None from th
357. pr _ We re on your wavelength WALKnet Version 7 7 Version 7 7 Part Number 213765 26 February 2004 Legal Rights Legal Rights Copyright 2003 Alvarion Ltd Alvarion All rights reserved The material contained herein is proprietary privileged and confidential No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Alvarion reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descrip tions in this publication without prior notice No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warrant Trade Names Alvarion BreezeCOM WALKair WALKnet BreezeNET BreezeMANAGE BreezeACCESS BreezeLINK BreezePHONE MGW eMGW and or other products and or services referenced here in are either registered trade marks trademarks or service marks of Alvarion All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners The content herein is subject to change without further notice ii WALKnet User s Manual Contents Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet OVerVIEW pecniitedaciieisicnatinentancndubsind aaa aaea eaaa a iea a ea aAa aadi aaaeaii 1 2 WALkKair 1000 System lt sczcrcescatsacacnedecrotedsneeisssetaradtennddeatgobondbaciteeeisnas 1 2 WALKair 3000 Shelf Based System cccccceeeeeeseeseneeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 1 3 W3000 Stand
358. r WALKnet switches between the current and standby software versions and automatically switches the BS BU or TS BU telecom card To view software versions on a telecom card In the Telecom Card Versions and Reset Management dialog box click Reset WAL Kair 3000 Software Versions WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located on a W3000 Shelf s BS BUs TS BUs MPUs IF MUXs and ATM NIUs and ona W3000 Stand Alone BS BU and its TS BUs BS BU Software Versions gt WALKnet enables you to view the resident software versions located in the BS BUs You can switch between current and standby software versions at any time To view software versions on a telecom card Access the Versions and Reset and Management dialog box in one of the following ways E In BS BU View select Versions from the BS BU menu Or E In the WALKnet Main Window select Versions from the Utility menu Then select W3000 Shelf BS BU for a Shelf OR W3000 BS BU SA for a Stand Alone BS BU The BS BU Versions and Reset Management dialog box is displayed as shown below for a W3000 Shelf and a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU WALKnet User s Manual 10 33 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 20 BS BU Versions and Reset Management Dialog Box Kali Versions and Reset Manage of x 10 0 35 104 Versions and Reset Manage Mi EG Location A _ i_ _e JIt Location
359. r Alarms History BEES Actions Trap file name fo WALKNet Trap 02_03_2004 trap B WALKair Alarms History List 02 03 2004 09 36 12 10 0 15 59 02 03 2004 09 36 12 10 0 15 59 ON Shelf is Changed Acm failed HSC 02 03 2004 09 36 12 ON Clock is Changed Master Clock Link Failed MPU 1 0 Clock is Ch M 02 03 2004 0 Clock is Changed Redundent Clock Link Failed MPU T Normal 02 03 2004 09 36 12 10 0 15 59 Jwso00 ON Clock is Changed Redundent Clock Card Failed MPU r Warming 02 03 2004 09 36 12 10 0 15 59 oN Shelf is Changed Slot no 5 MPU T warming 02703 2004 10 0213 10 0 15 90 oN LCI Access is Detected LCI Access BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 5 02 03 2004 10 05 57 10 0 15 90 OFF TS Radio Link LOSS TS CID 10 BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 5 02 03 2004 10 05 57 10 0 15 90 OFF All TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 5G 02 03 2004 10 05 58 10 0 15 90 ws000 ON Ts Radio Link LOSS TS CID 10 BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 56 02 03 2004 10 05 58 10 0 15 90 ON All TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 56 02 03 2004 10 06 00 10 0 15 90 w300 OFF TS Radio Link LOSS TS CID 10 BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 5G 02 03 2004 10 06 00 10 0 15 90 w3000 OFF all TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 5 02 03 2004 10 06 03 10 0 15 90 W3000 oN ts Radio Link LOSS TS CID 10 BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 56 02 03 2004 10 06 03 1 30 W3000 ON All TSs Radio Link LOSS BS on slot 11 BS name BU 10 5 Waring 02 03 2
360. rame Relay Ethernet Service Configuration The WALKair Frame Relay Ethernet service is presented by the PVC connection established between the port on the BS BU and the port on the TS BU and is identified by DLCI In the current version the BS BU and TS BU DLCI involved in the connection have the same value Frame Relay Ethernet services are defined in the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box gt To access the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box The Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box is accessed in one of the following ways B In Base Station BU View from the BS BU menu select Services then Frame Relay Ethernet Configuration and then Frame Relay Ethernet Service E In the Main window in the Browse BS BU dialog box select Services then Frame Relay Ethernet Configuration then BS BU and then Frame Relay Ethernet Service from the Configuration menu Browse to the required BS BU and click OK The Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 20 Frame Relay Ethernet Service Dialog Box Sill Frame Relay 7 Ethernet Service olx Service Forwarding Rules B Location conname MWwIK_Cell Sector Name NewSector3 BS BU ID Sill Peer DLC Status ee E E S S E S E A Concentration Ratio CRO jo ti SCSC Close Refresh Set CRO Help 7 34 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration The Frame Relay Ethernet Se
361. ramed No CRC First Channel fo yi o Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Stand Alone BS BU Select the E1 port number from the dropdown list in the E1 Port field and enter values in the remaining fields as follows WALKnet User s Manual 7 73 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Location area read only Cell Name Shelf ID Sector BS BU ID TS ID E1 area E1 port Line Type TDM SLA area TDM SLA ID TDM SLA Name The name of the cell for which this shelf or Stand Alone BS BU has been defined W3000 Shelf only The system name if defined of the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf Stand Alone BS BU only The name of the sector Shelf The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the BS BU Stand Alone BS BU The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP Address of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer ID of the TS This is a number of the E1 port one of the two El ports on the TS by which the SLA is served The E1 Interface framing format The number of the SLA for the TDM Data service Up to 16 SLAs for the TDM Data service are defined on a particular TS The SLA ID is unique for this TS This field is read only This is the SLA description ATM area W300 Shelf ATM NIU card only
362. rather than defining the map from the beginning Saving a New Map gt New maps should be saved before closing the WALKnet application WALKnet automatically prompts you to save any unsaved maps when exiting the application 1 To save a new map Save a new map in one of the following ways From the File menu select Save Map Click Save in the toolbar Right click in the Workspace and select Save Map from the options displayed The Save Map dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 3 4 Save Map Dialog Box az Map Name ox Cancel Help Enter a name for the map with no blank spaces in the Map Name field and click OK The map is saved in a map file and the new name appears in the Title Bar WALKnet User s Manual Saving Maps Saving a Map with a New Name Any existing map including its cell configuration can be duplicated and saved with a different name gt To save a map with a different name 1 Open an existing map 2 Save the map in one of the following ways From the File menu select Save Map As Right click in the Workspace and select Save Map As from the options displayed The Save Map dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 3 5 Save Map Dialog Box Save Map of x az Map Name OO ox Cancel Help 3 Enter a different name for the map with no blank spaces in the Map Name field and click OK The map is saved in a map file with the n
363. ration E3 NIU Configuration Parameters The following parameters are displayed in the E3 Port Properties dialog box 6 32 Location area Cell Name Shelf ID ATM NIU ID Port Number The name of the cell for which this ATM NIU has been defined The name of the Shelf for which this ATM NIU has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID The system name if defined for the ATM NIU or when no system name is defined the slot number of the ATM NIU The number of the onboard port ATM Settings area Max Number of VPCs Max Number of VCCs Number of VPCs currently in use Number of VCCs currently in use Max Number of VPI bits The maximum number of VPCs PVPCs and SVPCs supported by this ATM interface At the ATM UNI the maximum number of VPCs PVPCs and SVPCs ranges from 0 to 256 only The maximum number of VCCs PVCCs and SVCCs supported by this ATM interface The number of VPCs PVPC Soft PVPC and SVPC currently in use at this ATM interface It includes the number of PVPCs and Soft PVPCs con figured at the interface plus the number of SVPCs currently established at the interface At the ATM UNI the configured number of VPCs PVPCs and SVPCs can range from 0 to 256 only Read only The number of VCCs PVCC Soft PVCC and SVCC currently in use at this ATM interface This includes the number of PVCCs and Soft PVCCs that are configured at th
364. re 9 4 Edit User Dialog Box Edit User User Name fet t iC t s User Type Test tt yi Password Confirm Password fe ox Cancel Help 2 Modify the user type and password as required and click OK Deleting Users An Administrator user can delete existing users from the WALKnet system A deleted user cannot access the WALKnet application gt To delete a user 1 In the Authorization dialog box select a user in the List of users and select Delete User from the Authorization menu The Delete User confirmation message is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 9 5 Chapter 9 Security Management Figure 9 5 Delete User Confirmation Message Delete User N This user will be deleted from users list Are you sure 2 Click Yes The user has been deleted from the users list 9 6 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 10 Utilities In This Chapter Authorized Managers on page 10 2 Software Download on page 10 7 Configuration Upload and Download on page 10 19 Versions and Reset Management on page 10 27 Performing BER Tests on page 10 44 Configuring SNMP Parameters on page 10 48 Chapter 10 Utilities Authorized Managers The Authorized Manager is the management station that receives Traps and that can modify WALKair 1000 parameters To enable the transmission of Traps and the modification of parameters you must specify to WALKair the
365. re Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID 100 Warning 02703 2004 10 30 17 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON LCI Access is Detected LCI Access MPU Warning 02703 2004 10 30 21 10 015 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID 100 02 03 2004 10 30 21 fioo 5 241 w3000 ON Software Download failed TS BS slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 TS CID 1003 Warning 02 03 2004 10 32 32 fi 10 0 15 241 W3000 ON Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 Warning 02703 2004 10 33 29 fi 10 0 15 241 W3000 OFF Software Download started BS on slot 2 BS name BU Slot 2 niga 0243 2004 AD 3441 0 oftware Dewnlead started T SiP Salot 2E Sesame BLES lo 02 03 2004 10 54 04 10 0 15 59 3000 ON Clock is Changed System Running On Free Clock MPU 02 03 2004 10 54 04 10 0 15 59 w3000 ON Shelf is Changed Acm failed HSC 02 03 2004 10 54 05 10 0 15 59 w3000 ON Clock is Changed Master Clock Link Failed MPU 02 03 2004 per E 0 5 59 w3000 ON orfial 208721 P3000 0 isthafigedh edunde alle MPO Normal ean 10 54 05 fr 10 0 15 59 W3000 ON Clock is Changed Redundent a Card Failed MPU Warming 0270372004 10 54 05 fi 10 0 15 59 3000 ON Shelf is Changed Slot no 5 MPU To view the update in the WALKair Alarms History window click on the Refresh Refresh button 12 18 WALKnet User s Manual Manipulating Alarms Requesting Active Alarms from Sector View Accessing Sector View is similar for WALKair 3000 and WA
366. re download process has failed Software download process is aborted Software download process is finished succeeded Software download failure is cleared after successful download Software download abort is cleared after successful download Software version fault is detected Unsupported Software version is detected Software version test passed successfully Supported Software version is detected Switching between the current and the standby software versions started Switching between the current and the standby software versions failed WALKnet User s Manual Software Traps Trap Number 46 47 48 49 50 Trap Name in MIB switchVersionOff configurationDownload On configurationDownload Off resetRequired InvalidConfigurationFil e Send Criterion Switching between current and standby software versions succeeded Switching version failed alarm cleared after successful switch Configuration download process started Configuration download process has failed Configuration download process succeeded Configuration download failed alarm cleared after successful download Configuration download is finished and user is trying to change parameters MPU detected invalid configuration file WALKnet User s Manual B 15 Appendix B Configuration Traps Trap Number 51 52 53 54 Trap Name in MIB DeviceConfMismatchO n DeviceConfMism
367. re starting the download procedure ensure that the TFTP server is operational and able to load the required files Notes WALKnet provides a TFTP Server application for users without a TFTP Server The TFTP application is only available for NT versions UNIX does not require a TFTP application The TFTP server is included in the Solaris OS Multiple BS BU Download You can download software to multiple devices at the same time Software can be downloaded to selected BS BUs selected TS BUs Frame Relay telecom cards on selected BS BUs and TS BUs and Ethernet QBRI QPOTS telecom cards on selected TS BUs Additionally in WALKair 3000 software can be downloaded to selected MPUs ATM NIUs and IF MUXs The software is downloaded as a single file for each device in S3 format using the TFTP protocol The WALKair system is the TFTP client and the software update file is located on a TFTP server host Notes d The TFTP server may be on the same station as WALKnet or any other host If you want to download a National protocol to multiple BS BUs see National Protocol System Variable Definition on page 10 8 Notes f For download to a single BS BU this procedure is not required See Single Device Download on page 10 16 WALKnet User s Manual 10 7 Chapter 10 Utilities For all other downloads to multiple devices see Downloading to Multiple Devices on page 10 9 National Protocol System Variabl
368. required Otherwise the Ethernet related fields are disabled 4 Click OK Deleting Frame Relay Ethernet Services 5 You can delete Frame Relay Ethernet services as required gt To delete Frame Relay Ethernet services 1 In the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box select an existing service with an Inactive administrative status from the list of Frame Relay Ethernet services 2 From the Service menu select Delete The Delete Table Row confirmation message is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 7 39 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 23 Delete Table Row Confirmation Message Delete Table Row N You are about to delete the row Are you sure to 3 Click Yes to delete the Frame Relay Ethernet service Configuring Quality of Service WALKnet enables you to define Quality of Service QoS for Frame Relay Ethernet services You can define global QoS parameters and specific QoS parameters for individual services Global QoS Parameters The global QoS parameters apply system wide You can enable QoS and then specify the DiffServer Code Points for different traffic priority and maximum packet size for high and medium priority traffic gt To configure global QoS parameters 1 From the Forwarding Rules menu in the Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box select Global Parameters The Global Parameters dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 40 WALKnet User s M
369. required TS in the Browse TS dialog box and click OK The Air Performance Summary dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual 8 11 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Figure 8 4 Air Performance Summary Dialog Box z W3K Shelf Presentation Bu Presentation TS 3 Air Performance Mi E3 NewCelll Presentation TS 3 fuar tere areaaae ES 58 0 SES 40 0 DM 96 0 NDM 4 0 2 Select the time period for which you want to view air performance Current 15 Minutes or Last 24 Hours The air link parameters for the selected time interval are displayed 8 12 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring The following are Air Performance Summary dialog box parameters Location area Cell Name Sector Name Shelf ID BS BU ID TS ID Browse Button The name of the cell for which this TS has been defined The name of the sector for which this TS has been defined The name of the Shelf for which this TS has been defined If a Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP address is used as the Shelf ID The BS BU system name if defined or when no system name is defined the carrier index of the BS BU The TS system name if defined or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS The system name is defined in the TS Properties Edit dialog box Enables you to display configuration information for another TS in any sector in any cell
370. rocess as follows Yellow Download in progress Green Download successfully completed Red Download failed No color Download not started 10 12 WALKnet User s Manual Software Download At any time during the download process you can click Abort to abort the process or Pause to temporarily stop the process During a pause in the download process you can select deselect devices in the Device Selection tree that are uncolored Click Resume to restart the down load process Notes The Pause button toggles between Pause and Resume enabling you to pause and restart the session at any time Displaying the Software Download Log WALKnet tracks software download sessions and keeps the results in log files Log files are named SDL date time log and placed in the directory defined by the NMS_LOG environment variable sub directory SDL Notes z For information about how to define the NMS_LOG Environment Variable see Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files on page 1 16 gt To display the software download log Access the Software Download Log dialog box in one of the following ways a In the Software Download dialog box select Open Log from the File menu E In the Main window select Software Download from the Utilities menu and then select Software Download Log The Software Download Log dialog box is displayed showing information for the current or last software downl
371. rogress Gray BS BU disabled for collection purposes Link A description of the link in the following format cell name sector name BS BU name or IP address TS BU Customer ID Up Link The date and time of the last interval collected for the uplink BS BU Down Link The date and time of the last interval collected for the downlink TS BU 8 28 WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection V5 Tab The V5 tab displays information about the V5 call statistics data collected during the current or last collection cycle as shown below Figure 8 12 V5 Tab NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT TS 17 IF 2 NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT TS 17 IF 4 11 18 01 12 35 11 18 01 12 35 WALKnet User s Manual 8 29 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring The V5 tab includes the following read only fields Status The status of the BS BU A LED is displayed for every BS BU indicating the following a When the Cycle Status is Idle the LED indi cates the BS BU completion status of the last collection cycle Green OK Red Problem error or timeout Gray BS BU disabled for collection purposes a When the Cycle Status is Busy the LED indi cates the BS BU status during the current col lection cycle No LED Collection not yet started Green Collection completed successfully Red Collection failed Yellow Collection in progress Gray BS BU disabled for collection purposes Interface A description of the link
372. rom the Clock Redundancy drop down list select Enable or Disable clock redundancy to permit or deny to move to a Secondary Clock Master when the Primary Clock Master fails Choose the Clock Primary Master to be any available E1 port Choose the Clock Secondary Master to be any available E1 port In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU from the dropdown list Available values are Enable and Disable WALKnet User s Manual 4 51 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 4 52 16 Click the OK button to save any modifications made to the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU properties Note You can re configure W3000 Stand Alone BS BU parameters using the BS BU Properties Edit Dialog Box Displaying W3000 Stand Alone BS BU View To access W3000 Stand Alone BS BU View BS BU View enables you to examine the configuration parameters of the W3000 Stand Alone BS BU and access associated Terminal Stations Stand Alone BS BU View is accessed in one of the following ways a In the Navigation Tree by double clicking a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU node a In Sector View by double clicking a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU a In Sector View by selecting WOOO BS BU SA from the Element menu and then selecting View The BS BU View for the selected W3000 BS BU is displayed WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 31 W3000 Stand Alone BS BU View Dialog Box
373. roperties Edit dialog box has the same editable fields as the Add IP Service Dialog Box see Figure 7 44 on page 7 82 and Figure 7 45 on page 7 82 If required modify the IP SLA ID as required by selecting the IP SLA ID from the dropdown list in the IP SLA ID field If required modify the committed information rate CIR for the existing IP Service using the arrows in the CIR field as required If required modify the administrative status of the service by selecting Enable Disable from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field If required for Ethernet Layer 2 only in the Ethernet area modify the BS BU VLAN ID and TS VLAN ID For Ethernet Layer 3 these fields are grayed Click OK or Apply Deleting IP Services gt 7 86 IP services can be deleted from the system To delete an IP service 1 2 In the Services List dialog box select an existing IP service from the list of IP services From the IP Service menu select Delete The Delete IP Service confirmation message is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Service Management Figure 7 46 Delete IP Service Confirmation Message Warning AN You are about to delete the service Are you sure Ba 3 Click Yes to delete the selected IP Service WALKnet User s Manual 7 87 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Adding TDM Services When adding a TDM service you can select the TDM SLA ID specify
374. ror threshold value for the logical port WALKnet User s Manual 7 29 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration User N393 The user side N393 monitored events count value for the logical port User T391 The user side T391 link integrity verification polling timer value for the logical port Net N392 The network side N392 error threshold value for the logical port Net N393 The network side N393 monitored events count value for the logical port User T392 The network side T392 polling verification timer value for the logical port From the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box you can define new Frame Relay logical ports view and edit the properties of existing Frame Relay logical ports and delete Frame Relay logical ports Adding Frame Relay Ports Frame Relay logical ports are defined from the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box when it is accessed from Base Station BU View Terminal Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window gt To add Frame Relay ports 1 In the Frame Relay Port Configuration dialog box from the Port menu select Add The Add Frame Relay Port dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 30 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration Figure 7 18 Add Frame Relay Port Dialog Box ProbT Add Frame Relay Port Location Cell Name NewCell3 az Sector Name Sigis ect BS BU ID ProbT Device Select One Frame Relay Port
375. rs Get Data 8 20 WALKnet User s Manual V5 Call Statistics Notes The Cell Name and Sector Name fields are read only fields that display the names of the cell and sector for which the BS BU is defined The BS BU ID field is also read only and displays the system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name for the BS BU is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box 2 In the Source area select a TS BU from the Device dropdown list The list includes all TS BUs registered to the BS BU 3 Select a V5 interface on the selected TS BU from the V5 Interface Index dropdown list 4 Select the time period for which you want to view V5 call statistics by selecting one of the following Current 15 Minutes Displays the reported statistics for the current 15 minute interval Last 24 Hours Displays the reported statistics for the last 24 hour period including the current 15 minute interval Selected 15 Min Intervals Displays the reported statistics for up to 96 15 minute intervals 5 If you select Selected 15 Min Intervals select the time interval by selecting start and finish times from the dropdown lists in the From Time and To Time fields Notes The From Time and To Time fields are only displayed when Selected 15 Min Intervals is selected 6 In the list of parameters select the Graph checkbox to the right of a parameter
376. rvice dialog box displays all the connections defined on the selected BS BU and TS BUs registered to the BS BU The Frame Relay Ethernet Service dialog box includes the following read only fields Location area Cell Name Sector Name BS BU ID List of Connections FR Service Num ber DLCI Id BS Port TS Id TS Port UBC Kbits UBE Kbits UP CIR Kbits Sec DBC Kbits DBE Kbits The name of the cell for which this BS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which this BS BU has been defined The system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is specified in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box Frame Relay service identifier The DLCI value for the PVC end point on the BS BU or TS BU The BS BU telecom port participating in the connection Port 1 Port 2 or Port 3 The customer ID number of the TS BU The TS BU telecom port participating in the connection The Committed Burst size measured in Kbits for the PVC end point in the uplink direction The Excess Burst size measured in Kbits for the PVC end point in the uplink direction The Committed Information Rate measured in Kbits per second for the PVC end point in the uplink direction The Committed Burst size measured in Kbits for the PVC end point in the downlink direction The Excess Burst size measured in Kbits for the PVC end point in the down
377. s Creating a Sector A sector is a division of a cell that contains Base Stations and Terminal Stations and their respective devices IF MUX RFU and antenna Sectors are defined from Cell View according to the RFUs and antennas located at the Base Station in your WALKair network The direction and angle of coverage of an antenna determine the heading and beam width of a sector The number of sectors that can be defined for a cell depends on the antenna beam width as follows Antenna Beam Maximum Number Width of Sectors 13 24 30 12 45 8 60 6 90 4 120 3 180 2 360 l For detailed descriptions and specifications of antenna types see the WALKair System Description 4 8 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management gt To create a sector 1 In Cell View select New from the Sector menu The Sector Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 6 Sector Properties Edit Dialog Box Sector Properties Edit OF x Location Aa a iI U m i A y B Cell Name SERVER Sector Name ewSectot 0 Heading ooo Beam width 5Deges m IF MUX Type w008 Pots O w o Cancel Heb Note The Cell Name field is a read only field that displays the name of the cell for which the sector is defined 2 In the Name field enter a name with no blank spaces for the sector 3 In the Heading field enter the direction in which the antenna is facing from O to 360
378. s Cell Name NewCellt Shelf ID MPU Client Client Name Location Information BSBUID BU Slot 4 v TS ID ts 13 x Admin Status Enable x o Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Q 7 50 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Client Management Figure 7 30 W3000 Stand Alone BS BU Add Client Dialog Box 10 0 6 126 Add Client ioj x Location az CellName NewCell Sector NewSector1 Client Client Name Pe Location Information Cr BS BU ID fioosize aii i TS ID Admin Status Disable x Help Q Response OK Notes z For a Stand Alone BS BU the Sector name appears instead of the Shelf ID and the BS BU ID drop down list is grayed 2 In the Location area the Cell Name field is the read only field that displays the name of the cell for which the shelf or Stand Alone BS BU is defined The Shelf ID field Shelf only displays the system name if defined for the shelf or when no system name is defined the IP address of the shelf The Sector field Stand Alone BS BU only displays the system name if defined for the BS BU or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU 3 In the Client area Enter an administratively assigned name for this Client in the Client Name field Enter a physical location for this Client e g Client s address in the Location field WALKnet User s Manual 7 51 Chapter 7 System Services C
379. s can only be defined when the V5 Interfaces dialog box is accessed from Base Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window On the BS BU you can define a V5 2 interface over up to three E1 links On the TS BU you can define a V5 1 QBRI or QPOTS interface over a single E1 QBRI or QPOTS card To add V5 interfaces 1 Access the V5 Interfaces dialog box from Base Station BU View or from the WALKnet Main window 2 From the V5 Interface menu select Add Interface The Add V5 Interfaces dialog box is displayed as shown below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration Figure 7 8 Add V5 Interfaces Dialog Box ReserveProbT Add V5 Interface Location Cell Name WIK Cen BS BU ID ReserveProbT Sector Name NewSectort Device Jes bu xi New V5 Interface V5 Interface Idx fa Protocol v5 2 V5 Interface Id Cient_1 Admin Status Disable Variant ID 123 Available Links E1 E1 Ch 16 Ch16 Ch15 Ch15 h31 Ch31 Port PortType Select Linkld Link Type Log CPath Log C Path Log CPath a fens a fimay wf fo roe Sw fo frst fo te x AS e E e of P fo 6 fp few gt fo E OK Cancel Help Response OK la le 3 Select the BS BU or TS BU for which you want to define the interface from the dropdown list in the Device field The V5 protocol supported by the selected device V5 1 or V5 2 is automatically displayed in the Protocol field The available E1 E1 75 1200 QBRI and QPOTS
380. s on the same or a different workstation configured as collection Clients You can run two or more WALKnet sessions configured as collection Servers only if they are not using the same database or if there is no overlapping of BS BUs between them Data collection is performed as long as WALKnet is running You can monitor and configure the collection process from the Performance Data Collection dialog box gt To display the Performance Data Collection dialog box In the Main window select Collection from the Performance menu The Performance Data Collection dialog box is displayed as shown below 8 24 WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection Figure 8 9 Performance Data Collection Dialog Box Performance Data Collection ay File View Collection Process S Operational Mode euen Cycle Progress Cycle Status foe el Collect Previous Cycle Start fi 1 18 01 12 54 30 BSBUs 0 Next Cycle Start fi 1 18 01 13 54 30 Cycle Interval min Jeo DB Connection Status Connected Max Concurrency fi Aon Last Interval Collected SELECTED BSBUs Status ir Up Link Down Link a NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT TS 10 11 18 01 12 36 NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT 15 123 11 18 01 12 36 11718701 12 36 NewCelll NewSectorl ProbT TS 17 1118 01 12 36 11 18701 12 36 APM Close Refresh Generate Heb The Collection Process area of the dialog box displays data collection parameters You can configure
381. s data The data is kept in WALKnet s internal database and displayed using the Frame Relay statistics application Thus for example WALKnet can provide information on how many times during a specified interval there was user side reliability errors on a particular device WALKnet collects data on a session basis meaning it does not keep any history of Frame Relay statistics WALKnet provides the following Frame Relay statistics a Port signaling statistics relating to Frame Relay ports on BS BUs and TS BUs a End point traffic statistics relating to the Frame Relay service itself Port Signaling Statistics gt From the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box you can view the Frame Relay signaling statistics for all Frame Relay ports defined on a selected BS BU or TS BU To configure performance data collection 1 Access the Frame Relay Signaling Statistics dialog box in one of the following ways In the Main window from the Performance menu select Frame relay then BS BU and then Ports signaling Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS dialog box and click OK In the Main window from the Performance menu select Frame relay then TS BU Browse to the required TS BU in the Browse TS dialog box and click OK In the Base Station BU View from the Performance menu select Frame relay then Ports signaling WALKnet User s Manual 8 39 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring In the Terminal
382. s of the service Oper Indicates the current status of the service From the Services List dialog box you can add a new IP Service TDM Service IP SLA and TDM SLA You can edit existing IP Service TDM Service IP SLA and TDM SLA You can delete an existing IP Service or TDM Service Adding IP Services When adding an IP service you can select the IP SLA ID specify the committed information rate and administrative status gt To add an IP service 1 In the Services List dialog box select Add from the IP Services menu The Add IP Service dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 44 on page 7 82 for a W3000 Shelf and 7 45 on page 7 82 for a Stand Alone BS BU WALKnet User s Manual 7 81 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration Figure 7 44 Add IP Service Dialog Box W3000 Shelf Shelf Add IP Service lel Es Location gt Ethernet a B Cell Name NewCell Ethernet port fi Shelf ID Shelf VLAN tagging mode Tagged Local Router IP Addr jo AUL i oli Client Client Name CLI Dest IP Addr Behind LR jo A lt al Location Subnet Mask Behind LR fo 0 0 6 BS BU ID Jeu B Default Router IP Addr jo sft ofl tl TSID ts2 Subnet Mask a BS BU VLAN ID je IP Service A A a a AH i IP SLAID fi x TS VLAN ID fis IPSLAName fe a CIR 256 a ATM NIU for IP J MIR 256 ATM Port J Class of Service Platinum CBR VPI VCI J Sieh REBRA PI YCI j J sati aa Admin St
383. s shown below WALKnet User s Manual 10 21 Chapter 10 Utilities Figure 10 12 Add Configuration File Dialog Box Add Configuration File a x Name BScontig Description BS configuration ok Cancel Help 2 Enter a unique name for the configuration file in the Y field 3 Enter a description for the configuration file if required in the Description field 4 Click OK The new configuration file is displayed in the list of configuration files in the Configuration Load dialog box No date is displayed in the Date field because the file is empty Modifying Configuration Files The description for a configuration file can be modified gt To modify configuration files 1 In the Configuration Load dialog box select a configuration file From the Edit menu select Edit The Edit Configuration File dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 10 13 Edit Configuration File Dialog Box Edit Configuration File E x Name BSconfig Description BS configuration Date 01 06 2003 14 08 04 OK Cancel 3 Modify the description for the configuration file in the Description field and click OK 10 22 WALKnet User s Manual Configuration Upload and Download Deleting Configuration Files Configuration files can be deleted from the WALKnet database gt To delete configuration files 1 In the Configuration Load dialog box select a configuration file 2 From the Edit menu
384. s unavailable Additionally channel 0 is unavailable for selection 3 In the Terminal Station area Select the TS BU Customer ID from the dropdown list in the Customer Id field Select the TS BU port 1 3 for the new service from the dropdown list in the Port field The configured port type of the selected port is automatically displayed in the Port Type field When the port type is E1 select the first E1 channel in the First E1 Channel field Note example when the Signaling Type for the port is CCS channel 16 is unavailable x The E1 channels defined for the signaling for the port are unavailable for selection For Additionally channel 0 is unavailable for selection 4 In the Leased Line Service area Select the bandwidth n x 64Kbps for the new service using the arrows in the Bandwidth field n between 1 and 32 LL services are only possible with E1 X 21 and V 35 packets Select the administrative status for the new service from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field 5 Click OK The new service is displayed in the Leased Line Services dialog box 7 8 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Leased Line Service Management Editing Leased Line Services The administrative status of existing leased line services can be edited gt To edit leased line services 1 In the Leased Line Services dialog box select an existing service from the list of leased line services 2 From the L
385. select Display Mode and then Show All WALKnet User s Manual 8 33 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Displaying Database Errors You can display the last database error by selecting Last Database Error from the View menu in the Performance Data Collection dialog box a If there is no database error the Last Database Error message is displayed as shown below Figure 8 16 Last Database Error Message Box A Last Database Error x i There hasn t been a Database Error E If there is a database error it is displayed as follows Figure 8 17 Last Database Error Message Box B Last Database Error 11 18 01 13 16 44 Fatal 11 Acknowledge the error by clicking Clear You can display a more detailed description of database errors by setting the environment variable NMS_VERBOSE to TRUE 8 34 WALKnet User s Manual Performance Data Collection Configuring Performance Data Collection You can specify how often WALKnet runs a data collection cycle whether to collect from BS BUs concurrently or consecutively and which BS BUs to include in the collection process You can also initiate the collection process mid cycle stop and resume the collection process gt To configure performance data collection 1 In the Performance Data Collection dialog box modify how often WALKnet collects data in the Cycle Interval field The cycle interval must be between 15 to 180 minutes 2 In the Max Concurrency fie
386. select the protocol type from the dropdown list The available protocol types are TCP UDP FTP TFTP SMTP Telnet HTTP SNMP SNMP Trap ICQ and NETBIOS 8 When you select TCP or UDP as the protocol specify the range of port numbers in the From Port and To Port fields 9 In the Action field select the action to be performed on the defined traffic from the dropdown list The available options are as follows High Give the traffic high priority Medium Give the traffic medium priority Low Give the traffic low priority Best Effort Give the traffic best effort priority gt Oo Oo Blocked Drop the traffic WALKnet User s Manual 7 45 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration The availability of these actions depends on the QOS Level selected in the IP Value Added Services dialog box as follows QOS Level Actions Available Platinum All Gold Medium Low Best Effort Block Silver Low Best Effort Block Bronze Block 10 Click OK The definitions are added as an entry in the Access List table Notes You can delete entries in the Access List table by selecting an entry and selecting Delete from the Access List menu 11 Click OK in the IP Value Added Services dialog box to apply the QoS parameters to the selected service 7 46 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Client Management WALKair 3000 Client Management Client records contain information about the customer such as n
387. set management see Versions and Reset Management in Chapter 10 Utilities Deleting W3000 Shelf BS BUs Deleting W3000 BS BU from a sector permanently removes the W3000 BS BU and all its components from the sector gt To delete a W3000 BS BU 1 To remove a W3000 BS BU in one the following ways In Sector View select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and select Delete In Shelf View select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and select Delete The following Delete Card confirmation message is displayed Figure 4 27 Delete Card Confirmation Message Delete Card i This wil permanently remove this card from this shelf Are you sure 2 Click Yes to delete the W3000 BS BU from the shelf WALKnet User s Manual 4 45 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Modifying W3000 Shelf BS BU Properties You can modify W3000 BS BU properties from Sector View Shelf View or BS BU View gt To modify W3000 BS BU properties 1 Open the W3000 BS BU Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In Sector View select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and select Edit Card Properties In Shelf View select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu and select Edit Card Properties In BS BU View select Edit BS BU from the BS BU menu The BS BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 28 BS BU Properties Edit Dialog Box MPU_BU Slot 4 BS BU Prop
388. snGconretor mccacustansiareeateieieeden TOODA b a succes rane E SUMS Baf chs shediieeeacuidaoideereasacedaedadotenehidmtsneets Network Navigation Tree seceeeeeeeeee Workspace c cece ceecccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeess WALKnet Navigation Model sseseeeeeeeeeeees Horizontal Navigation a a Error Information scseceiseisiieticescaccsansncaesntieeneencncinenss Updating Information cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Chapter 3 Map Management Introduction sin ieiecisiivicesincnemniwesivnncnnlasnensnnriedertundsidene Creating Map Background Images Creating a New Map ceceecccccesseesenteeeeeeeeeeeeeteneees Changing a Map Background eeee Opening an Existing Map ccecceeeeseeeeeees SAVING Maps seccsesscnticinieescdcerniiwsanenncccwinetraniiennerine Saving a New Map nsee Saving a Map with a New Name Chapter 4 Cell Configuration WGI ROW escent cscantasaasaccicnansixinceaasiedadaccatinceiaceksanicanns Cell Management cccccccsssseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeneees Creating a New Cell lessees Displaying Cell View seses Editing and Deleting Cells ee Sector and Shelf Management cccsseseeeeeeeee Sector Management seeen 2 WALKnet User s Manual Contents Shelf IMAACEING IIE j i0 ccas necasteeenctadteuddenaveadiuseyetecasuaudscuedaceceageetalen 4 19 Base Station Basic Unit Management
389. some parameters and initiate the collection process mid cycle Refer to Configuring Performance Data Collection on page 8 35 The lower half of the dialog box displays information about the previous or current collection cycle Information about air performance data is displayed in the APM tab and information about V5 call statistics is displayed in the V5 tab Refer to Viewing the Collection Process on page 8 26 Notes z Click Refresh at any time to update the information displayed in the Performance Data Collection dialog box WALKnet User s Manual 8 25 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring Viewing the Collection Process Data collection is performed as long as WALKnet is running You can monitor the process at any time from the Performance Data Collection dialog box Each area of the dialog box is described below The following tools are available when viewing the collection process Viewing Data for a Selected BS BU on page 8 30 Filtering the Display of BS BUs on page 8 32 Displaying Database Errors on page 8 34 Performance Data Collection Dialog Box The Performance Data Collection dialog box includes parameters about the collection cycle and displays information about the collection process for each BS BU The Performance Data Collection dialog box conatains the following three areas Collection Process Area on page 8 26 APM Tab on page 8 27 V5 Tab
390. source from the dropdown list in the Clock Source field Internal External Telecom1 Telecom2 Oo o o gt Telecom3 8 In the Clock Output field select Enabled to utilize the Base Station output clock signal to synchronize other external equipment 9 Click OK to save any modifications made to the properties of the BS BU Moving BS BU Slot Positions BS BUs can be moved from one slot to another in the same sector to ensure that there is correct correlation between the physical rack placement of the units and the position indicated in the WALKnet software gt To move a BS BU 1 In the Sector View select the BS BU slot in which the required BS BU is defined 2 From the BS BU menu select Move The Move BS BU dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 37 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 24 Move BS BU Dialog Box ProbT Move BS BU OL x Location S Cell Name NewCell3 Sector Name SigiSect BS BU ID ProbT Destination Slot Slot 3 x o Cancel Help 3 In the Destination Slot field select the slot to which you want to move the selected BS BU from the dropdown list and click OK The selected BS BU is moved to the new slot position in Sector View WALKair 3000 Shelf Base Station Basic Unit Management For Stand Alone Base Station BS BU management see WALKair 3000 Stand Alone Base Station Basic Unit Management on page 4 49 Creating Shelf Basic Unit Car
391. ss the Frame Relay Service Selection dialog box in one of the following ways In the Main window from the Performance menu select Frame relay then BS BU and then End point traffic Browse to the required BS BU in the Browse BS dialog box and click OK In the Base Station BU View from the Performance menu select Frame relay then End point traffic The Frame Relay Service Selection dialog box as shown below is dis played showing a list of services defined over the ports on the selected BS BU Figure 8 22 Frame Relay Service Selection Dialog Box Ethernet Frame Relay Service Selection Service lolx B Location CellName NewCelll Sector Name NewSector BS BU ID JEthemet Admin Status active Por 1 Port 1 i E fz 1 2 3 4 Inactive Inactive nactive Por 1 10 Port 1 Por 1 10 Port 1 10 lt Pont 10 Pot IE 22 Por Chose Refresh Patio E as ps asin re nero fio Pont fe fie ie fio 3 fio 10 10 None i234 Inactive Inactive Inactive 10 None i234 inactive Inactive Inactive Port 1 10 Por 1 fio 10 22 fi 12 32 21 36 inactive Inactive Inactive 22 ii 1 1 1 Inactive fi Inactive active Inactive Inactive nactive Traffic Help Response OK 2 Select one or more services as required and click Traffic The End Point Traffic Statistics dialog box is displayed as shown below 8 46 WALKnet User s Manual Frame Relay Statistics Figure 8
392. ssages for more details 2 22 WALKnet User s Manual Updating Information Updating Information Whenever you open a WALKnet window or dialog box WALKnet automatically retrieves the latest data from the devices defined in the WALKair system and updates the displayed information You can manually update the information in WALKnet windows or dialog boxes at any time gt To manually update information a In the Main window select Refresh from the Configuration menu or press lt F3 gt The WALKnet application transparently polls Shelves BS BUs and TS BUs defined in the system and updates the information displayed in the open map Note za Click the Refresh button in an individual dialog box to update the information displayed in that dialog box WALKnet User s Manual 2 23 Chapter 2 Getting Started This page left intentionally blank 2 24 WALKnet User s Manual Chapter 3 Map Management In This Chapter Introduction on page 3 2 Creating a New Map on page 3 3 Opening an Existing Map on page 3 5 Saving Maps on page 3 6 Chapter 3 Map Management Introduction Maps are displayed in the WALKnet Workspace Maps display WALKair cells within a specific geographical area and include the configuration of the WALKair system The geographical area is represented in the map by a background image GIF file A map may show an entire county a city or only an
393. status Green All services function properly Red One or more services failed Gray There are no services defined The administratively assigned name for this Client By convention this is the fully qualified name in UPPERCASE The physical location of this Client e g Client s address The textual identification of the contact person together with the information on how to contact this person e g Client s Phone number The system name if defined of the BS BU or when no system name is defined the Carrier Index of the BS BU The system name if defined of the TS or when no system name is defined the Customer Id of the TS Defines whether a Client has at least one IP service defined Yes or No Defines whether a Client has at least one TDM service defined Yes or No The administrative status of the client Enable or Disable WALKnet User s Manual 7 49 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration From the Client List dialog box you can add new clients and edit or delete existing clients Adding Clients When adding clients you specify the Client Name Location Information BS BU ID TS ID and Administrative Status gt To add a client 1 In the Client List dialog box select Add from the Clients menu The Add Client dialog box is displayed as shown below for a Shelf and for a Stand Alone BS BU Figure 7 29 W3000 Shelf BS BU Add Client Dialog Box Location ___________ z
394. sync AIS is detected on the E1 interface RAI is detected on the E1 interface LOS is terminated on the E1 interface LFA is terminated on the E1 interface LMFA is terminated on the E1 interface Multiframe is detected on the E1 interface AIS terminated on the E1 interface RAI is terminated on the E1 interface WALKnet User s Manual E3 Port Services Traps E3 Port Services Traps Trap Trap Name in MIB Send Criterion Number 7 E3LoopOn The E3 interface is in facility loopback towards ATM state The E3 interface is in terminal loopback towards W3K state 8 E3LoopOff The facility loopback towards ATM is removed from the E3 interface The terminal loopback towards W3K is removed from the E3 interface 9 E3IfChangedOn SLOS is detected on the E3 interface RAI is detected on the E3 interface OOF is detected on the E3 interface LOF is detected on the E3 interface PLCP OOF is detected on the E3 interface PLCP LOF is detected on the E3 interface PLCP RAI is detected on the E3 interface PLCP Framing Error is detected on the E3 interface Loss of Cell Delineation is detected on the E3 interface AIS is detected on the E3 interface WALKnet User s Manual B 5 Appendix B Trap Number 10 B 6 Trap Name in MIB E3IfChangedOff Send Criterion SLOS is terminated on the E3 interface RAI is terminated on the E3 interface OOF is terminated on the E3 interface LOF is terminated on the E3 int
395. system is Shelf based or is a Stand Alone BS BU If a Shelf it also depends on whether an ATM NIU card or an 12xE1 NIU card is installed on the shelf The figure below shows Add TDM SLA dialog boxes for a W3000 Shelf ATM NIU a W3000 Shelf 12 x E1NIU and a W3000 Stand Alone BS BU WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 TDM SLA Management Figure 7 40 Add TDM SLA Dialog Box MPU Add TDM SLA OP x Location TDM SLA B Cell Name NewCell TDMSLAID f ShelfID MPU TDMSLAName BS BUID BU Slot 4 Bandwidth a TS ID ts 13 ATM NIU TSE1 NIU Slot Number fi Etpot 5 sy ATM Port fi xvj Line Type Framed No CRC VPLAVCI J ok Eo Rea Heb Response OK Q Shelf BS BU with ATM NIU MPU Add TDM SLA olx Meri A CellName NewCelt TomsiaiD ooo ShelfID MPU TDM SLA Name BS BUID BU Slot 4 Beekeelt fp TSID frs 13 12E1 NIU NIU Slot Number is TS E1 El pott fi xi E1 port 5 xl Line Type Framed No CRC Line Type Framed No CRC First Channel fi x OK Cancel Refresh Help Response OK Shelf BS BU with 12x E1 NIU 10 0 6 126 Add TDM SLA olx Location TDM SLA az CellName NewCen TOMSLAID f Sector NewSector TDM SLA Name TDM BS BUID 10 0 6 126 Bandwidth jo TSID Ts 1 BS BU SA E1 E1 port 2 TSE1 be xl E1 port E yi Line Type Framed No CRC Line Type F
396. t Disable x Access List Protocol From To Action 4 In the QOS Level field select the required QoS level from the dropdown list The available levels are Platinum Gold Silver and Bronze 5 In the Max Traffic Rate area enter the maximum rates for voice and video traffic When Silver or Bronze is selected as the QOS Level the fields in the Max Traffic Rate area are read only When Gold is selected as the QOS Level the Voice field in the Max Traffic Rate area is read only Notes z The value in the field automatically calculated is the maximum traffic rate as a percentage of the minimum of UCIR and DCIR 7 44 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Frame Relay and Ethernet Configuration 6 In the Access List area you can define the prioritization and filtering of traffic by specifying a particular action for certain types of traffic For example you might want WALKair to limit access to TCP IP data To add an entry to the Access List table select Add from the Access List menu The Add Access List Entry dialog box is displayed as shown below Figure 7 27 Add Access List Entry Dialog Box 10 0 25 170 Add Location Cell Name Belgium tst S 225 Sector Name Belgium ttS S BS BU ID 10 0 25170 List Entry _ _ __ ___ ________ Protocol fe v From Port e To Port CE Action lw tti tS x o Cancel Hel 7 In the Protocol field
397. t 1 31 3 Click OK The new TDM SLA is displayed in the TDM SLA List dialog box Editing TDM SLAs Only the TDM SLA Name of an existing TDM SLA can be edited gt To add a TDM SLA 1 In the TDM SLA List dialog box select a TDM SLA from the list WALKnet User s Manual 7 75 Chapter 7 System Services Configuration 2 From the TDM SLA menu select Edit Double click on the line in the table identical to the Edit selected line option The TDM SLA Properties Edit dialog box that is displayed depends on the system Shelf or Stand Alone and the type of interface In either case only the TDM SLA Name can be edited 3 Modify the TDM SLA Name field in the TDM SLA area as required 4 Click OK or Apply Deleting TDM SLAs To delete a TDM SLA from the system all services defined for this TDM SLA should be deleted first gt To add a TDM SLA 1 In the TDM SLA List dialog box select an existing TDM SLA from the list of TDM SLAs 2 From the TDM SLA menu select Delete The Delete TDM SLA confirmation message is displayed as shown below Figure 7 41 Delete TDM SLA Confirmation Message Warning AN You are about to delete the SLA Are you sure pa 3 Click Yes to delete the selected TDM SLA 4 The following message box appears if the selected TDM SLA has services Figure 7 42 Delete TDM SLA Error Message AN All services should be deleted before SL4 removal 7 76 WALKnet User s Manual WA
398. t the Terminal Station and uplink parameters refer to measurements at the Base Station A graphical representation of traffic rates in kbps is displayed for CIR Committed Information Rate MIR Maximum Information Rate and the traffic priority levels configured for the specific IP SLAs Each parameter is displayed in a unique color to enable easy viewing WALKair 3000 provides IP SLA performance details for either a selected 15 minute interval or the last 24 hours Up to 96 15 minuite intervals are stored by the program Accessing IP SLA Performance Monitoring gt To access IP SLA performance monitoring 1 In the Main window select the Performance menu then IP SLA Per formance 2 In the Browse Shelf window that opens browse to the required shelf and then click OK The IP SLA Performance dialog box is displayed as shown below 8 50 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 IP SLA Performance Monitoring Figure 8 24 IP SLA Performance Monitoring Dialog Box File Location Cell W3kKCell Shelf IP Address 10 0 15 89 Shelf Name liat Browse iix Uplink Traffic SLA ID Selection Time Period BS BUID BU Slot 6 Last 24 Hour TSID TS 4 IP SLA ID w Selected 15 Min Intervals Downlink Traffic Rate Select Value for Mma r Refresh The IP SLA Performance dialog is composed of the following areas Location SLA ID Selection T
399. tatus of a V5 interface is Disable You can modify this 4 Click OK Changing the Administrative Status The administrative status of a V5 interface is modified separately from the other properties gt To change the administrative status 1 In the V5 Interfaces dialog box select an existing interface from the list of V5 interfaces 2 From the V5 Interface menu select Change Interface Status The Change V5 Interface Admin Status dialog box is displayed as shown below 7 18 WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 V5 Configuration Figure 7 11 Change V5 Interface Admin Status Dialog Box 10 10 10 227 Change V5 Interface Admin Status E3 Device BS BU V5 Interface Id E Admin Status Enable x e j elp Response OK 3 Modify the administrative status of the V5 interface by selecting Enable Disable from the dropdown list in the Admin Status field 4 Click OK Deleting V5 Interfaces To delete a V5 interface the BS BU s V5 interface must have a Disable administrative status gt To V5 interfaces 1 In the V5 Interfaces dialog box select an existing interface from the list of V5 interfaces 2 From the V5 Interface menu select Delete The selected interface is deleted V5 Subscribers When V5 interfaces have been defined you can define V5 subscribers over these interfaces WALKair enables the definition of up to 600 V5 subscribers Defined subscribers can be saved and loaded to su
400. ted from a sector or their properties can be modified Deleting BS BUs Deleting BS BUs from a sector permanently removes the BS BU and all its components from the sector gt To delete a BS BU 1 In Sector View select a BS BU slot and select Delete from the BS BU menu The Delete BS BU confirmation message is displayed 4 34 WALKnet User s Manual Base Station Basic Unit Management Figure 4 22 Delete BS BU Confirmation Message Delete BS BU N This will permanently remove this BS BU and all its contents from this sector Are you sure J 2 Click Yes to delete the BS BU from the sector Modifying BS BU Properties You can modify the properties of a BS BU from Sector View or Base Station BU View gt To modify BS BU properties 1 Open the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways In the Sector View by selecting a BS BU slot and selecting Edit from the BS BU menu In the Base Station BU View by selecting Edit BS BU from the BS BU menu The BS BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 35 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 23 BS BU Properties Edit Dialog Box 10 10 15 5 BS BU Properties Edit OF x Location AAAaAa Ii _ i s9_i_ Mi imi B Cell Name Newcen Sector Name NewSectol BS BU Address fi 0 10 15 5 SNMP Configuration SNMP Poll Interval sec E SNMP Poll Timeout sec fi 0 System Name fwalkar S
401. the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box TS BU ID The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Browse Enables you to display configuration information in Button the open Terminal Station BU View for another TS BU in any sector in any cell in the same map Settings area Serial The serial number of the TS BU Number Frequency The frequency at which the TS BU is operating Band Oper Status The operational status of the TS BU Admin The administrative status of the TS BU Status Enable enables the TS BU to establish a radio link with the BS BU Disable disables the radio link established between the TS BU and BS BU Estimated The approximate distance in km between the BS TS BS BU and TS BU O indicates a distance of less Distance km than 10 kilometers Ports area A list of telecom ports on the TS BU Detected The type of telecom interface card Type installed detected E1 E1 75 120W V35X 21 E1 FR V35 X 21 FR 2M V 35 X 21 FR 4M Ethernet QBRI or POTS Configured The type of telecom interface card configured E1 Type E1 75 120W V35 X 21 E1 FR V35 FR 2M X21 FR 2M V35 FR 4M X21 FR 4M Ether net QBRI or POTS Description A
402. the telecom interfaces Status up or down Port Admin The administrative status of the telecom interfaces Status Enabled or Disabled The parameters are read only In order to modify the configuration parameters refer to Modifying NIU Properties on page 5 28 From E3 NIU View you can do the following a Display configuration information for another E3 NIU in any sector in any cell in the same map see Horizontal Navigation on page 2 19 a Edit NIU properties see Modifying NIU Properties on page 5 28 E Edit onboard ports properties see Configuring ATM or E1 or E3 Interfaces on page 5 31 E Manage software versions resets see Shelf Management on page 4 19 WALKnet User s Manual 5 27 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Deleting NIUs ATM NIU or 12xE1 NIU cards can be deleted from a shelf Deleting an ATM 12xE1 E3 NIU from a shelf permanently removes the NIU from the shelf For a detailed description of deleting WALKair 3000 slot cards refer to Shelf Management on page 4 19 Modifying NIU Properties gt 5 28 You can modify the properties of an ATM 12xE1 E3 NIU from Sector View Shelf View or NIU View To modify NIU properties Open the ATM NIU 12xE1 NIU E3 NIU Properties Edit dialog box in one of the following ways E Select an NIU Card in Sector View Select Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then select Edit Card Properties E Select an NIU Card in Shelf V
403. ties 1 Open the W3K IF MUX Properties dialog box in one of the following ways WALKnet User s Manual 4 17 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration In Sector View by selecting Edit IF MUX Properties from the Sector menu By clicking the Next button in the first Sector Configuration Wizard screen The W3000 IF MUX Properties dialog box is displayed as shown in one of the two windows below depending on how it was accessed Figure 4 14 W3000 IF MUX Properties Dialog Box W3000 IF MUX Properties Edit Iof xi Location AA AAA A B Cell Name Newt Sector Name NewSecto2 Shelf Name Ser Shelf IP Address fooisso oo Setting Area IF MUX ID Number fIF MUX 0 lt j 3000 IF MUX Properties Edit Location AA9ahopa _ i B Cell Name Newe Sector Name NewSecto2 Shelf Name Sherr Shelf IP Address foose SS Setting Area IF MUX ID Number IF MUX 0 puema fem DetatGanja 8000 Tx Power fso Tx Power fis oo000 Rix Operating Point zao Rix Operating Point 7000000 C S Reference Oscillator C Reference Oscillator Tea Oper Status Dom t CS ws Oper Status Dom tst S Admin Status Enbe t S S Admin Status Enae t S Response OK Q Response OK If this dialog box is accessed from the Sector Configuration Wizard a Previous button returns the user to the Shelf Properties Edit Dia log box and OK applies the IF MUX properties right window in
404. ting Chassis Slot Card gt To delete a card 1 In the chassis picture select a slot 2 From the Chassis Element menu select Chassis Slot then Delete 3 The following Delete Chassis Slot Card confirmation message is displayed Figure 4 18 Delete Chassis Slot Card Confirmation Message Delete Card IN This will permanently remove this card from this shelf Are you sure Jo 4 Click Yes to delete a card from the chassis Changing Chassis Slot Card Type gt To change chassis slot card type 1 In the chassis picture select a card WALKnet User s Manual 4 27 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration 2 From the Chassis Element menu select Chassis Slot from the Chassis Element menu then Change Card Type and then the new card type The type of card selected card is changed Note ar You can change card type only for cards with an Admin status of Disable If the Admin status of the card is Enable the following error message is displayed This operation is permitted only when Admin Status Disable Moving a Card to Another Chassis Slot in Chassis A chassis slot card can be moved from one slot to another in the chassis to ensure a correct correlation between the physical rack placement of the units and the position indicated in the WALKnet software 4 28 WALKnet User s Manual Sector and Shelf Management gt To move a card 1 In the chassis picture select a slot where the req
405. tion Tree by double clicking a W3000 BS BU node In Sector View or Shelf View by double clicking a W3000 BS BU Card In Sector View by selecting Chassis Slot from the Element menu and then selecting View From the Chassis Element menu in Shelf View by selecting Chassis Slot and then select View The Shelf BS BU View for the selected W3000 BS BU is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 4 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Figure 4 26 W3000 Shelf BS BU View olx BS BU Port zs Location A r Settings _Aa _JpjA pR_A A Cell Name NewCeln Serial Number 30541 9896 Sector A Name J Vendor ID 4277 Sector B Name J Actual Frequency Band Jraso Shelf ID Ronen Kalish Shelf Configured Frequency Band r430 BS BU ID Bua Data service ATM NIU None Slot Number 2 TDM service ATM 12xE1 NIU Pi2KE1 NIU 13 Browse IF MUX A IF MUX 7 IF MUX B None Status MM 3 Admin Status Enable Active IF MUX JF MUX A Oper Status W Modulation Change Disable Fault Status No Faults Actual IP Mode Basic Configured IP Mode Basic Redundancy AA a _i__ i ia Redundancy Status Enabled Card Type Stand By Status Jin Service Detected Type Admin JBS BU Redundant BS BU Slot No Jeu 11 Interface Type Speed Oper Status Admin Status Ethernet 102400 Kbps Down Disable cee Retesh Heb BS BU View displays the configuration parameters of the selected W3000 BS BU Card The parameters are read only To m
406. tion mode Automatic Manual Configured RFU The active RFU A B Oper Status The operating status Up Down RFU A and B IF Cable areas The parameters in the RFU B IF Cable area parameters are only enabled when redundancy is enabled Type The cable type Other LMR400 CF14CU2U500hCm Length m The length of cable in meters Gain Valid The validity of the Tx and Rx Gain Valid Not Valid When Not Valid is selected the system default Gain is used Tx Gain dB The current Tx Gain in dB Rx Gain dB The current Rx Gain in dB External Attenuator areas These fields are read only Recommended The recommended external attenuator Actual The actual external attenuator 3 4 84 Click Apply to save any modifications made to the RFU and antenna parameters to the WALKnet database The Broadcast Parameters dialog box is displayed Figure 4 46 Broadcast Parameters Dialog Box i Broadcast parameters to All BS BUs in the Sector No Cancel For broadcast of parameters to all BS BUs in the sector click the Yes button and proceed to step 6 OR WALKnet User s Manual Configuring the RFU and Antenna For broadcast of parameters to only selected BS BUs click the No button and proceed to the next step 4 The Select BS BUs To Send dialog box is displayed Figure 4 47 Select BS BUs To Send Dialog Box SelectBSBUsToSend xi B Sector Name NewSector3 Select BS BU M ProbT hls
407. tistics of air performance Call Statistics Provides access to V5 call statistics Frame Relay Provides access to Frame Relay statistics Collection Provides access to the air performance monitoring collection IP SLA Performance Provides access to IP SLA monitoring WALKnet User s Manual 2 7 Chapter 2 Getting Started Utilities Menu Tests b Software Download gt Configuration Load gt Versions b SNMP Parameters The Utilities menu includes the following options Tests Enables you to perform BER tests Software Download Enables you to perform software downloads to devices Configuration Load Enables you to download and upload WALKair 3000 and WALKair 1000 BS BU configuration parameters Versions Enables you to view resident software versions on devices SNMP Parameters Enables you to specify SNMP parameters Security Menu Authorization Change Password The Security menu includes the following options 2 8 Authorization Enables you to view a list of users and define new users Change Password Enables you to change the WALKnet access password WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Main Window Fault Menu WaALKai Alarms Monitor WaALKair Alarms History The Fault menu is used to access displayed alarms in the WALKnet Alarm Browser and only appears if HP OpenView is not installed or installed and not running in the system The Fault menu in
408. to submitting more than Bc Be data or due to any network congestion recovery procedures Out Frames The number of frames sent by the network egress regardless of whether they are Bc or Be frames for this PVC end point In DE Frames The number of frames received by the network ingress with the DE bit set to 1 for this PVC end point In Excess Frames The number of frames received by the network ingress for this PVC end point that were treated as excess traffic Frames which are sent to the network with DE bit set to zero are treated as excess when more than Bc bits are submitted to the network during the Committed Information Rate Measurement Interval Tc Excess traffic may or may not be discarded at the ingress if more than Bc Be bits are submitted to the network during Tc Frames which are sent to the network with DE bit set to one are also treated as excess traffic Out Excess Frames The number of frames sent by the network egress for this PVC end point that were treated as excess traffic The DE bit may be set to one WALKnet User s Manual Frame Relay Statistics In Disc In Oct In Discards Frames The number of frames received by the network ingress that were discarded due to traffic enforcement for this PVC end point In Octets The number of octets received by the network ingress for this PVC end point This counter should only count octets from the beginning of the Frame Rel
409. to display that parameter in the graph WALKnet User s Manual 8 21 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring 7 Click Get Data Values for the V5 call statistics for the selected time interval are displayed in the Value column to the right of the Graph column The graph displays V5 call statistics for the selected parameters The color of the lines in the graph matches the corresponding color surrounding the selected checkbox of the parameter Notes When you select Current 15 Minutes as the time interval the Get Data button becomes a Stop button Clicking Stop terminates the accumulation of V5 call statistics 8 To set all Uplink and Downlink FER Frame Error Rate counters to 0 click Reset Counters The following V5 call statistics appear in the list of parameters in the V5 Call Statistics dialog box TCL MSC PSC MNSC NCE NFCE NTC Total Call Length The total length of calls that occurred during the selected time period This is measured from the request to allocate the air time slot for voice to the request to release the air time slot Minimum Simultaneous Calls The minimum number of simultaneous calls that occurred during the selected time period Peak Simultaneous Calls The maximum number of simultaneous calls that occurred during the selected time period Mean Simultaneous Calls The average number of simultaneous calls that occurred during the selected time period Number of Cal
410. tus Coloring on page 11 3 Access to WALKair Base Station Element View on page 11 12 Note z Management of both WALKair 3000 and WALKair 1000 elements can be integrated within HP OpenView WALKair 3000 and WALKair 1000 functions will be referred to jointly as WALKkair Chapter 11 HPOV Customization Integration Overview There are three ways in which HP OpenView is customized by the installation of WALKnet 1 11 2 The WALKair alarms correlation policy is implemented so that HP OpenView conforms to the following requirements If the NNM Event Subsystem receives an ON type trap alarm from a WALKair element and one or more OFF type traps are received subsequently the primary ON type trap and all of the subsequent traps are acknowledged automatically if the following conditions are true The IP address of the source of the subsequent traps the BU element on the WALKair 1000 and the MPU element on the WALKair 3000 is equal to the IP address of the source of the primary trap The buAlarmData and or buTrapSource values that came with the subsequent traps are equal to the corresponding values of the primary trap If the NNM Event Subsystem receives a sequence of equal traps from the same element and the buAlarmData and or buTrapSource values of subsequent traps are equal to the corresponding values of the primary trap then all the subsequent traps within the OV Alarm Browser are correlated under the first
411. uAlrmData con tains the Port and Analog line This trap is sent when a Transient Power Alarm is detected on the QPOTS Analog line buAlrmData con tains the Port and Analog line A 6 WALKnet User s Manual Appendix B WALKair 3000 Trap Descriptions In this Appendix General Comments on page B 2 Telecom Interface Traps on page B 3 El Port Services Traps on page B 4 E3 Port Services Traps on page B 5 STM1 Port Services Traps on page B 7 Devices Traps on page B 8 IFU Traps on page B 10 Radio Link Traps on page B 11 RFU Traps on page B 12 IF MUX Traps on page B 13 Software Traps on page B 14 Configuration Traps on page B 16 Sector Traps on page B 17 MPU Communication Traps on page B 18 Shelf Traps on page B 19 BS BU Redundancy Traps on page B 21 Service SLA Client Traps on page B 22 Clock Control Traps on page B 23 General Traps on page B 25 Appendix B General Comments Traps are sent from MPU to the management stations according to the Trap manager list The variables attached to each trap are a BuAlrmType contains the number of the trap transmitted when the alarm is ON a BuAlrmSeverity Alarm Severity major 1 minor 2 warning 3 info 4 critical 5 a BuAlrmState Alarm State on 1 off 2 a BuAlrmData The data string includes additional alarm infor
412. ual 11 11 Chapter 11 HPOV Customization Access to WALKair Base Station Element View To start a WALKair Base Station Element View window from a specific BU object s contextual menu select Start BS BU View Window from the right click popup menu of the icon representing that BU element on the NNM map For WALKair 3000 select Start Shelf View Window from the right click popup menu of the icon representing the MPU on the NNM map The following occurs a If the WALKnet application is not currently running it is launched so that the required screen for the specific object is displayed automatically The user must complete the proper login procedure When the WALKnet application starts a special window responsible for communication with HP OpenView appears as shown in Figure 11 8 Do not close this window until the interaction between HPOV and WALKnet is no longer required Figure 11 8 Starting WALKnet SA D gt eannan Be Le Yow Deme Drie fet See One e a fey Alaplalplet alz e WALKNet i Version ree HEEB T atone J mans r iar m toe Reet ag Mowe t Poat estee Dewey Ot Bee jo ete aa inet Kivu gie eres oe pews erus ome OE en a If the WALKnet application is already running it displays the required screen automatically and no authorization procedure is needed as it was done previously when the WALKnet application was started If the WALKnet applicat
413. uired card is defined 2 From the Chassis Element menu select Chassis Slot then Move The Hsc9 Move Card dialog box is displayed Figure 4 19 Hsc9 Move Card Dialog Box oxi Location AA Ai AMA Am mm ammm B Cell Name NewCell Shelf Name Shelf Shelf IP Address fi 0 0 15 90 Card Name eu B Destination Slot s lot 1 gt ok Cancel Help 3 Select the slot to which you want to move the selected card from the dropdown list in the Destination Slot field and click OK The selected card is moved to the new slot position WALKnet User s Manual 4 29 Chapter 4 Cell Configuration Base Station Basic Unit Management WAL Kair 1000 Base Station Basic Unit Management Creating Base Station Basic Units Base Station Basic Units BS BU are identified by their IP Address rather than a name like cells and sectors Once a BS BU has been defined its configuration parameters and its registered Terminal Station Basic Units TS BUs are accessible gt To create a BS BU 1 In the Sector View select an empty slot position 2 From the BS BU menu select New or double click on the selected empty slot The BS BU Properties Edit dialog box is displayed Figure 4 20 BS BU Properties Edit Dialog Box BS BU Properties Edit oi x Location AAa a a a ii aANm i i mMmaa B Cell Name Newcemn Sector Name News ectorl BS BU IP Address H i SNMP Poll Interval sec 300 SNMP Poll Timeout sec
414. um value for the parameter in the Minimum field and a maximum value in the Maximum field 3 Click OK WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring WALKair 3000 Air Performance Monitoring WALKair 3000 provides air performance monitoring for the bi directional air link path between a BS BU and the TSs connected to it Air performance monitoring is based on the error performance measurements of 5 msec fixed size air frames Each air frame is monitored by means of a Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC WALKair s 3000 air performance monitoring is compliant with ITU T Recommendation G 826 and ITU T Recommendation G 821 WALKair 3000 provides an air performance summary with the details of an air performance for the current 15 minutes and the last 24 hours In addition WALKair 3000 accumulates APM parameters for up to 96 15 minute intervals and displays these parameter values and their graphical representation in a detailed air performance table Air Performance Summary The air performance summary enables you to view the Downlink DL and Uplink UL parameters for selected time intervals gt To view the air performance summary 1 Access the Air Performance Summary dialog box in one of the following ways In the Terminal Station View select Air Performance Summary from the Performance menu In the Main window select Air then Air Performance Summary from the Performance menu Browse to the
415. und for the map New Cell Enables you to create a new cell WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Navigation Model WALKnet Navigation Model The WALKnet application uses a combination of look down and look through methods which provides both overall and specific views of the WALKair system To display and manage the WALKair network a hierarchical navigation model is used whereby you drill down from the cell icons through the hierarchy of devices as follows Cell l Sectors WALKair 3000 Shelves WALKair 3000 Stand Alone y Basie m La 4 4 Base Station Basic Units Basic Units Main Network Hot Processor Interface Swap Unit Unit Controller WALKair 1000 Terminal WALKair 3000 Terminal Station Basic Units Station Basic Units At each level the parameters and configuration information are displayed in a View of that level as follows WALKnet User s Manual 2 15 Chapter 2 Getting Started Figure 2 5 WALKnet Navigation Model for WALKair 1000 System 2 16 WALKnet User s Manual WALKnet Navigation Model Figure 2 6 WALKnet Navigation Model for WALKair 3000 Shelf based System _ WALKnet User s Manual 2 17 Chapter 2 Getting Started Figure 2 7 WALKnet Navigation Model for WALKair 3000 Stand Alone System Cell Mew Sector Wew BS BU ew At each level or View you can view and edit the properties of the device as well as access the child or sub el
416. vice name gt 3 Prepend the path of the Oracle library directory to the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable Database Size Requirements The Air Link Performance Data Collection process inserts 96 records per BS BU TS BU air link per day The record size for Microsoft Access is 140 bytes The record size for Oracle8i is 300 bytes WALKnet Customization for UNIX This customization requires some basic knowledge about UNIX administration After successfully installing WALKnet the user login file should be modified so that the path variable includes the directory into which WALKnet was installed To run WALKnet enter the command Run_WALKnet Note j To enable the Help browser set the GeNMS_UNIX_EXT_HELP_VIEWER environment variable to the full path name of the browser WALKnet User s Manual 1 15 Chapter 1 Introduction to WALKnet Defining the Environmental Variable for Log Files You need to define an environmental variable in order to save WALKnet log files When defining the variable you include a directory path under which WALKnet will create the following directories for the log files E SDL includes software download files see Displaying the Software Download Log on page 10 13 E BER _ Test includes BER test results Performing BER Tests on page 10 44 a Audit_Log includes user login information files see Starting WALKnet on page 2 2 a Trap includes WALKnet Alarm Browser
417. wCelt Shelf fi 0 0 15 90 Admin Status Enbe t S Browse TFTP FTP Parameters Server IP Address 0 0 Server File Path jdm Load Action Noe st S Load Status O Refresh Heb Response OK 2 If you want to navigate to a different shelf or different MPU on the same shelf click Browse and select the appropriate shelf and MPU 3 In the FTP Parameters area enter the Server IP Address and the FTP Server File Path 4 To upload to the server click the Put button or select Put from the Configuration menu OR 5 To download from the server to the MPU click the Get button or select Get from the Configuration menu WALKnet User s Manual 5 15 Chapter 5 Shelf Management Accessing Software Reset Management gt To Access Software Reset Management For a detailed description of software reset management refer to Versions and Reset Management in Chapter 10 Utilities Moving MPU Slot Positions MPUs like all other cards can be moved from one slot to another For a detailed description of moving MPUs refer to Shelf Management on page 4 19 5 16 WALKnet User s Manual Network Interface Unit Management Network Interface Unit Management The next step when defining a WALKair 3000 Shelf is to define Network Interface Units ATM NIUs for STM 1 or E3 or 12xE1 NIUs for E1 Creating Network Interface Units For a detailed description of creating a W
418. wn below WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring Figure 8 1 Air Performance Summary Dialog Box 2 Select the time period for which you want to view air performance Current 15 Minutes or Last 24 Hours The air link parameters for the selected time interval are displayed WALKnet User s Manual 8 3 Chapter 8 Performance Monitoring The air performance summary parameters are as follows Location area Cell Name Sector Name BS BU ID TS BU ID The name of the cell for which the TS BU has been defined The name of the sector for which the TS BU has been defined The system name if defined for the BS BU to which this TS BU is registered or when no system name is defined the IP address of the BS BU The system name is defined in the BS BU Properties Edit dialog box The system name if defined for the TS BU or when no system name is defined the customer ID of the TS BU The system name is defined in the Terminal Station BU Properties Edit dialog box WALKnet User s Manual WALKair 1000 Air Performance Monitoring Downlink Uplink areas UAT AT ES SES DM NDM Unavailable Time The percentage of time that the air link path was unavailable The air link path is considered unavailable from the onset of 10 contiguous SESs or from the onset of the condition leading to a link failure Available Time The percentage of time that the air link path
419. wnload process is finished This Trap is sent when the configuration download process is aborted This Trap is sent when the configuration download process is finished and the user is trying to change WALKair parameters This trap is sent when the configuration of the physical port does not match the logical interface defined over this port This trap is sent when the recommended value of the external attenuator is changed This trap is sent from the BS BU when external clock source is selected and failed is unselected after the fail ure or has recovered from the failure This trap is sent when LOS is detected terminated on a QBRI port U interface This trap is sent when LOS is detected terminated on a QBRI port T interface This trap is sent when QBRI port U interface power feeding failure recovery is detected ON This trap is sent when local loopback is defined on the U Interface buAlrmData contains the Port and U Interface OFF This trap is sent when local loop back is removed on the U Interface buAlrmData con tains the Port and U Interface WALKnet User s Manual A 5 Appendix A Trap Type qtlcm Remote Loopback ON OFF qtlcm Payload Loopback ON OFF qtlcm Repeater Loopback ON OFF qtlcm Opera tional Status ON OFF Diagnostics IntFaultON OFF QticmPresistent PowerAlar mON OFF qticmTransient PowerAlarm Description ON This trap is sent when remote loopback is defi
420. x A system reference number is automatically assigned to the TS BU and displayed in the Terminal Station Index field Enter an identification number for the TS BU in the Customer ID Number field 4 In the Estimated BS TS Distance km field enter the approximate distance in km between the BS BU and TS BU Enter O to indicate a distance of less than 10 kilometers 5 In the Admin Status field select the administrative status of the TS BU from the dropdown list 6 Click OK The new TS BU is registered to the BS BU and is displayed in the selected slot in the Registered Terminals dialog box WALKnet User s Manual Terminal Station Basic Unit Management Displaying Terminal Station BU View Terminal Station BU View enables you to view and modify the configuration of a TS BU gt To access Terminal Station BU View Terminal Station BU View is accessed in one of the following ways In Navigation Tree by double clicking a TS BU node In the Registered Terminals dialog box by double clicking a TS BU In the Registered Terminals dialog box by selecting a TS BU and selecting View from the Terminals menu In the Main window by selecting Go to Terminal from the Configuration menu or by clicking View TS BU in the toolbar Browse to the required TS BU in the Browse TS dialog box and click OK Terminal Station BU View for the selected TS BU is displayed WALKnet User s Manual 4 61 Chapter 4 C ell
421. x enables you to examine and configure parameters of the PIB gt To access PIB Properties The Power Input Board Properties dialog box is accessed in one of following ways a Select Power Input Board from the Chassis Element menu in Shelf View and then select PIB 1 Properties or PIB 2 Properties a Select Power Input Board from the Element menu in Sector View and then select PIB 1 Properties or PIB 2 Properties The Power Input Board Properties dialog box for the selected PIB is displayed Figure 5 13 PIB Properties Dialog Box W3K Shelf Power Input Board Properties ioi x Location Cell Name SERVER Shelf ID WK Shelf PIB Number fi Settings Oper Status Power Feeding Chose Refresh Heb elp Response OK Q The Power Input Board Properties dialog box displays the configuration parameters of the selected PIB unit WALKnet User s Manual 5 37 Chapter 5 Shelf Management The following parameters are displayed in the Power Input Board Properties dialog box Location area Cell Name The name of the cell for which this PIB has been defined Shelf ID The name of the shelf for which this PIB has been defined If the Shelf name is not defined the Shelf s IP Address is used as the Shelf ID Read only PIB Number Power Input Board s number Settings area Oper Status Indicates the operational state Power feeding Power feed by this board No Power Power is not

WALKnet Version 7.7 User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents